JP2024125672A - Mahjong ball game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

[Problem] There is a problem that there is room for further improvement in order to make players aware of the interest of mahjong ball gaming machines. [Solution] The machine is equipped with a plurality of symbol entrances arranged in a game area, and a special game control means capable of executing a special game consisting of a plurality of unit games when a win is determined by the fact that the hand information matches predetermined winning information. The special games include at least BB12, BB13, and BB14. In the chance round of BB12, BB12 is configured to be overwritten by BB13, and in the chance round of BB13, BB13 is configured to be overwritten by BB14, and the number of chance rounds of BB13 is configured to be greater than the number of chance rounds of BB12. [Selected Figure] Fig. 47

Description

Regarding mahjong ball gaming machines.

Conventionally, mahjong ball gaming machines are equipped with a game board on which multiple ball entry ports are arranged corresponding to the designs of multiple types of mahjong tiles, a game ball launcher for launching a predetermined number of game balls into the game board per game, a display device for displaying game performance images, and a control device for controlling the progress of the game. When a player inserts a predetermined number of medals required to play one game into the medal insertion port, software installed in the control device of the mahjong ball gaming machine, which is made up of a microcomputer, starts a game and controls the progress of the game according to the player's discard operations and self-draw operations.

Most of the mahjong ball gaming machines mentioned above are based on the motif of mahjong, but in this specification, gaming machines that do not use mahjong rules or mahjong tiles (for example, card games or sugoroku), and when the figures complete a specified winning combination, pay out a number of gaming media corresponding to the winning combination, are also referred to as "mahjong ball gaming machines"

JP 2021-94348 A JP 2021-94349 A JP 2021-94350 A JP 2021-94351 A JP 2021-94352 A

However, even at present, mahjong ball gaming machines are not yet fully in use, and the reasons for this include the complexity of the gameplay and the tediousness of the gameplay, and there is still room for improvement in order to make players aware of the interest of mahjong ball gaming machines.

The mahjong ball game machine according to this embodiment is as follows:
A plurality of entrances arranged in the game area;
a special game control means for executing a special game consisting of a plurality of unit games when it is determined that a win has been made because the hand information matches predetermined winning information;
The special games include at least a first special game, a second special game, and a third special game,
In a predetermined unit game of the first special game, a transition from the first special game to the second special game is possible;
In a predetermined unit game of the second special game, a transition from the second special game to a third special game is possible;
This is a mahjong ball game machine characterized in that the number of predetermined unit games of the second special game is greater than the number of predetermined unit games of the first special game.

The mahjong ball gaming machine according to this embodiment has the effect of enabling improvements to be made to make players aware of the entertainment value of the mahjong ball gaming machine.

FIG. 1 is a front view of the mahjong ball gaming machine according to the first embodiment. FIG. 2 is a diagram showing an example of the arrangement of the symbol entrance holes located at the bottom of the game board and the symbols on the tiles in the mahjong ball game machine according to the first embodiment. FIG. 3 is a diagram showing an example of the configuration of an operation panel in the mahjong ball gaming machine according to the first embodiment. FIG. 4 is a functional block diagram of the mahjong ball gaming machine according to the first embodiment. FIG. 5 is a main flow chart on the main control board side in the mahjong ball gaming machine according to the first embodiment. FIG. 6 is a flowchart of the operation check mode processing on the main control board in the mahjong ball gaming machine according to the first embodiment. FIG. 7 is a flowchart of the medal management process on the main control board side in the mahjong ball gaming machine according to the first embodiment. FIG. 8 is a flowchart of the wait processing on the main control board in the mahjong ball gaming machine according to the first embodiment. FIG. 9 is an image diagram of the wait processing on the main control board side in the mahjong ball gaming machine according to the first embodiment. FIG. 10 is a flowchart of the remaining ball number setting process on the main control board side in the mahjong ball game machine of the first embodiment. FIG. 11 is a flowchart of the bonus role determination process on the main control board side in the mahjong ball gaming machine according to the first embodiment. FIG. 12 is a diagram showing a table for determining BB patterns and contents on the main control board side in the mahjong ball game machine according to the first embodiment. FIG. 13 is a flowchart of the game execution start control process on the main control board side in the mahjong ball gaming machine according to the first embodiment. FIG. 14 is a flowchart of the game execution control process during non-BB on the main control board side in the mahjong ball game machine according to the first embodiment. FIG. 15 is a flowchart of the BB game execution control process on the main control board side in the mahjong ball game machine according to the first embodiment. FIG. 16 is a flowchart of the BB game execution control process (final) on the main control board side in the mahjong ball game machine according to the first embodiment. FIG. 17 is a flowchart of the self-draw control process on the main control board in the mahjong ball gaming machine according to the first embodiment. FIG. 18 is a flowchart of the winning role determination process on the main control board side in the mahjong ball gaming machine according to the first embodiment. FIG. 19 is a flowchart of the payout number calculation process on the main control board in the mahjong ball gaming machine of the first embodiment. FIG. 20 is a diagram showing a table of the number of winning medals for each winning role on the main control board side in the mahjong ball game machine according to the first embodiment. FIG. 21 is a flowchart of the BB promotion determination process on the main control board side in the mahjong ball gaming machine according to the first embodiment. Figure 22 is a flowchart of the end button disabling process on the main control board in the mahjong ball gaming machine of the first embodiment. Figure 23 is a flowchart of the game ending process on the main control board side in the mahjong ball gaming machine of the first embodiment. Figure 24 is a main flowchart on the sub-control board side in the mahjong ball gaming machine of the first embodiment. FIG. 25 is a flowchart of the hand tile display control process on the sub-control board side in the mahjong ball gaming machine of the first embodiment. FIG. 26 is an image diagram showing command transmission according to the number of balls entering the pattern entrance in the mahjong ball gaming machine according to the first embodiment. FIG. 27 is an image diagram of the windmill navigation effect in the mahjong ball gaming machine according to the first embodiment. FIG. 28 is an image diagram showing a win in the mahjong ball gaming machine according to the first embodiment. FIG. 29 is an image diagram of the mahjong ball gaming machine according to the first embodiment in a normal gaming state. FIG. 30 is an image diagram of game 1 in the special game state in the mahjong ball gaming machine according to the first embodiment. FIG. 31 is an image diagram of game 2 in the special game state in the mahjong ball gaming machine according to the first embodiment. FIG. 32 is an image diagram of a chance effect in the mahjong ball gaming machine according to the first embodiment. FIG. 33 is an image diagram of the SC presentation in the mahjong ball gaming machine according to the first embodiment. FIG. 34 is an image diagram of the DB presentation in the mahjong ball gaming machine according to the first embodiment. FIG. 35 is an image diagram 1 of stage P in the mahjong ball gaming machine according to the first embodiment. FIG. 36 is an image diagram 2 of stage P in the mahjong ball gaming machine according to the first embodiment. FIG. 37 is an image diagram 1 of announcement presentation according to the game status in the mahjong ball gaming machine of the first embodiment. FIG. 38 is an image diagram 2 of announcement presentation according to the game status in the mahjong ball gaming machine of the first embodiment. Figure 39 is an image diagram of the segment display of a player in the mahjong ball gaming machine of the first embodiment. Figure 40 is an image diagram 1 of the operation check mode in the mahjong ball gaming machine of the first embodiment. Figure 41 is an image diagram 2 of the operation confirmation mode in the mahjong ball gaming machine of the first embodiment. FIG. 42 is an image diagram of a wait occurrence indication effect in the mahjong ball gaming machine of the first embodiment. FIG. 43 is a diagram showing an example of the arrangement of the symbol entrance holes located at the bottom of the game board and the symbols on the tiles in the mahjong ball game machine according to the second embodiment. FIG. 44 is a diagram showing an example of the configuration of an operation panel in the mahjong ball gaming machine according to the second embodiment. Figure 45 is a functional block diagram of the mahjong ball gaming machine according to the second embodiment. Figure 46 is a flowchart of the remaining ball number setting process on the main control board side in the mahjong ball gaming machine of the second embodiment. FIG. 47 is a diagram showing remaining ball number table 1 during special play in the mahjong ball game machine according to the second embodiment. FIG. 48 is a diagram showing a remaining ball number table 2 during special play in the mahjong ball game machine according to the second embodiment. Figure 49 is a diagram showing a table for determining BB patterns and contents on the main control board side in the mahjong ball gaming machine according to the second embodiment. Figure 50 is a flowchart of the game execution start control process on the main control board side in the mahjong ball gaming machine of the second embodiment. Figure 51 is a flowchart of the game execution control process during non-BB on the main control board side in the mahjong ball gaming machine of the second embodiment. Figure 52 is a flowchart of the BB game execution control process on the main control board side in the mahjong ball game machine of the second embodiment. Figure 53 is a flowchart of the game execution control process (chance round) during BB on the main control board side in the mahjong ball game machine of the second embodiment. FIG. 54 is a flowchart of the self-draw control processing on the main control board side in the mahjong ball gaming machine according to the second embodiment. Figure 55 is a flowchart of the winning role determination process on the main control board side in the mahjong ball gaming machine of the second embodiment. Figure 56 is a flowchart of the payout number calculation process on the main control board in the mahjong ball gaming machine of the second embodiment. FIG. 57 is a diagram showing a table of the number of winning medals for each winning role on the main control board side in the mahjong ball gaming machine according to the second embodiment. Figure 58 is a flowchart of the end button disabling process on the main control board in the mahjong ball gaming machine of the second embodiment. Figure 59 is an image diagram of the game flow in the mahjong ball gaming machine according to the second embodiment. Figure 60 is an image diagram of play in the center hitting area in the normal game state in the mahjong ball gaming machine of the second embodiment. Figure 61 is an image diagram of play in the center hitting area in the normal game state in the mahjong ball gaming machine of the second embodiment. Figure 62 is an image diagram of play in the left hitting area in the normal game state in the mahjong ball gaming machine of the second embodiment. Figure 63 is an image diagram of play in the right-hand hitting area in the normal game state in the mahjong ball gaming machine of the second embodiment. Figure 64 is an image diagram (part 1) of the game state transition in the mahjong ball gaming machine of the second embodiment. Figure 65 is an image diagram (part 2) of the game state transition in the mahjong ball gaming machine of the second embodiment. Figure 66 is an image diagram (part 3) of the game state transition in the mahjong ball gaming machine of the second embodiment. Figure 67 is an image diagram (part 4) of the game state transition in the mahjong ball gaming machine of the second embodiment. Figure 68 is an image diagram (part 5) of the game state transition in the mahjong ball gaming machine of the second embodiment. Figure 69 is an image diagram (part 6) of the game state transition in the mahjong ball gaming machine of the second embodiment. Figure 70 is an image diagram (part 7) of the game state transition in the mahjong ball gaming machine of the second embodiment. Figure 71 is an image diagram (part 8) of the game state transition in the mahjong ball gaming machine of the second embodiment. Figure 72 is a simplified image diagram of game state transitions in the mahjong ball gaming machine of the second embodiment. Figure 73 is a diagram showing the balls held and the number of rounds during special play in the mahjong ball game machine of the second embodiment. Figure 74 is a diagram showing a table for determining BB patterns and contents on the main control board side in the mahjong ball gaming machine according to the second embodiment. Figure 75 is a flowchart of the launch processing on the main control board in the mahjong ball gaming machine of the second embodiment. Figure 76 is an image diagram of a game in which consecutive steps are executed in the mahjong ball gaming machine according to the second embodiment. Figure 77 is an image diagram of a game in which consecutive steps are not performed in the mahjong ball game machine of the second embodiment.

<<<Present Embodiment>>>
The following embodiment will be described. The following embodiment relates to a mahjong ball game machine that does not have a mahjong motif, but is not limited thereto. For example, the present invention is also applicable to a mahjong ball game machine with an automatic tile dealing function, a mahjong ball game machine with a mahjong or sugoroku motif, etc. The present invention is merely one embodiment, and is not limited to the following aspects in terms of the location and function of each means, the order of each step in various processes, the timing of turning on and off flags, the names of means for processing each step, etc. Furthermore, the embodiment should not be interpreted as being limited to being applied to a specific one, and may be any combination. For example, a modification of a certain embodiment should be understood as a modification of another embodiment, and even if a certain modification and another modification are described independently, it should be understood that a combination of the certain modification and the other modification is also described.

First Embodiment
The first embodiment will be described below. The mahjong ball game machine according to the first embodiment is a mahjong ball game machine that uses a total of 17 types of tiles, including numbers 1 to 7, such as "1 (one)", "2 (two)", "3 (three)", "4 (four)", "5 (five)", "6 (six)", and "7 (seven)", "1 of diamonds (hereinafter referred to as playing card A)", "1 of spades (hereinafter referred to as playing card B)", "1 of clovers (hereinafter referred to as playing card C)", "1 of hearts (hereinafter referred to as playing card D)", and "characters A to F" to play a game (aiming for the combination of these tiles to be a winning role, which is a predetermined winning role shown in FIG. 20). That is, unlike a general mahjong ball game machine, it is configured to be able to play a game using tiles of a type different from mahjong tiles, but is not limited to this, and is a technology that can be applied to a general mahjong ball game machine. In addition, there is no problem in increasing or decreasing the types of tiles.

Next, the configuration of the front part of the cabinet of the mahjong ball game machine according to the first embodiment will be described. Fig. 1 is a front view showing the configuration of the front part of the mahjong ball game machine. As shown in Fig. 1, the front part of the mahjong ball game machine is basically composed of a game board 2, an operation panel 3, a launch handle 4 provided below the operation panel 3, a medal tray 5, an audio output port 7 that outputs voices and sound effects from a speaker (not shown), a lamp device 8, a guide rail 9, etc.

As shown in FIG. 1, the game board 2 is configured such that in the center of the game area surrounded by the guide rails 9 is a second performance display device 10 consisting of a liquid crystal display device, a special ball entrance 11 (also called a gadget) is located to the right of the second performance display device 10, and directly above the special ball entrance 11 is a special ball entrance operation gate 12 (also called gate 12) through which game balls can pass. Therefore, during the execution of a special game (BB), game balls that pass through the special ball entrance operation gate 12 will enter (or almost enter) the special ball entrance 11, so that by simply continuing to fire game balls toward the special ball entrance operation gate 12 during the execution of a special game, a player can continue to draw the most advantageous hand tile, the "7" tehai pattern. In addition, because of the above configuration, when a game ball is shot toward the special ball entrance operation gate 12 (when shot with the intention of passing through the special ball entrance operation gate 12), it is preferable to configure the special ball entrance operation gate 12 so that it can easily pass through. In addition, in FIG. 1, the special ball entrance operation gate 12 and the special ball entrance 11 are provided in the area on the right side of the game area, but they may be provided on the left side of the game area. Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 1 and FIG. 2, multiple (25 in this example) pattern ball entrances 13 (13-1, 13-2, ..., 13-25) are arranged horizontally below the game area of the game board 2. In addition, as shown in FIG. 2, pattern ball entrances 13-26 and pattern ball entrances 13-27 are arranged on the left side of the game area of the game board 2. In this example, a total of 27 pattern ball entrances 13 are arranged in the game area.

Each symbol entry port (symbol entry ports 13-1, 13-2, etc.) displays a tile symbol, and as shown in FIG. 2, the symbol entry ports 13-1, 13-2, etc., 13-25, located at the bottom of the playing area, display, from the left as seen by the player, "A (character A)", "B (character B)", "1", "2", "3", "TB (playing card B), "4", "TD (playing card D)", "5", "TC (playing card C)", "6", "TA (playing card A)", "7", "TA (playing card A)", "6", "TC (playing card C)", "5", "TD (playing card D)", "4". ", "TB (playing card B)", "3", "2", "1", "F (character F)", and "E (character E)" are assigned in that order. In addition, the symbol entrances 13-26 and 13-27 located on the left side of the play area are assigned "D (character D)" and "C (character C)" in that order from the left as seen by the player. Note that the order of the symbol entrances 13 (13-1, 13-2, ... 13-27) is merely an example and can be changed without any problem, and the number of symbol entrances is also merely an example and can be increased or decreased without any problem.

Note that to self-draw means to temporarily store new tiles as hand information. For example, if the hand information for two tiles has been temporarily stored as "4" Te-hai and "6" Te-hai, and then the game ball enters the pattern entry hole (13-13) corresponding to the "7" Te-hai and the player self-draws (self-draws) the "7" Te-hai, the temporarily stored hand information will be three tiles: the "4" Te-hai, the "6" Te-hai, and the "7" Te-hai.

In addition, a score increase device 1 activation gate 14 (also called gate 14) and a windmill 15 are arranged above the play area of the play board 2. A center ornament 16 is arranged in the center of the play area. Furthermore, a main display device 36 consisting of a 7-segment display area and a dot display area is provided in the lower part of the play board 2. Note that in the first embodiment, as shown in FIG. 2, the play area is described as being divided into three areas, with the left play area being the left hitting area, the middle play area being the middle hitting area (also called the perfect hitting area), and the right play area being the right hitting area, but the play area may be divided into two, in which case there are two areas, the left hitting area and the right hitting area, and the middle hitting area is an area included in the left hitting area.

The 7-segment display area of the main display device 36 is composed of 11 7-segment displays, not shown, including a number of stored coins display, a number of dispensed coins display, information display 1, information display 2, information display 3, status display 1, status display 2, status display 3, and status display 4 to 6.

The stored medal count indicator is an indicator that displays the number of medals stored in the storage device, for example, displaying 00 or 50. It also displays an error code (for example, 88) in the event of an unrecoverable error.

The payout number display shows the number of medals (01, 30, etc.) according to the number won at the end of play when a winning combination of symbols is displayed. It also displays 00 from the time medals are inserted until the end of play. It also displays an error code (e.g., E0-E7, F0-F7, etc.) when a recoverable error occurs, and an error code (e.g., 88) when an unrecoverable error occurs.

The information display 1 displays the number of game balls that have entered the ball entry ports, including the special ball entry port, during play. When the game start button is pressed, it displays 0. Furthermore, when an unrecoverable error occurs, it displays an error code (e.g., 88).

The information display 2 displays the number of consecutive operations of the release condition device while the condition consecutive device is in operation (for example, 1 to E as the number of rounds). The number also includes the operation of the release condition device of the operating game, and if a new BB is activated while a BB is in operation, the display returns to 1. When the condition consecutive device is not in operation, 0 is displayed. Also, an error code (for example, 8) is displayed when an unrecoverable error occurs.

The information display 3 displays the number of balls remaining to be entered through the special entry port (e.g., 0 to 5) while the open condition device is in operation. When the condition continuity device is not in operation, it displays 0. It also displays an error code (e.g., 8) when an unrecoverable error occurs.

The status indicator 1 is an indicator that displays the number of bets, and is always lit up according to the number of medals stored in the storage device. If the number of medals is less than 3, the indicator is off, and if the number is 3 or more, the indicator is lit.

The status indicator 2 is an indicator that displays the number of bets, and is always lit up according to the number of medals stored in the storage device. If the number of medals is less than 2, the indicator is off, and if the number is 2 or more, the indicator is lit.

The status indicator 3 is an indicator that displays the number of bets, and is always lit up according to the number of medals stored in the storage device. When the number of medals is 0, it is off, and when the number is 1 or more, it is lit.

The status indicators 4 to 6 are all lit during play and off at other times. When they change from off to on, it indicates that play has started, and when they change from on to off, it indicates the time when the next coin can be inserted or play can start.

The dot display area of the main display device 36 is composed of 15 dot displays: Te-hai area 1, Te-hai area 2, Te-hai area 3, reel area 1, reel area 2, reel area 3, operating pattern area, increase area 1, increase area 2, increase area 3, operation type area, reel acquisition area 1, reel acquisition area 2, reel acquisition area 3, and release condition device maximum continuous operation count display area.

Tehai area 1 displays the leftmost Tehai pattern (left Tehai). Tehai area 2 displays the second Tehai pattern from the left (middle Tehai). Tehai area 3 displays the third Tehai pattern from the left (right Tehai). Tehai areas 1 to 3 are collectively referred to as the Tehai areas.

The reel area 1 displays the pattern that is being selected by the reel (special ball entrance 11) and is displayed on the far left. The reel area 2 displays the pattern that is being selected by the reel and is displayed second from the far left. The reel area 3 displays the pattern that is being selected by the reel and is displayed third from the far left. The pattern that is being selected by the reel is configured to be displayed in the tehai area as a pattern displayed by the activation of the reel by operating the discard tile button 19, left selection button 27, right selection button 28, and decision button 29, which will be described later.

The operating pattern area displays a pattern corresponding to the operating pattern number (see pattern No. in Figure 12) determined by lottery at the start of play. Increase area 1 displays the operable state of score increase device 1. Increase area 2 displays the operable state of score increase device 2. Increase area 3 is always off. The operation type area uses three LEDs to display the type of conditional succession device (BB1 to BB7) that is in operation.

The reel acquisition area 1 displays that the pattern displayed in the te-hai area 1 is a pattern displayed by the operation of the reel (special ball entrance 11). The reel acquisition area 2 displays that the pattern displayed in the te-hai area 2 is a pattern displayed by the operation of the reel. The reel acquisition area 3 displays that the pattern displayed in the te-hai area 3 is a pattern displayed by the operation of the reel. The opening condition device maximum continuous operation count display area displays the opening condition device maximum continuous operation count (number of rounds) of the condition continuous device currently in operation.

LEDs that emit light in various colors are used as light sources in lamp-equipped decorative devices that correspond to lamp device 8 (see Figure 1).

As shown in FIG. 3, the operation panel 3 and its vicinity are provided with a first effect display device 16, which is composed of a liquid crystal display or the like, a medal insertion slot 17, and various operation buttons (button switches). These various operation buttons are composed of a BET button 18, a left button 19a, a middle button 19b, and a right button 19c for operating the discarded tiles, a medal payout button 25 that can be operated to pay out medals stored in the credits, a game end button 26 (also called the end button 26), a left selection button 27, a right selection button 28, a decision button 29, a sub input button SB, a cross button SB-2, and the like. The left button 19a, the middle button 19b, and the right button 19c are also called the discarded tile button 19. In the mahjong ball game machine according to the first embodiment, the BET button 18 and the win button (a button that can be operated when a winning hand is established) are configured as a common button (BET button 18), but may be configured as separate buttons.

When the BET button 18 is pressed during game standby while the display of the stored medal number indicator is 3 or more, the display is subtracted by 3 and the game is started. Note that the game is also started if the BET button 18 is pressed when three medals have been inserted.

During a game, when the main display device 36 displays three symbols, including the Tehai symbol and a symbol being selected by a reel, if the BET button 18 is operated, the following (1) or (2) will occur.
(1) When there are three Te-hai symbols and no "symbols being selected by the gambling device" are displayed: When a winning symbol combination is displayed in the Te-hai area, the game ends and a payout is made. On the other hand, when a winning symbol combination is not displayed in the Te-hai area, the BET button 18 is disabled. However, when there are no game balls remaining, the game ends automatically, and the BET button 18 cannot be operated.
(2) When "symbols being selected by a reel" are displayed: If all of the "symbols being selected by a reel" are displayed as hand tiles and result in a winning symbol combination, the "symbols being selected by a reel" displayed in each of the reel regions 1 to 3 are acquired (displayed) as symbols displayed by the activation of the reel, and then the game ends automatically when the BET button 18 is activated, and a payout is made. On the other hand, if all of the "symbols being selected by a reel" are displayed as hand tiles and do not result in a winning symbol combination, the reel is invalidated. It is also invalidated when there are no game balls remaining to be released.

In addition, when the BET button 18 is operated while the BB is in operation, the next game is automatically started (the game starts automatically when it becomes possible to start the game). However, the game is not automatically started in any of the following cases (1) to (5).
(1) After the game ends, if the accumulated points are less than 3.
(2) If the next game will be in a BB non-operating state (for example, in the case of the final round of BB or in the case of a blowout).
(3) When any of BB2 to BB6 is activated and the next round is the final round.
(4) When BB2 is activated and the fourth round of play ends.
(5) When BB1 or BB2 is activated and the second or third round of play ends.

When it is satisfied that any of BB2 to BB6 is in operation, that the final round is in progress, and that there is a possibility of activating a new BB, the system is configured to invalidate the operation to win using the BET button 18. Also, when the relationship (remaining balls ≧ (3 - "number of seven symbols obtained other than through the reel")) is satisfied, the system is configured to invalidate the operation to win using the BET button 18. Furthermore, when there is a symbol in the middle of being selected by the reel, the symbol in the middle of being selected by the reel is always considered to not be a "seven symbol obtained other than through the reel".

The seven symbol acquired from something other than a reel is a tehai symbol acquired based on the ball entering the symbol entrance 13-13, a seven symbol displayed in the tehai area, and a symbol with the reel acquisition area corresponding to that tehai area turned off (other display). The seven symbol acquired from a reel is a tehai symbol acquired based on the ball entering the special entrance 11, a seven symbol displayed in the tehai area, and a symbol with the reel acquisition area corresponding to that tehai area turned on.

The function of subtracting three reserved coins and starting a game is configured to disable operation of the BET button 18 if the wait process described below has not been completed. For example, the function of automatically starting the next game when the BET button 18 is operated while BB is activated as a winning operation is disabled if the wait process described below has not been completed. Note that the game may be configured to start automatically when the wait process described below is completed, or it may be configured not to start automatically but to start when the BET button 18 is operated again.

The left button 19a is a button for operating the discard of the leftmost Tehai pattern (left Tehai) in the Tehai area 1. It is also a button for operating the discard of the hand tile pattern (the pattern in the hand tile area 16 corresponding to the Tehai pattern) displayed in the left hand tile area 16-1 described later. The left button 19a is configured to be effective when a total of three Tehai patterns and "patterns in the middle of pattern selection by the role object" are displayed, and the number of game balls available for that game has not been reached. For example, when the left button 19a is operated when there is no display of "patterns in the middle of pattern selection by the role object," the Tehai pattern displayed in the left Tehai is discarded and the Tehai area 1 is blanked. At this timing, the left hand tile area 16-1 is similarly configured to be blanked. Also, for example, when the left button 19a is operated while the "pattern in the middle of being selected by the role" is displayed, the "pattern in the middle of being selected by the role" is acquired as the left tehai (the pattern displayed by the operation of the role) and displayed in the tehai area 1, and then the left tehai is automatically discarded when the left button 19a becomes effective. It is also configured to be effective when a continuous step in which multiple discarded tiles are operated is possible.

A lamp (e.g., an LED) is provided inside the left button 19a, and is configured to notify the discard state of the hand tile patterns displayed in the left hand tile area 16-1 described below. For example, when the lamp is on, it indicates a discard state in which the hand tile patterns can be discarded, and when the lamp is off, it indicates a discard state in which the hand tile patterns cannot be discarded. Note that the lamp may be turned on and off in the opposite way. It may also be configured to notify either discard state by lighting up, flashing, or emitting a different color.

The middle button 19b is a button for operating the discard of the second Tehai pattern from the left in the Tehai area 2 (middle Tehai). It is also a button for operating the discard of the hand tile pattern displayed in the middle hand tile area 16-2 described later. The middle button 19b is configured to be active when a total of three Tehai patterns and "patterns in the middle of pattern selection by the role" are displayed, and the number of game balls available for that game has not been reached. For example, when the middle button 19b is operated when there is no "pattern in the middle of pattern selection by the role", the Tehai pattern displayed in the middle Tehai is discarded and the Tehai area 2 is blanked. At this timing, the middle hand tile area 16-2 is similarly configured to be blanked. Also, for example, when the middle button 19b is operated while the "pattern in the middle of being selected by the role" is displayed, the "pattern in the middle of being selected by the role" is acquired as a middle tehai (a pattern displayed by the operation of the role), and is displayed in the tehai area 2, and then the middle tehai is automatically discarded when the middle button 19b becomes effective. It is also configured to be effective when a continuous step in which multiple discarded tiles are operated is possible.

A lamp (e.g., an LED) is provided inside the middle button 19b, and is configured to notify the discard state of the hand tile patterns displayed in the middle hand tile area 16-2 described below. For example, when the lamp is on, it indicates a discard state in which the hand tile patterns can be discarded, and when the lamp is off, it indicates a discard state in which the hand tile patterns cannot be discarded. Note that the lamp may be turned on and off in the opposite way. It may also be configured to notify either discard state by lighting up, flashing, or emitting a different color.

The right button 19c is a button for operating the discard of the third Tehai pattern from the left in the Tehai area 3 (right Tehai). It is also a button for operating the discard of the hand tile pattern displayed in the right hand tile area 16-3 described later. The right button 19c is configured to be enabled when a total of three Tehai patterns and "patterns in the middle of pattern selection by the role" are displayed, and the number of game balls available for that game has not been reached. For example, when the right button 19c is operated when there is no display of a "pattern in the middle of pattern selection by the role", the Tehai pattern displayed in the right Tehai is discarded and the Tehai area 3 is blanked. At this timing, the right hand tile area 16-3 is similarly configured to be blanked. Also, for example, when the right button 19c is operated while the "pattern in the middle of being selected by the role" is displayed, the "pattern in the middle of being selected by the role" is acquired as the right tehai (the pattern displayed by the operation of the role) and displayed in the tehai area 3, and then the right tehai is automatically discarded when the right button 19c becomes effective. It is also configured to be effective when a continuous step in which multiple discarded tiles are operated is possible.

A lamp (e.g., an LED) is provided inside the right button 19c, and is configured to notify the discard state of the hand tile patterns displayed in the right hand tile area 16-3 described below. For example, when the lamp is on, it indicates a discard state in which the hand tile patterns can be discarded, and when the lamp is off, it indicates a discard state in which the hand tile patterns cannot be discarded. Note that the lamp may be turned on and off in the opposite way. It may also be configured to notify either discard state by lighting up, flashing, or emitting a different color.

When pressed during game standby, the medal payout button 25 pays out and settles the medals corresponding to the CRE counter value and bet counter value described below.

The game end button 26 is a button that ends the game when there are three Te-hai symbols during the game, regardless of whether or not a prize has been won. Note that, when it is satisfied that any of BB2 to BB6 is in operation and the game is in the final round, and that there is a possibility that a new BB can be operated, the game is not ended by the game end button 26, but is moved to an "end button operation confirmation state (also called an operation confirmation state)". In other words, it is configured to invalidate the operation of the game end button 26. Also, it is configured to invalidate the operation of the game end button 26 when the relationship (remaining balls ≧ (3 - "number of seven symbols obtained other than by the reel")) is satisfied. Note that, it is also configured to invalidate the operation of the game end button 26 when there is a symbol in the middle of being selected by the reel. It is preferable that the game end button 26 is installed in a position that is difficult for the player to operate. It is also preferable that the game end button 26 is a button that is difficult for the player to operate easily. An example of a button that is difficult to operate is one whose operating surface does not protrude and is recessed below the button mounting surface.

The details will be described later, but to briefly explain, in the "end button operation confirmation state", operation of the game end button 26 is disabled for a period of 5000.53 ms after transition to this state. However, during this period, operation of the discard tile button 19 is enabled, and if the discard tile button 19 is operated, the "end button operation confirmation state" is terminated. Then, after 5000.53 ms has elapsed since transition to the "end button operation confirmation state", operation of the game end button 26 is enabled, and when the game end button 26 is operated, the game is terminated and the "end button operation confirmation state" is also terminated. Note that in the "end button operation confirmation state", the BET button 18 is disabled. Also, it is configured to transmit a control command by the control command transmission process described later at the timing of transition to and termination of the "end button operation confirmation state". In some of these special game states (end button operation confirmation states), the game is ended by operating the game end button 26 twice, but in states other than the special game state end button operation confirmation state and in normal game states, the game is ended with a single operation.

In addition, if there is a symbol in the middle of being selected by the reel during normal play, the operation of the game end button 26 is invalidated. However, if there is a symbol in the middle of being selected by the reel during the final round of BB (e.g., any of BB2 to BB6), the operation of the game end button 26 is also invalidated. In these cases, a warning based on the operation of the game end button 26 is not executed, but a warning may be executed by a display device, lamp, speaker, etc. In addition, if a winning combination is established when the game is forcibly terminated based on the operation of the game end button 26 (see step 3508 in FIG. 14, step 3808 in FIG. 15, step 3860 in FIG. 16, etc.), a payout is executed after the game ends in step 3750 in FIGS. 14 to 16 described later.

The left selection button 27 is a button for selecting the displayed pattern of the "patterns being selected by the reel" that are displayed multiple times when the reel is in operation. By operating this button, the next pattern to the left is selected.

The right selection button 28 is a button for selecting the displayed pattern of the "patterns being selected by the reel" that are displayed multiple times when the reel is in operation. By operating this button, the next pattern to the right is selected.

When the reel is in operation, the decision button 29 acquires (displays) the selected "pattern being selected by the reel" as the pattern displayed by the reel's operation.

The sub-input button SB is an operating member electrically connected to the sub-control board 3000, and when operated (pressed), a performance based on the operation is executed. The sub-input button SB may be configured to have a single press (an operation mode in which the sub-input button SB is pressed only once for a short period of time), a rapid press (an operation mode in which the sub-input button SB is pressed multiple times), and a long press (an operation mode in which the sub-input button SB is pressed continuously for a predetermined period of time). The operating member electrically connected to the sub-control board 3000, and when operated (pressed), a performance based on the operation is executed, is not limited to the sub-input button SB, but may have four operating parts (a cross key consisting of an up key, a down key, a left key, and a right key) of up, down, left, and right, and may have a cross button SB-2 described later that is configured to allow the user to select a performance to be executed by operating the operating parts, a lever that executes a performance when pulled toward the user, etc.

The cross button SB-2 is an operating member electrically connected to the sub-control board 3000, and by operating (pressing) the cross key, a performance based on that operation is selected. Note that the operating member is not limited to the selection of performance, and may be used to select the volume of the volume adjustment function or the light intensity of the light adjustment function.

When a player operates the various buttons mentioned above (pressing them to turn on the switch contacts), for example pressing the middle button 19b, a discard tile signal is generated, and this signal is input to a control board consisting of a microcomputer. Then, software (hereafter referred to as a program) installed in the ROM of the control board analyzes the input signal and executes processing corresponding to this analyzed input signal, thereby progressing the game.

The first effect display device 16 and the second effect display device 10 are used to display necessary information and effect images to the player as the game progresses. Here, these effect display devices are not managed by the main control board 1000 (the so-called main board, details of which will be described later) which is directly related to the prize ball payout decision, but by the sub-control board 3000 (the so-called sub-board, details of which will be described later) to which game information from the main control board 1000 is transmitted in one direction. The main control board 1000 and the sub-control board 3000 are control boards equipped with CPUs separately. Also, the sub-control board 3000 may be a sub-main board, and the effect display device may be a sub-sub board equipped with a CPU, and the effect display device may be configured to execute display control of effects based on commands from the sub-main board.

As shown in FIG. 3, the first performance display device 16 mainly displays a left hand tile area 16-1, a middle hand tile area 16-2, and a right hand tile area 16-3 as a hand tile area 16 which is a display area for the hand tile patterns that make up the player's hand, a credit area 16-4 which is a display area showing the current number of medals the player has stored in the mahjong ball game machine, a round display area 16-5 which is a display area showing successive rounds during a BB, a total number of medals won area 16-6 which is a display area showing the number of medals won in a series of BBs, a firing intensity display area 16-7 which is a display area showing the firing intensity as a number, a level meter display area 16-8 which is a display area showing the firing intensity with a level meter image, a recommended firing intensity display area 16-9 which is a display area showing (suggesting) the recommended firing intensity for the current game state, and a rank display area 16-10 which displays the player's rank, and outputs information to convey to the player information that is essential for progressing through the game in an easy-to-understand manner. The recommended firing strength display area 16-9 is an area that shows the firing strength when firing at the position of the windmill 15, and is an area that executes the windmill navigation effect described below. Although not shown, the first effect display device 16 displays the number of game balls remaining during one game. The round display area 16-5 may also display the number of remaining rounds in the current BB.

The left hand tile area 16-1 displays the hand tile pattern corresponding to the left tehai in tehai area 1, the middle hand tile area 16-2 displays the hand tile pattern corresponding to the middle tehai in tehai area 2, the right hand tile area 16-3 displays the hand tile pattern corresponding to the right tehai in tehai area 3, the credit area 16-4 displays a value corresponding to the number of stored coins indicator, and the round display area 16-5 displays a value corresponding to the information display 2. The total number of coins acquired area 16-6 may display a value corresponding to the number of coins paid out indicator during non-BBs, and during BBs, it may alternate between displaying the number of medals acquired in a series of BBs and the value corresponding to the number of coins paid out indicator.

In the following explanation, when it is stated that hand tile patterns are displayed in the left-hand tile area 16-1, it can be interpreted as the left tehai (left tehai pattern) being displayed in the tehai area 1, and vice versa. The same is true for the middle-hand tile area 16-2 and tehai area 2, and the right-hand tile area 16-3 and tehai area 3. For the sake of explanation, when it is stated that hand tile patterns are displayed in the left-hand tile area 16-1, it is assumed that the left tehai is also displayed in the tehai area 1, and the same is true for the middle-hand tile area 16-2 and tehai area 2, and the right-hand tile area 16-3 and tehai area 3.

The second effect display device 10 is primarily used as a means of displaying effects during play, and outputs information to enhance the entertainment value of the game, such as various navigation effects and effects during play, which will be described later.

Next, various functions of the Mahjong ball game machine according to the first embodiment will be described with reference to the block diagram in FIG. 4. First, the main control board 1000 is connected to various peripheral devices, including the sub-control board 3000 related to the performance display, the medal payout device 4000 that pays out medals based on payout instructions from the main control board 1000, and the main display device 36, so that information can be transmitted between them. Game-related information from the main control board 1000 is transmitted unidirectionally to the sub-control board 3000. Performance commands from the sub-control board 3000 are transmitted to the first performance display device 16 and the second performance display device 10 (this may be either unidirectional or bidirectional). The sub-input button SB, the cross button SB-2, etc. are also connected to the sub-control board 3000.

Here, the main control board 1000 includes a communication control means 1100 for receiving signals input from various sensors and transmitting various information and signals to various peripheral devices (e.g., the sub-control board 3000), a medal management means 1200 for managing the number of medal credits and the number of medal bets as the game progresses and for processing the payout, a game start determination means 1300 for determining whether or not the game start conditions are met, and a bonus pattern (also called a BB pattern) which is a combination of the BB role related to the current game using random numbers generated by a random number generation means. It has a BB pattern determination means 1600, a game control means 1900 that controls all aspects of the game, a game status temporary storage means 2100 that temporarily stores the current game status, etc., a payout control means 2200 that controls the medal payout device 4000 to pay out a predetermined number of medals, a game-related information storage means 2300 for storing information related to the game (image data, audio data, etc.), and an information transmission control means 2500 for transmitting information related to the game status, such as the bonus pattern related to the current game and the execution timing of effects, to the sub-control board 3000. Each means will be described in detail below.

First, the communication control means 1100 has an input signal receiving means 1101 that receives operation signals from the BET button 18, left button 19a, middle button 19b, right button 19c, medal payout button 25, end button 26, left selection button 27, right selection button 28, decision button 29, launch button 44, etc., input signals from the ball entry detection sensor of the special ball entry port 11, the ball entry detection sensors of the pattern ball entry ports 13-1, 13-2, etc., and the ball entry detection sensor of the special ball entry port operation gate 12, and an information transmitting means 1102 that transmits information and signals to various peripheral devices (e.g., the sub-control board 3000). When the BET button and the win button are provided separately, the communication control means 1100 is configured to receive input signals from the win button 24.

Next, the medal management means 1200 has a medal information temporary storage means 1201 that temporarily stores the number of medal credits and the number of medal bets.

The BB pattern determination means 1600 has a BB pattern determination/content determination table 1601 that is referenced when determining the bonus pattern for the current game.

Next, the game control means 1900 includes discard tile control means 1901 which controls the discard tile process, hand-drawn tile control means 1902 which controls the hand-drawn tile process, hand determination means 1903 which determines whether the hand tile data completes a winning combination, payout number calculation means 1904 which calculates the number of medals acquired for the winning combination when it is determined that the winning combination is completed, game end control means 1905 which controls the game end process, and special game control means 1906 which controls the BB process.

Here, the self-drawn tile control means 1902 has a self-drawn game ball supply control means 1902a that controls the supply of one game ball to the launching device when the conditions for executing a self-drawn tile are met. The self-drawn tile control means 1902 also has a remaining ball counter 1902b that counts the remaining number of game balls that can be used in the game.

The payout number calculation means 1904 also has a winning medal number table 1904a for each winning role that is referenced when calculating the number of medals won by a winning role.

The special game control means 1906 also has a special game game counter 1906a that counts the number of remaining games (remaining number of rounds) of the BB in the event that the game is overrun and not ended.

Next, the game status temporary storage means 2100 has temporary flag storage means 2101 which temporarily stores on/off information of various flags, temporary game ball number storage means 2102 which temporarily stores the number of remaining game balls in the game, temporary tile information storage means 2103 which temporarily stores tile information in the game, temporary BB pattern storage means 2106 which temporarily stores the BB role in the game, temporary winning information storage means 2110 which temporarily stores winning information in the game (winning role, number of medals won), and temporary special game related information storage means 2111 which temporarily stores information related to special games in the game (for example, the number of remaining games of BB). Here, the temporary tile information storage means 2103 has a temporary hand information storage means 2103a that temporarily stores hand information for the game, and a temporary discarded tile information storage means 2103b that temporarily stores discarded tile information for the game. The temporary winning information storage means 2110 has a temporary winning combination storage means 2110a that temporarily stores the winning combination for the game, and a temporary number of medals acquired storage means 2110b that temporarily stores the number of medals acquired calculated by the payout number calculation means 1904.

Next, the sub-control board 3000 has a display control means 3100 that executes control to display various effects, and an information transmission/reception control means 3200 that receives various information and signals from the main control board 1000. Each means will be described in detail below.

The display control means 3100 includes a self-drawn tile display control means 3120 that controls the display related to self-drawn tile, which increases the number of tiles in the hand corresponding to the ball that entered the ball entrance by one when the game ball enters one of the pattern entrances 13 or the special entrance 11, a discarded tile display control means 3130 that controls the display when a tile is discarded from the hand, a notice effect display control means 3140 that controls the display of effects related to the interest of the game, such as the stage change effect and chance notice described below, a navigation effect display control means 3150 that controls the display of the windmill navigation effect, which is an effect for supporting the interest of the game and the progress of the game, and a display-related information temporary storage means 3160 that stores information related to various displays such as effects.

Although not shown in the figure, the payout control means 2200 is provided with a control circuit section (launch control means) of the launch device, and is also connected to the payout control means 2200 and the launch device (launch handle 4, launch motor, ball feed device, etc.).

In the first embodiment, the game balls can be launched continuously depending on the game state. For example, in a normal game state (normal game state), three game balls can be launched continuously, and three game balls are loaded into a ball alignment passage provided upstream of a ball feed device that supplies game balls to the launching device, and when the previous game ball is launched, the ball feed device is operated to supply the next game ball to the launching device. Note that the game balls cannot be launched continuously depending on the game state, and in that case, one game ball is loaded into a ball alignment passage provided upstream of a ball feed device that supplies game balls to the launching device, and when the previous game ball is launched and the game ball enters the pattern ball entrance 13, etc., the ball feed device is operated to supply the next game ball to the launching device.

Here, the launching device is configured to determine the launch strength (launch position) based on the amount of operation of the launching handle 4 (e.g., the value of the launch volume) when it detects (touch detection) that the player has directly operated the launching handle 4, and to launch game balls one by one toward any position in the game area (left-hand hit area, center hit area, right-hand hit area). Even when game balls are launched continuously, the game balls are launched at regular intervals (e.g., 599.9 ms/ball) using a counter or timer so that more than 100 game balls cannot be launched per minute. In other words, the game balls are always launched at regular intervals (the launch speed does not differ) regardless of the game state, so that the player's launching skill is appropriately reflected regardless of the game state. In more detail, if the player wishes to hit with the right hand, the ball can be hit with the right hand by operating the launch handle 4 to a position corresponding to the firing strength at which a right hit can be performed, and if the player wishes to hit with the left hand, the ball can be hit with the left hand by operating the launch handle 4 to a position corresponding to the firing strength at which a left hit can be performed. Regardless of the state of the game, the game ball can always be launched with a launch strength based on the operation of the launch handle 4.

The launch handle 4 is provided with a launch button 44, allowing the player to launch game balls at any time (one ball at a time). Specifically, when the player is rotating the launch handle 4 to the right, the launch button 44 is operated (for example, pressed down to turn on) to launch game balls. In addition, from the viewpoint of gambling in this example, the launch motor, launch handle (strength adjustment function), and control circuit of the launch device are each designed so that the performance of the launch device will not change over a specified period of time or due to external noise, and durability is guaranteed. The launch handle 4 may also be equipped with a function to vibrate the launch handle 4.

The launch button 44 also functions as a button to start a game when pressed during game standby. However, if the button remains pressed, such as when a game ball is fired, this function to start a game is disabled, and the function to start a game is enabled only when the launch button 44 is pressed from an unpressed state. The button is also configured to be disabled if the wait process described below has not been completed. Unlike the BET button 18, the button does not have a winning function or a function to obtain a pattern displayed by the operation of a reel, but it may be configured to have such a function.

The part of the launching device, which is the entire device related to launching game balls, that gives kinetic energy to the game balls is composed of a single launching motor. The launching handle 4 is designed so that its launch strength returns to 0 when it is not being directly operated by the player (it is biased toward the reference position by a spring or the like, and returns to the reference position when the player releases the launching handle 4), allowing the player's strength adjustment skills to be reflected in the game results.

In addition, if a game ball launched from the launching device does not reach the play area and returns toward the launching device along the launching rail (the returning game ball is called a foul ball), a foul ball sensor may be provided to detect the foul ball. When a foul ball is detected, the ball alignment passage is configured to load game balls so that the number of detected game balls can be re-launched.

A sensor is provided on the launch passage (which may be on the playing area side of the launch device) so that the launched game balls can be detected. Game balls detected as launched balls are counted using a launched ball counter. The method of counting the launched game balls may be configured to measure by providing a sensor at a position where the game balls flowing down the playing area always pass, or to measure (add to a counter value) at the time of launch and subtract from the counter value if a foul ball or the like occurs.

Next, the process flow of the mahjong ball game machine 1 according to the first embodiment will be explained with reference to a flowchart etc. First, the process flow on the main control board side of the mahjong ball game machine according to the first embodiment will be explained.

Figure 5 is a main flow chart showing the general flow of processing performed by the main control board 1000. After the gaming machine is powered on, the processing in Figure 5 (a) is executed. That is, after the gaming machine is powered on in step 1000 and initial settings are made (not shown), in step 1002 the main control board 1000 checks the input port of the RAM clear button and determines whether or not the reset button (RAM clear button) of the power supply unit has been operated, i.e., whether or not an operation to intentionally clear the contents of the RAM has been performed by the manager of the gaming facility, etc.

If the answer is Yes in step 1002, in step 1008, the main control board 1000 executes the RAM clear process.

Next, in step 1010, the information transmission means 1102 transmits RAM clear information (command) indicating that the RAM of the main control board 1000 has been cleared to the sub-control board 3000 (this may be transmitted at that timing, or the command may be set at that timing and transmitted in the control command transmission process described below), and proceeds to processing in step 1016.

On the other hand, if the answer is No in step 1002, then in step 1004, the main control board 1000 checks the contents of the RAM area in the main control board 1000 (for example, by comparing the checksum recorded at the time of power outage with the amount of information stored in the RAM area).

Next, in step 1006, the main control board 1000 determines whether the contents of the RAM are abnormal (whether the information at the time of the power outage has not been accurately backed up in the RAM) based on the check result. If the answer is Yes in step 1006, i.e., if the data backed up in the RAM is abnormal, the process proceeds to step 1008.

On the other hand, if step 1006 returns No, meaning the data backed up in the RAM is normal, then in step 1012 the main control board 1000 acquires the various information commands stored (backed up) in the RAM of the main control board 1000 at the time of power outage, and in step 1014 transmits the acquired information commands to the sub-control board 3000 (they may be transmitted at that timing, or the commands may be set at that timing and transmitted in the control command transmission process described below), and proceeds to processing in step 1016.

Next, in step 1016, the main control board 1000 allows a scheduled execution interrupt (e.g., triggered by a hardware interrupt every 1.5 ms, but in this example, the interrupt period is T) related to the main processing on the main control board 1000 side shown in FIG. 10(b) {as a result, FIG. 10(b) is executed when the scheduled execution interrupt timing is reached}, and proceeds to processing in step 2000.

Next, in step 3300, the main control board 1000 executes the operation check mode process described below. Next, in step 3100, the main control board 1000 executes the medal management process described below. Next, in step 3200, the main control board 1000 executes the remaining ball count setting process described below. Next, in step 3250, the main control board 1000 executes the bonus role determination process described below. Next, in step 3400, the main control board 1000 executes the game execution start control process. Next, in step 3900, the main control board 1000 executes the game end process described below, and returns to step 3100. Below, the processes related to each subroutine are described in detail.

Next, the timer interrupt process will be described. The main control board 1000 executes the process shown in FIG. 1B based on an interrupt request that occurs when the fixed-time interrupt timing is reached. That is, when the fixed-time interrupt period T is reached (for example, a hardware interrupt every 1.5 ms), in step 2002, the main control board M executes a process for outputting an external signal (outputting information to an external terminal board, hall computer, etc.). Next, in step 2004, the main control board 1000 executes a random number update. Next, in step 2006, the main control board 1000 executes a control command transmission process (sends the commands set in each of the above processes to the sub-control board). Next, in step 2008, the main control board 1000 executes an error control process and returns to the process that was being executed immediately before the execution of this interrupt process.

Next, the NMI interrupt processing will be described. The main control board 1000 is configured so that a power-off signal from the reset IC is input to the NMI terminal of the CPU, and when the power to the gaming machine is turned off, the processing in FIG. 1(c) is executed. That is, when the power to the gaming machine is turned off (in this example, when an NMI interrupt occurs), in step 2052, the main control board M sets power-off information (e.g., a checksum) based on the information in the RAM area. Next, in step 2054, the main control board M prohibits writing to the RAM area and also prohibits timer interrupt processing, and transitions to power-off wait loop processing.

Next, FIG. 6 is a flowchart of the operation check mode processing related to the subroutine of step 3300 in FIG. 5. The operation check mode is a mode in which the ball entry rate is confirmed by measuring the ball entry rate of the ball entry detection sensors installed in the special ball entry gate 11, the special ball entry gate operation gate 12, the 27 pattern ball entry gates 13, and the score increase device 1 operation gate 14 at the pre-opening stage when the gaming machine is introduced to the hall. If a sensor is installed in the warp passage (not shown) of the center decoration 16, it may be configured to confirm the ball entry rate of these sensors. The timing of the operation check mode processing may be, for example, during the RAM clear processing in step 1008 or during the timer interrupt processing in step 2000. The operation check mode processing is a mode that cannot be switched to during play, but may be made switchable by a specified operation.

First, in step 3302, the main control board 1000 determines whether or not the start condition for the operation check mode process is met. The start condition is that the RAM clear button is operated for 15 seconds, but is not limited to 15 seconds. The RAM clear button may be operated for any period up to the time the gaming machine's startup wait time based on the RAM clear process has elapsed. This determination in step 3302 is preferably performed while the RAM clear process is being executed, but may be performed after the RAM clear process has been executed. It may also be determined whether or not the RAM clear button has been operated when the gaming machine's startup wait time based on the RAM clear process has elapsed. If the answer is No in step 3302, this process is terminated.

On the other hand, if the answer is Yes in step 3302, then in step 3304 the main control board 1000 sends an operation check mode start command to the sub-control board 3000. The operation check mode start command is a command that specifies the state, and is a command that indicates that the state has been transitioned to the operation check mode. Upon receiving this command, the sub-control board 3000 displays on the first performance display device 16 and the second performance display device 10 that the operation check mode is being started. For example, it displays "In operation check mode" (see (a) in Figure 40).

Next, in step 3306, the main control board 1000 starts the operation check mode, and in step 3308, the game is played in the operation check mode. In the operation check mode, the game is configured to be able to launch three balls (not limited to three balls) in succession by touching the launch handle 4 and rotating it to the right. In addition, after three balls have been launched, the launch handle 4 is held in place and an interval period of five seconds (not limited to five seconds) is allowed, after which three balls can be launched again in succession. In addition, in the operation check mode, the main control board 1000 is configured to send a command to the sub-control board 3000 indicating that a ball has entered the symbol entrance 13, the special entrance operation gate 12, etc.

In the operation confirmation mode, when a ball enters the symbol entry port 13 or the special entry port activation gate 12, the sub-control board 3000 displays "OK" in the "detection" column for each symbol entry port, each gate, and each role, as shown in FIG. 41. FIG. 41 is an enlarged view of the upper view of FIG. 40(b). On the other hand, if the ball entry cannot be detected, "NG" is displayed (see, for example, the special entry port 11). By pressing and holding the sub-input button SB for, for example, 10 seconds, the entry rate for each symbol entry port, each gate, and each special entry port is displayed (see the lower view of FIG. 40(b)). The display of the first performance display device 16 and the display of the second performance display device 10 may be displayed in reverse.

Next, in step 3310, the main control board 1000 determines whether or not the termination condition has been met. The termination condition here is that the RAM clear button has been operated, but is not limited to this, and another button (e.g., an end button) may be provided and the operation of this button may be set as the termination condition. If the answer is No in step 3310, the process returns to step 3308.

On the other hand, if the answer is Yes in step 3310, in step 3312, the main control board 1000 ends the operation check mode, and in step 3314, sends an operation check mode end command to the sub-control board 3000. The operation check mode end command is a command that specifies a state, and is a command that indicates that the operation check mode has ended. Based on receiving this command, the sub-control board 3000 displays on the second performance display device 10 that the operation check mode is ending. For example, it displays "operation check mode ended" (see the upper diagram of (c) in Figure 40). The first performance display device 16 may display that play can be started. For example, it displays "play can be started" (see the lower diagram of (c) in Figure 40). The display on the first performance display device 16 and the display on the second performance display device 10 may be displayed in reverse.

Next, in step 3316, the main control board 1000 clears all of the RAM contents on the main control board 1000 side (e.g., information in the temporary game status storage means 2100, etc.). The main control board 1000 may also clear part of the RAM contents on the main control board 1000 side. In other words, it is sufficient that the contents stored in the operation check mode are cleared.

By providing this kind of operation check mode, the hall can measure and check the winning rate before opening and adjust the gaming machine. Furthermore, by making adjustments, the fairness of the game can be ensured.

The number of shots fired per cycle in the operation check mode (3 shots) is set to the same as the number of shots fired per cycle in the self-draw control process in normal game mode (described below). By setting it in this way, the firing conditions during actual gameplay can be simulated in the operation check mode.

The interval period after three balls have been fired is longer than the period from when the last game ball fired in one continuous shooting cycle is fired until it enters the ball entry port. Whether the ball entry port into which the last game ball fired in one continuous shooting cycle enters is the leftmost symbol ball entry port 13-1 in the game area, the rightmost symbol ball entry port 13-25, any other symbol ball entry port 13, or the special ball entry port 11, the interval period is longer than the period from when the last game ball fired in one continuous shooting cycle is fired until it enters the ball entry port. By setting the interval period in this manner, it is possible to ensure that the last game ball fired enters before the next continuous shooting cycle can begin.

The condition for starting the operation check mode is not limited to pressing and holding the RAM clear button. For example, a different button (such as the sub input button SB or a button connected to the main control board) or a switch connected to the main control board may be used. Also, the start condition may be to start the mode while at least two buttons are pressed simultaneously.

It is also possible to avoid clearing the RAM before and after the operation check mode is executed. By configuring it in this way, for example, when it is desired to execute the operation check mode while leaving the game state of a special game, the operation check mode can be executed without deleting the special game data. Also, by switching to the operation check mode using another button (such as the sub input button SB or a button connected to the main control board) or a switch connected to the main control board, the operation check mode can be executed without deleting the necessary data. It is also possible to switch to the operation check mode by starting up with at least two buttons pressed simultaneously.

In addition, the measurement data during the operation check mode may be stored, and the previous measurement data may be displayed as history information during the next operation check mode. Furthermore, the measurement data from several previous operation check modes may be displayed as history information. In this way, it is possible to compare the ball entry status of various ball entry ports according to the nail settings. Then, by adjusting the nails based on the comparison results of the ball entry rate of the pattern ball entry port 13-13 directly connected to the BB, the ball payout rate of the mahjong ball game machine can be adjusted.

In addition, during the operation check mode, it is preferable to invalidate some errors such as abnormal ball entry errors, ball detection errors before the start of play, ball retention errors, and insufficient circulating ball errors, even if they occur, and it is preferable to enable other errors (e.g., radio wave detection errors, magnet detection errors, etc.) and issue an error notification, etc. In addition, if other errors are detected, an error notification may be executed when the operation check mode ends. Also, if other errors are detected, the game may be stopped when the operation check mode ends. Furthermore, it is preferable to send an error command when an error is detected, but it is preferable not to display an error on the sub-control board 3000 side. By configuring in this way, the hall staff will not handle errors in the operation check mode, which is a maintenance mode outside of business hours, so the ball entry rate at the ball entry port, etc. can be easily checked.

The following describes (1) to (3) what happens when power is cut off during the operation check mode and then restored.
(1) If power is cut off during operation check mode and normal recovery is performed (for example, recovery via steps 1002, 1004, 1006, 10012, and 1014 in FIG. 5), a RAM clear process is executed and the game is returned to the normal game state.
(2) If power is cut off during operation check mode, and when power is restored, a RAM clear operation is performed and it becomes time to start RAM clear (for example, if the answer is Yes in step 1002 of FIG. 5), the RAM clear process is executed and the game is transitioned to the normal game mode.
(3) If power is cut off during operation check mode, and when power is restored, operation check mode is operated and the operation check mode is started up to switch to operation check mode, a RAM clear process is executed and the mode is switched to operation check mode.

Next, FIG. 7 is a flowchart of the medal management process, which is a subroutine of step 3100 in FIG. 5.

First, in step 3101, the medal management means 1200 determines whether or not the game is in a waiting state. In other words, it determines whether or not a game is being played. If the answer is No in step 3101, this process ends.

On the other hand, if step 3101 is Yes, that is, if it is determined that a game is currently being played, then in step 3102, the medal management means 1200 refers to the medal information temporary storage means 1201 and the flag temporary storage means 2101 to determine whether the counter value of the bet counter (a counter for measuring whether the number of medals required to play one game in the mahjong ball gaming machine has been bet) is "3" and the counter value of the CRE counter (a counter for measuring the number of medals stored electronically in the gaming machine) is "50". Note that if step 3101 is currently being played (Yes), step 3102 may be configured to be Yes.

If the answer is Yes in step 3102, then in step 3104 the medal management means 1200 drives the medal blocker (not shown, but configured to be switchable between a medal insertion state and a medal insertion state) to a medal insertion disabled state, and proceeds to step 3108. On the other hand, if the answer is No in step 3102, then in step 3106 the medal management means 1200 drives the medal blocker to a medal insertion enabled state, and proceeds to step 3108. Note that in the event of a specified error (e.g., radio wave detection error, magnet detection error, etc.), the medal insertion disabled state is set by error time control processing.

Next, in step 3108, the medal management means 1200 determines whether the input signal receiving means 1101 has received a medal insertion signal. If the answer is Yes in step 3108, in step 3110, the medal management means 1200 refers to the medal information temporary storage means 1201 and determines whether the bet counter value is not "3". If the answer is Yes in step 3110, in step 3112, the medal management means 1200 adds "1" to the bet counter value in the medal information temporary storage means 1201 and proceeds to step 3116. On the other hand, if the answer is No in step 3110, in step 3114, the medal management means 1200 adds "1" to the CRE counter value in the medal information temporary storage means 1201 and proceeds to step 3116.

Next, in step 3116, the medal management means 1200 refers to the medal information temporary storage means 1201 and displays the current medal information (number of bets, number of credits) on the main display device 36. Then, in step 3118, the medal management means 1200 sets a command related to the current medal information (a command to the sub-control board 3000 side, which is sent in the control command sending process of step 2006) and proceeds to step 3138. In this way, in the first embodiment, when medals are inserted into the gaming machine, if the bet counter value is not the maximum number (3 in this example), 1 is added to the bet counter value, and if the bet counter value is the maximum number, 1 is added to the CRE counter value.

On the other hand, if the answer is No in step 3108, then in step 3120, the medal management means 1200 determines whether the input signal receiving means 1101 has received a payout button operation signal, i.e., whether the player has pressed the medal payout button 25. If the answer is Yes in step 3120, then in step 3124, the medal management means 1200 refers to the medal information temporary storage means 1201 and determines whether the CRE counter value is greater than "0". If the answer is Yes in step 3124, then in step 3126, the medal management means 1200 subtracts "1" from the CRE counter value of the medal information temporary storage means 1201 and proceeds to step 3132. Note that the operation of the medal payout button 25 in step 3120 may be an operation of pressing and holding the medal payout button 25 for a predetermined time (e.g., 5 seconds) or multiple operations. In the case of multiple operations, the CRE counter value may be subtracted and settled with the first operation, and the bet counter value may be settled with the second operation, or the bet counter value may be subtracted and settled with the first operation, and the CRE counter value may be settled with the second operation.

Next, in step 3132, the medal management means 1200 drives the medal payout device 4000 and ejects one medal into the medal tray 5. Next, in step 3134, the medal management means 1200 references the medal information temporary storage means 1201 and displays the current medal information (number of bets, number of credits) on the main display device 36. Then, in step 3136, the medal management means 1200 sets a command related to the current medal information (a command to the sub-control board 3000, which is sent in the control command sending process of step 2006) and proceeds to step 3124.

On the other hand, if the answer is No in step 3124, then in step 3128 the medal management means 1200 refers to the medal information temporary storage means 1201 and determines whether the bet counter value is greater than "0". If the answer is Yes in step 3128, then in step 3130 the medal management means 1200 subtracts "1" from the bet counter value in the medal information temporary storage means 1201 and proceeds to step 3132. If the answer is No in step 3120 or step 3128, then the process proceeds to step 3138.

Next, in step 3138, the game start determination means 1300 determines whether or not the input signal receiving means 1101 has received a BET button operation signal, i.e., whether or not the player has operated the BET button 18. If the answer is Yes in step 3138, then in step 3140, the game start determination means 1300 refers to the medal information temporary storage means 1201 and determines whether or not the bet counter value is "3" (in this example, the maximum value of the bet counter is 3). On the other hand, if the answer is No in step 3138, the process proceeds to step 3102.

If the answer is Yes in step 3140, in step 3180, the game start determination means 1300 executes the wait process described below.

Next, in step 3142, the game start determination means 1300 clears the bet counter to zero.

Next, in step 3144, the game start determination means 1300 refers to the medal information temporary storage means 1201 and displays the current medal information (number of bets, number of credits) on the main display device 36.

Next, in steps 3146 and 3148, the game start determination means 1300 sets a command related to the current medal information (a command to the sub-control board 3000 side, which is sent by the control command sending process of step 2006) and a game start command (a command to the sub-control board 3000 side, which is sent by the control command sending process of step 2006).

Next, in step 3150, the game start determination means 1300 clears the information related to the previous game (hand information, bonus pattern, etc.) on the main display device 36.

Next, in step 3152, the medal management means 1200 drives the medal blocker to prevent medals from being inserted, and proceeds to the next process (step 3200, setting the number of remaining balls).

On the other hand, if the answer is No at step 3140, then in step 3156, the game start determination means 1300 refers to the medal information temporary storage means 1201 and determines whether the CRE counter value is not "0". If the answer is Yes at step 3156, it determines that there is no CRE counter value in the medal information temporary storage means 1201 that can be bet on, and proceeds to step 3102. On the other hand, if the answer is No at step 3156, then in steps 3158 and 3160, the game start determination means 1300 subtracts "1" from the CRE counter value in the medal information temporary storage means 1201 and adds "1" to the bet counter value.

Next, in step 3162, the game start determination means 1300 refers to the medal information temporary storage means 1201 and displays the current medal information (number of bets, number of credits) on the main display device 36. Then, in step 3164, the game start determination means 1300 sets a command related to the current medal information (a command to the sub-control board 3000 side, which is sent in the control command sending process of step 2006) and proceeds to step 3140.

Next, FIG. 8 is a flowchart of the wait process related to the subroutine of step 3180 in the medal management process S3100. The wait process is a process that limits the number of games and the number of shots per time, and limits the number of games started per minute to 7 and the number of games started per three minutes to 20, but is not limited to these times and numbers. The wait process also limits the number of shots per minute to not exceed 100.

First, in step 3180-2, the game start determination means 1300 determines whether or not condition 1 (also referred to as wait condition 1) is satisfied. In detail, the game start determination means 1300 determines whether or not the elapsed time of the timer set at the start of play 7 games ago, among the timers set in step 3402 of the game execution start control process described below, exceeds 60 seconds. If the answer is No in step 3180-2, the process proceeds to step 3180-8.

On the other hand, if the answer is Yes at step 3180-2, then in step 3180-4, the game start determination means 1300 determines whether or not condition 2 (also referred to as wait condition 2) is satisfied. In detail, the game start determination means 1300 determines whether or not the elapsed time of the timer set at the start of play 20 games ago, among the timers set in the game execution start control process, exceeds 180 seconds. If the answer is No at step 3180-4, the process proceeds to step 3180-8.

On the other hand, if the answer is Yes in step 3180-4, then in step 3180-6, the game start determination means 1300 determines whether or not condition 3 (also referred to as wait condition 3) is met. In detail, the game start determination means 1300 determines whether or not a predetermined calculation value is 100 or less. The predetermined calculation value is the sum of the timers set at the start of the game, which are identified from among the timers set at the start of the game and which have an elapsed time of more than 60 seconds, the total number of balls that have been scored since the game in which the timer was set, and this calculated value plus the maximum number of balls that can be fired by the gaming machine, which is 25 (not limited to this, and may be any predetermined value). If the answer is No in step 3180-6, then the process proceeds to step 3180-8.

In step 3180-8, the game start determination means 1300 executes a process to disable the operation of the BET button 18. The game start determination means 1300 executes a wait process to disable the operation of the BET button 18 until all of the wait conditions 1 to 3 are satisfied. Note that any of the wait conditions 1 to 3 may be omitted, in which case it is preferable not to set the wait condition 3. Furthermore, if the game start determination means 1300 is not in a state where it is not possible to insert a medal, it drives the medal blocker to a state where it is possible to insert a medal.

Next, in step 3180-10, the game start determination means 1300 transmits a command to the sub-control board 3000 to prompt the player to insert a medal. Based on receiving this command, the sub-control board 3000 changes the display of the game end image showing the result of the previous game (see (d) of FIG. 40) to display on the second performance display device 10 that medals can be inserted. For example, it displays "medals can be inserted" (see the upper diagram of (e) of FIG. 40). In conventional mahjong ball game machines, the game machine is controlled so that medals cannot be inserted during the wait process, but the mahjong ball game machine according to the first embodiment is configured to control the game machine so that medals can be inserted even during the wait process. Therefore, the game machine is configured to display a notice encouraging the player to insert a medal ("medals can be inserted" as a medal insertion promotion notice) using the first performance display device 16 or the second performance display device 10, or to notify the player by sound using a speaker. By configuring it this way, preparations for playing the game can be made while the game is in a wait processing state, which simply involves waiting, so that the game can be played smoothly after the wait processing is released. This also ensures that the game is fair.

Next, in step S3180-12, a command indicating the remaining wait time is sent to the sub-control board 3000, and the process returns to step S3180-2. The command indicating the remaining wait time may be any command indicating the maximum time of wait conditions 1 or 2. Based on the received command indicating the remaining wait time, the sub-control board 3000 changes the display of the game end image indicating the result of the previous game (see the lower diagram of (d) in FIG. 40) to indicate that the game is waiting and the remaining wait time. For example, it displays "waiting, 5 seconds remaining" (see the lower diagram of (e) in FIG. 40). The sub-control board 3000 also uses a speaker to notify the remaining wait time. By notifying the remaining wait time in this way, the player can take this time into consideration when preparing to play the game, such as inserting a medal, and can smoothly play the game after the wait process is released by operating the BET button 18 at the timing when the remaining wait time becomes 0. In addition, the process can ensure the fairness of the game. In addition, in FIG. 40(e), the display of the first performance display device 16 and the display of the second performance display device 10 may be displayed in reverse.

Note that even if wait condition 3 is not satisfied (No in step 3180-6), a command indicating the remaining wait time may be sent. In this case, the remaining time may be set to indicate the time of wait condition 2 (e.g., 180 seconds) and sent. Also, a command different from the command indicating the remaining wait time may be sent.

Next, if all of the processes in steps S3180-2, S3180-4, and S3180-6 are Yes, in step 3180-14, the game start determination means 1300 executes a process to enable the operation of the BET button 18. Here, the sub-control board 3000 displays on the second performance display device 10 that the game can be started. For example, it displays "Game can be started" (see the upper diagram of FIG. 40(f)). The sub-control board 3000 also displays on the first performance display device 16 that the BET button 18, which was previously disabled, can be operated. For example, it displays "Press the BET button" (see the lower diagram of FIG. 40(f)). Note that the display on the first performance display device 16 and the display on the second performance display device 10 may be displayed in reverse.

Next, in step 3180-16, the game start determination means 1300 determines whether or not the BET button 18 has been operated. If the answer is No in step 3180-16, this process is repeated until the BET button 18 is operated. On the other hand, if the answer is Yes in step 3180-16, the game start determination means 1300 determines that the BET button 18 has been operated, and ends this process. Note that step 3180-16 may not be provided, and the operation of the BET button 18 previously operated in step 3138 may be processed as valid in step 3180-14. Furthermore, if a medal can be inserted, the game start determination means 1300 drives the medal blocker to a medal insertion state.

The order of the processing of steps S3180-2, S3180-4, and S3180-6 is not limited to this example, and may be in any order. In addition, these three steps may be performed in parallel, and it is preferable to execute a wait process until all steps result in Yes.

By providing wait processing in this way, preparations for playing the game, such as inserting medals, can be made while the wait processing is being performed, so that the wait time, during which nothing could be done until now, can be effectively utilized, and the game can be played smoothly after the wait processing is released. This processing also ensures the fairness of the game. Note that the wait processing S3180 may be performed as a process prior to step 3138.

Next, a first example of the wait process will be described with reference to FIG.
(Wait condition 1)
The time that has elapsed since the start of the seventh game (seventh game) is 75 seconds, which is more than 60 seconds, and therefore wait condition 1 is satisfied.
(Wait condition 2)
The time elapsed from the start of the 20th game (20th game) was 175 seconds, which is less than 180 seconds, so wait condition 2 is not satisfied.
(Wait condition 3)
The most recent game start that has elapsed more than 60 seconds is the start of the game 6 games ago. Therefore, the total number of balls that have entered since the game 6 games ago is 80, and if the maximum number of shots of the gaming machine is 25, 80 + 25 = 105, which exceeds 100, does not satisfy the wait condition 3. The number of balls that have entered is configured to be stored for each game. For example, the first time = 15 balls, the second time before = 10 balls, etc. Also, the number of balls that have entered is stored up to the 7th game ago, and thereafter, the oldest balls are discarded (overwritten). Re-shots are not counted.
(Result of weight processing)
Since the wait condition 2 (step 3180-4 in FIG. 8) and the wait condition 3 (step 3180-6 in FIG. 8) are not satisfied, the operation of the BET button 18 is invalidated (step 3180-8 in FIG. 8). The operation of the BET button 18 becomes valid when five seconds have elapsed (see (f) in FIG. 40).

Next, a second example of the wait process will be described with reference to Fig. 9B. The second example is when more than five seconds have passed since the first example, specifically when six seconds have passed.
(Wait condition 1)
The time that has elapsed since the start of the seventh game (seven games ago) is 81 seconds, which is more than 60 seconds, and therefore wait condition 1 is satisfied.
(Wait condition 2)
The time elapsed from the start of the 20th game (20 games ago) was 181 seconds, which is more than 180 seconds, and therefore wait condition 2 is satisfied.
(Wait condition 3)
Among the start of a game in which the elapsed time exceeds 60 seconds, the most recent one is the start of the game 5 games ago. Therefore, the total number of balls that have entered since the game 5 games ago is 60. If the maximum number of shots of the gaming machine is 25, then 60 + 25 = 85, which does not exceed 100, and therefore satisfies wait condition 3.
(Result of weight processing)
Since all of the wait conditions 1 to 3 (steps 3180-2, 4, and 6 in FIG. 8) are satisfied, operation of the BET button 18 is validated (step 3180-14 in FIG. 8).

In addition, in Example 1, if wait condition 1 is not satisfied, there is no game start in which more than 60 seconds have elapsed until the seventh game, so the operation of the BET button 18 may be invalidated without determining wait condition 3. By configuring in this way, the wait processing time can be shortened.

The Amusement and Entertainment Act's "Standards for gaming machines that may significantly stimulate gambling" section on ball-playing machines stipulates that "the machine must have the capacity to allow players to play using more than a number of balls, etc., roughly equivalent to a gaming fee of 400 yen plus the consumption tax, etc., per minute." The wait process in the first embodiment is a process to ensure this standard. Specifically, one game of a ball-playing machine costs three balls (60 yen), and in order to keep the cost within 400 yen/minute, six times (60 yen x 6 = 360 yen) is too few, so it is set to seven times (60 yen x 7 = 420 yen). Wait condition 1 is a condition based on seven times, and it is determined whether the elapsed time of the timer set at the start of the seventh game before exceeds 60 seconds. However, if the game continues at a game speed of 420 yen/min, the cost will "generally" exceed 400 yen/min after a few games. For this reason, the wait condition 2 is provided. Specifically, the game is designed so that 20 times (60 x 20 = 1200 yen) fit within 180 seconds (3 minutes x 400 = 1200 yen), and the wait condition 2 is set so that the elapsed time from the start of the game 20 games ago exceeds 180 seconds. In this way, the wait condition 1 can provide a gaming machine that maintains the lightness of continuous play by attacking the game speed at the very limit in the short term, while the wait condition 2 ensures that the entertainment business law is observed in the long term. In addition, the wait condition 1 checks the timer 7 games ago, and the wait condition 2 checks the timer 20 games ago, which is less than three times the number of games, 7 games, used in the wait condition 1. In this way, by ensuring that the number of games in wait condition 2 is not n times the number of games in wait condition 1, wait condition 1 allows for the minimum play speed in the short term to be achieved, preserving the agility of continuous play, while wait condition 2 ensures compliance with the Entertainment and Amusement Act in the long term, making it possible to provide a gaming machine.

Next, FIG. 10 is a flowchart of the remaining ball count setting process, which is a subroutine of step 3200 in FIG. 5.

First, in step 3202, the game start determination means 1300 refers to the flag temporary storage means 2101 to determine whether or not the special game flag is on. The special game flag is a flag that is turned on by the role determination means 1903 in step 3704, which will be described later.

If the answer is Yes in step 3202, in step 3204, the game start determination means 1300 refers to the flag area of the temporary flag storage means 2101 and determines whether the type of special game is BB1 or BB7. In other words, the game start determination means 1300 determines whether the type of special game is any of BB2 to BB6.

If the answer is Yes in step 3204, the game start determination means 1300 determines whether the special game is the final round or not in step 3206. If the answer is Yes in step 3206, the game start determination means 1300 sets n _S (the number of balls corresponding to the type of special game: "21 to 25" in this example) as the information of the remaining number of balls n in the temporary game ball number storage means 2102 in step 3208, and ends this process.

In detail, the game start determination means 1300 sets the remaining number of balls n to 21 in the case of BB2, sets the remaining number of balls n to 22 in the case of BB3, sets the remaining number of balls n to 23 in the case of BB4, sets the remaining number of balls n to 24 in the case of BB5, and sets the remaining number of balls n to 25 in the case of BB6. In more detail, the remaining number of balls n is set to the counter value n of the remaining ball counter 1902b.

On the other hand, if the answer is No in steps 3204 and 3206, in step 3210, the game start determination means 1300 sets _nT (the number of balls in a special game other than the final round: "5" in this example) as the information on the remaining number of balls n in the temporary game ball number storage means 2102, and ends this process. In detail, the value of the remaining number of balls n is set to the counter value n of the remaining ball number counter 1902b.

If the answer is No in step 3202, in step 3212, the game start determination means 1300 sets n _U (the number of balls during normal play: “4” in this example) as the information on the number of remaining balls n in the game ball number temporary storage means 2102, and ends this process. In detail, the value of the number of remaining balls n is set to the counter value n of the remaining ball counter 1902b.

Here, _nT is set to "5" and _nU is set to "4" uniformly, but this is not limiting (preferably _nT > _nU ). For example, when a predetermined condition is met (for example, when a random number is obtained and the lottery is won or lost), the n value may be set appropriately (for example, by referring to a table to allocate a specific number, or by uniformly setting a large number in the case of a win and a small number in the case of a loss). In this case, particularly in the normal game state, it is preferable to set a number larger than the number of plays required to establish a winning combination (in this example, even three balls are possible). In addition, the mahjong ball game machine according to the first embodiment may set the game in which the winning combination is won with the BB combination as the first round.

Next, FIG. 11 is a flowchart of the bonus role determination process related to the subroutine of step 3250 in FIG. 5. First, in step 3252, the BB pattern determination means 1600 acquires a random number for determining a bonus role. Next, in step 3254, the BB pattern determination means 1600 refers to the BB pattern determination/content determination table 1601 and the random number for determining a bonus role acquired in step 3252 to determine a bonus pattern (a combination of winning roles that will result in a BB role if a win occurs in the current game). Next, in step 3256, the bonus pattern determined in step 3254 is temporarily stored in the BB pattern temporary storage means 2106, and the process proceeds to the next process (the process of step 3400).

Here, FIG. 12 is an example of the BB pattern and content determination table 1601 according to the first embodiment, and is a diagram showing a bonus pattern determination table. As shown in the figure, in the first embodiment, the type of BB to be activated and the bonus pattern are determined by drawing lots from 39 patterns.

For example, when not in a special game state (when BB is not activated, during normal gameplay, normal game state), the system is configured to determine the pattern by referring to the column for when BB is not activated in the bonus pattern determination table. For example, when the acquired random number for determining the bonus role is a random number indicating pattern 1, and pattern 1 is determined, the type of BB that will be activated is BB1, and the bonus pattern is a BNS seven combination. Here, patterns 1 to 39 indicate the activated pattern numbers. A BNS seven combination is a combination in which the hand tile pattern "7" is displayed in the left hand tile area 16-1, middle hand tile area 16-2, and right hand tile area 16-3, as shown in FIG. 3. Note that the only random number for determining the bonus role that is acquired in the BB1 state is a random number indicating pattern 1, and when pattern 1 is determined, the type of BB that will be activated is BB1.

The obtained bonus role determination random number is a random number that indicates pattern 2. When pattern 2 is determined, the type of BB that is activated is BB1, and the bonus pattern is BNS chance symbol 6. BNS chance symbol 6 is a combination in which the hand tile pattern "7" is displayed in two of the left hand tile area 16-1, middle hand tile area 16-2, and right hand tile area 16-3, and the hand tile pattern "6" is displayed in the remaining hand tile area (see FIG. 28(a)). Note that chance symbols are hand tile pattern combinations that do not result in a winning role as a BB role in normal play (when the activation symbol number is 1, etc.), but will result in a winning role as a BB role when activation symbol number 2, etc. is selected.

The obtained bonus role determination random number is a random number indicating pattern 30, and when pattern 30 is determined, the type of BB to be activated is BB2, and the bonus pattern is BNS chance eye 56. BNS chance eye 56 is a combination in which the hand tile pattern "7" is displayed in two of the left hand tile area 16-1, middle hand tile area 16-2, and right hand tile area 16-3, and the hand tile pattern "5" is displayed in the remaining hand tile area (see FIG. 28(b)), or a combination in which the hand tile pattern "7" is displayed in two of the left hand tile area 16-1, middle hand tile area 16-2, and right hand tile area 16-3, and the hand tile pattern "6" is displayed in the remaining hand tile area (see FIG. 28(a)).

In addition, in the BB1 state as a special game, the pattern is determined by referring to the column of the bonus pattern determination table when BB1 is activated, in the BB2 state as a special game, the pattern is determined by referring to the column of the bonus pattern determination table when BB2 is activated, in the BB3 state as a special game, the pattern is determined by referring to the column of the bonus pattern determination table when BB3 is activated, in the BB4 state as a special game, the pattern is determined by referring to the column of the bonus pattern determination table when BB4 is activated, in the BB5 state as a special game, the pattern is determined by referring to the column of the bonus pattern determination table when BB5 is activated, in the BB6 state as a special game, the pattern is determined by referring to the column of the bonus pattern determination table when BB6 is activated, and in the BB7 state as a special game, the pattern is determined by referring to the column of the bonus pattern determination table when BB7 is activated.

In this way, "7-7-7" (BNS seven-match, see FIG. 28(c)) is configured to be BB no matter which pattern is determined by the lottery. Also, depending on the lottery results, for example, "1-1-1" (BNS one-match, see FIG. 28(d)), "3-3-1" (BNS 331-match, see FIG. 28(e)), "7-6-2" or other number-based patterns of hand tiles that add up to 15 (BNS total 15, see FIG. 28(f)), and "7-7-1" or other patterns with two "7" hand tiles and a BNS chance eye 1 consisting of a pattern other than the "7" hand tile pattern can be BB. In other words, multiple winning combinations can be BB in one game. By configuring the hand so that the BB role can be obtained even in the case of "7-7-7" in this way, the player can expect to get the BB role even if there is no "7" in the hand, which increases the interest of the game.

In the first embodiment, seven types of rounds, 4R and 9R to 14R, are provided as execution rounds for special games. BB1 is a 4R special game, BB2 is a 9R special game, BB3 is a 10R special game, BB4 is an 11R special game, BB5 is a 12R special game, BB6 is a 13R special game, and BB7 is a 14R special game. When the special games BB2 to 6 are activated, BB is promoted, but when BB1 and BB7 are activated, BB is not promoted. When BB1 is activated, BB1 can be activated again, and when BB7 is activated, BB7 can be activated again. The promotion of BB will be described later. When any BB role is determined, the player is not notified of the BB role from the start of the game, but it may be notified or suggested. In addition, the promotion of a BB is also called overwriting the BB.

Next, FIG. 13 is a flowchart of the game execution start control process related to the subroutine of step 3400 in FIG. 5. First, in step 3402, the game control means 1900 sets a timer and starts measuring the elapsed time required for the game. This timer is set at the start of each game, and is the timer referenced in the wait process S3180. The timer is configured to record up to the start of the previous 20 games, and thereafter discard (overwrite) the oldest ones.

Next, in step 3404, the game control means 1900 refers to the flag area of the temporary flag storage means 2101 and determines whether or not the special game flag (the flag that is turned on in step 3704, which will be described later) is on. If the answer is No in step 3404, in step 3500, the game control means 1900 executes a non-BB game execution control process, which will be described later, and ends this process.

On the other hand, if the answer is Yes in step 3404, then in step 3406 the game control means 1900 refers to the flag area of the temporary flag storage means 2101 and determines whether the type of special game is BB1 or BB7. In other words, the game control means 1900 determines whether the type of special game is any of the BBs BB2 to BB6. If the answer is No in step 3406, then in step 3800 the game control means 1900 executes a game execution control process during BB, which will be described later, and ends this process.

If the answer is Yes in step 3406, then in step 3408 the game control means 1900 determines whether the special game is the final round. If the answer is Yes in step 3408, then in step 3850 the game control means 1900 executes the BB game execution control process (final) described below, and ends this process. On the other hand, if the answer is No in step 3408, then in step 3800 the game control means 1900 executes the BB game execution control process described below, and ends this process.

Next, FIG. 14 is a flowchart of the game execution control process during non-BB, which is related to the subroutine of step 3500 in the game execution start control process. First, in step 3650, the game control means 1900 executes the self-draw control process, which will be described later. The self-draw control process allows three game balls to be fired consecutively. In the case of consecutive firings, it is preferable to execute the self-draw control process for each firing, rather than executing the self-draw control process for the previous firing and then executing the self-draw control process for the next firing.

Next, in step 3502, the game control means 1900 determines whether or not three game balls have been fired. This determination can be made by using the value of the fired ball counter to determine whether or not they have been fired. Note that re-fires are not counted. If the answer is No in step 3502, the process returns to step 3650, and if the answer is Yes in step 3502, the process proceeds to step 3504.

Next, in step 3504, the game control means 1900 determines whether or not the three game balls have already entered the slot. This determination can be made by detecting whether or not the balls have already entered the slot using the ball entry detection sensors in the symbol entry slot 13 and the special entry slot 11. If the answer is No in step 3504, the process returns to step 3650, and if the answer is Yes in step 3504, the process proceeds to step 3506.

Next, in step 3506, the game control means 1900 refers to the winning combination temporary storage means 2110a and determines whether or not a winning combination has been achieved with the current Tehai pattern.

If the answer is Yes in step 3506, then in step 3508 the game control means 1900 determines whether or not the win button (BET button 18) or the game end button 26 has been operated. If the answer is No in step 3508, that is, if it is determined that the win button (BET button 18) or the game end button 26 has been operated, then the game control means 1900 proceeds to step 3700. If the answer is Yes in step 3508, then the game control means 1900 proceeds to step 3514a.

Next, in step 3514a, the game control means 1900 determines whether any of the discard tile buttons 19, the left button 19a, the middle button 19b, or the right button 19c, has been operated. If the answer is No in step 3514a, the process returns to step 3508. On the other hand, if the answer is Yes in step 3514a, the process proceeds to step 3516.

On the other hand, if the answer is No at step 3506, then in step 3510 the game control means 1900 determines whether or not there is a possibility that a winning combination will be achieved with the remaining balls. In normal game mode, the number of balls that can be fired is four, so there is one ball remaining. Therefore, it is determined whether or not there is a possibility that a winning combination will be achieved with one ball remaining. If the answer is No at step 3510, the game control means 1900 determines that there is no possibility that a winning combination will be achieved, and executes the automatic end process to end this process.

On the other hand, if the answer is YES at step 3510, then in step 3512 the game control means 1900 determines whether or not the game end button 26 has been operated. If the answer is NO at step 3512, the game control means 1900 determines that the game end button 26 has been operated, and ends this process. On the other hand, if the answer is YES at step 3512, the game control means 1900 determines that the game end button 26 has not been operated, and proceeds to step 3514b.

Next, in step 3514b, the game control means 1900 determines whether any of the discard tile buttons 19, the left button 19a, the middle button 19b, or the right button 19c, has been operated. If the answer is No in step 3514b, the process returns to step 3512. On the other hand, if the answer is Yes in step 3514b, the process proceeds to step 3516.

In addition, in steps 3514a and b, the game control means 1900 controls to invalidate the discard operation of the seven symbols under specific conditions. The specific conditions here are that the BB is not activated and the player has two seven symbols (for example, seven symbols obtained by other than the role) as Te-hai symbols. In other words, when the BB is not activated and the player has two seven symbols, the game control means 1900 controls to invalidate the discard operation of the seven symbols. By invalidating the discard operation of the seven symbols in this way, it is possible to prevent the player's motivation to play from decreasing after the player accidentally discards a Te-hai symbol that may result in a highly profitable BB role among the winning roles. In addition, in a state in which the discard operation of the seven symbols is invalid, the game control means 1900 controls to turn off the lamp of the discard tile button 19 corresponding to the two seven symbols. The game control means 1900 controls the discard button 19 corresponding to the remaining Tehai symbol to light up. By turning off the two buttons corresponding to Tehai symbols that may result in a winning combination and lighting up the button corresponding to the Tehai symbol that will not result in a winning combination, the player can easily understand that he or she should discard the Tehai symbol that corresponds to the lit button, and can also suggest to the player that he or she needs one more tile to achieve the BB combination.

Next, in step 3516, the game control means 1900 executes the discard tile process corresponding to the discard tile button 19.

Next, in step 3518, the game control means 1900 sets a command related to the current hand information (a command to the sub-control board 3000, which is sent in the control command sending process of step 2006), and in the next step 3650, executes the self-draw control process described below. Note that the command to be sent to the sub-control board 3000 in the process of step 3518 includes information related to the hand of tiles for which the discard operation has been performed, etc.

Next, in step 3520, the game control means 1900 refers to the winning combination temporary storage means 2110a and determines whether or not a winning combination has been achieved with the current Tehai symbol. If the answer is No in step 3520, it determines that there is no possibility of a winning combination being achieved, and executes an automatic end process to end this process.

On the other hand, if step 3520 is Yes, the game control means 1900 executes step 3700 and step 3750, which will be described later, and ends this process.

Next, FIG. 15 is a flowchart of the game execution control process during BB, which is related to the subroutine of step 3800 in the game execution start control process. First, in step 3650, the game control means 1900 executes the self-drawn control process, which will be described later. The self-drawn control process makes it possible to fire two game balls consecutively from the second ball. In the case of consecutive balls, it is preferable to execute the self-drawn control process for each shot, rather than executing the self-drawn control process for the previous shot and then the self-drawn control process for the next shot.

Next, in step 3802, the game control means 1900 determines whether or not three game balls have been fired. This determination can be made by using the value of the fired ball counter to determine whether or not they have been fired. Note that re-fires are not counted. If the answer is No in step 3802, the process returns to step 3650, and if the answer is Yes in step 3802, the process proceeds to step 3804.

Next, in step 3804, the game control means 1900 determines whether or not the three game balls have already entered the slot. This determination can be made by detecting whether or not the balls have already entered the slot using the ball entry detection sensors in the symbol entry slot 13 and the special entry slot 11. If the answer is No in step 3804, the process returns to step 3650, and if the answer is Yes in step 3804, the process proceeds to step 3806.

Next, in step 3806, the game control means 1900 refers to the winning combination temporary storage means 2110a and determines whether or not a winning combination has been achieved with the current Tehai pattern.

If the answer is Yes in step 3806, then in step 3808 the game control means 1900 determines whether or not the win button (BET button 18) or the game end button 26 has been operated. If the answer is No in step 3808, that is, if it is determined that the win button (BET button 18) or the game end button 26 has been operated, then the game control means 1900 proceeds to step 3750. If the answer is Yes in step 3808, then the game control means 1900 proceeds to step 3812a.

Next, in step 3812a, the game control means 1900 determines whether or not the discard tile button 19, which is the left button 19a, the middle button 19b, or the right button 19c, has been operated. Note that in step 3812a, if there are multiple balls remaining (e.g., 2), the discard tile button 19 can be operated multiple times to discard multiple te-hai symbols. If the answer is No in step 3812a, the process returns to step 3808. On the other hand, if the answer is Yes in step 3812a, the process proceeds to step 3814.

On the other hand, if the answer is No in step 3806, then in step 3810 the game control means 1900 determines whether the game end button 26 has been operated. If the answer is No in step 3810, the game control means 1900 determines that the game end button 26 has been operated, and ends this process. On the other hand, if the answer is Yes in step 3810, the game control means 1900 determines that the game end button 26 has not been operated, and proceeds to step 3812b. Note that in step 3810, the game control means 1900 may control the game end button 26 to be disabled if there is a possibility that a winning combination will be achieved with the remaining balls. By disabling the game end button 26 in this way, it is possible to provide a gaming machine that does not disadvantage the player and ensures fairness in the game.

Next, in step 3812b, the game control means 1900 determines whether or not the discard tile button 19, the left button 19a, the middle button 19b, or the right button 19c, has been operated. Note that in step 3812b, if there are multiple balls remaining (e.g., 2), the discard tile button 19 can be operated multiple times to discard multiple te-hai symbols. If the answer is No in step 3812b, the process returns to step 3810. On the other hand, if the answer is Yes in step 3812b, the process proceeds to step 3814.

Next, in step 3814, the game control means 1900 executes the discard tile process corresponding to the discard tile button 19.

Next, in step 3816, the game control means 1900 sets a command related to the current hand information (a command to the sub-control board 3000, which is sent in the control command sending process of step 2006), and in the next step 3650, executes the self-draw control process described below. Note that the command to be sent to the sub-control board 3000 in the process of step 3816 includes information related to the hand of tiles for which the discard operation has been performed, etc.

Next, in step 3818, the game control means 1900 refers to the winning combination temporary storage means 2110a and determines whether or not a winning combination has been achieved with the current Te-hai pattern.

If the answer is Yes in step 3818, then in step 3820, the game control means 1900 determines whether the win button (BET button 18) or the game end button 26 has been operated. If the answer is Yes in step 3820, then the game control means 1900 proceeds to step 3750. On the other hand, if the answer is No in step 3820, then the game control means 1900 proceeds to step 3822.

On the other hand, if the answer is No at step 3818, then at step 3822 the game control means 1900 determines whether the counter value n of the remaining ball counter 1902b is 0 or not. If the answer is No at step 3822, the game control means 1900 returns the process to step 3810. Note that if the number of balls fired is the fifth (the value of the fired ball counter is 5), and the counter value n of the remaining ball counter 1902b here is not 0, then this is an abnormality, and the process may be configured to be terminated with this being determined to be an error.

On the other hand, if the answer is Yes in step 3822, then in step 3824 the game control means 1900 determines whether or not a winning combination has been achieved. If the answer is Yes in step 3824, then the game control means 1900 determines that a winning combination has not been achieved, executes an automatic end process, and ends this process. On the other hand, if the answer is No in step 3824, then the game control means 1900 determines that a winning combination has been achieved, executes step 3750, which will be described later, and ends this process.

Next, FIG. 16 is a flowchart of the game execution control process (final) during BB, which is related to the subroutine of step 3850 in the game execution start control process. First, in step 3650, the game control means 1900 executes the self-drawn control process, which will be described later. In the game execution control process (final) during BB, the self-drawn control process preferably fires one ball at a time, but it is also possible to fire three game balls in succession. In the case of successive fires, it is preferable to execute the self-drawn control process for each fire, rather than executing the self-drawn control process for the previous fire and then the self-drawn control process for the next fire.

Next, in step 3852, the game control means 1900 determines whether or not three game balls have been fired. This determination can be made by using the value of the fired ball counter to determine whether or not they have been fired. Note that re-fires are not counted. If the answer is No in step 3852, the process returns to step 3650, and if the answer is Yes in step 3852, the process proceeds to step 3854.

Next, in step 3854, the game control means 1900 determines whether or not the three game balls have entered the slot. This determination can be made by detecting whether or not the balls have entered the slot with the ball entry detection sensors in the symbol entry slot 13 and the special entry slot 11. If the answer is No in step 3854, the process returns to step 3650, and if the answer is Yes in step 3854, the process proceeds to step 3856.

Next, in step 3856, the game control means 1900 refers to the winning combination temporary storage means 2110a and determines whether or not the BB combination is established with the current Tehai symbol. The BB combination here is a promoted BB combination, and the promoted BB combination is a BB combination that is more advantageous than the current BB combination. If the current BB combination is BB2, then BB3 applies; if the current BB combination is BB3, then BB4 applies; if the current BB combination is BB4, then BB5 applies; if the current BB combination is BB5, then BB6 applies; if the current BB combination is BB6, then BB7 applies. For example, in the final round of BB2 to 6, based on three game balls entering the symbol entrance 13-13, if three seven symbols other than the role are formed, forming a BNS seven, then the promoted BB combination is won. If the answer is Yes in step 3856, in step 3858, the game control means 1900 validates the operation of the win button (BET button 18) and the game end button 26, and proceeds to step 3860.

Next, in step 3860, the game control means 1900 determines whether or not the win button (BET button 18) or the game end button 26 has been operated. If the answer is No in step 3860, that is, if it is determined that the win button (BET button 18) or the game end button 26 has been operated, the game control means 1900 proceeds to step 3720. If the answer is Yes in step 3860, the game control means 1900 proceeds to step 3864a.

Next, in step 3864a, the game control means 1900 determines whether or not the discard tile button 19, the left button 19a, the middle button 19b, or the right button 19c, has been operated. Note that in step 3864a, if the specifications of the gaming machine allow for continuous firing of game balls and there are multiple balls remaining (e.g., 2), the discard tile button 19 may be operated multiple times to discard multiple te-hai symbols. If the answer is No in step 3864a, the process returns to step 3858. On the other hand, if the answer is Yes in step 3864a, the process proceeds to step 3866.

On the other hand, if the answer is No in step 3856, in step 3862, the game control means 1900 disables the operation of the win button (BET button 18) and the game end button 26, and proceeds to step 3864b. Note that in step 3862, the game control means 1900 may execute the end button disable process of step 3880, which will be described later, for the game end button 26.

Next, in step 3864b, the game control means 1900 determines whether or not the discard tile button 19, the left button 19a, the middle button 19b, or the right button 19c, has been operated. Note that in step 3864b, if the specifications of the gaming machine allow for continuous firing of game balls and there are multiple balls remaining (e.g., 2), the discard tile button 19 may be operated multiple times to discard multiple te-hai symbols. If the answer is No in step 3864b, the process returns to step 3862. On the other hand, if the answer is Yes in step 3864b, the process proceeds to step 3866.

In step 3864b, for example, in the case of "7-2-7" in FIG. 31(d), the hand tile pattern may be automatically discarded without operating the discard button. In the case of (d), the hand tile pattern of "2" is automatically discarded. By configuring in this way, the player can concentrate only on the firing operation, so that a gaming machine that allows the player to immerse himself in the game can be provided. The game control means 1900 determines whether the discard button 19 of the left button 19a, middle button 19b, or right button 19c has been operated. In step 3864b, if the specifications of the gaming machine are such that game balls can be fired continuously and the number of remaining balls is multiple (for example, 2), the discard button 19 may be operated multiple times to discard multiple tehai patterns. If the answer is No in step 3864b, the process returns to step 3862. On the other hand, if step 3864b is Yes, proceed to step 3866.

In addition, in steps 3864a and b, the game control means 1900 controls to invalidate the discard operation of the seven symbol under a specific condition. The specific condition here is that it is the final round of BB2 to BB6, and the player has a seven symbol obtained by something other than a reel as a te-hai symbol. In other words, if the player has one or more seven symbols obtained by something other than a reel as a te-hai symbol in the final round of any of BBs BB2 to BB6, the game control means 1900 controls to invalidate the discard operation of the seven symbol. By invalidating the discard operation of the seven symbol in this way, it is possible to prevent the player from accidentally discarding a te-hai symbol that may result in a highly profitable promotion BB symbol among the winning symbols, thereby reducing the player's motivation to play thereafter. In addition, in a state in which the discard operation of the seven symbol is invalid, the game control means 1900 controls to turn off the lamp of the discard tile button 19 corresponding to the seven symbol. The game control means 1900 controls the lamps of the discard buttons 19 corresponding to the remaining Te-hai symbols to light up. In this way, by turning off the buttons corresponding to Te-hai symbols that may result in a winning combination and lighting up the buttons corresponding to Te-hai symbols that will not result in a winning combination, the player can easily understand that they should discard the Te-hai symbols corresponding to the lit buttons.

Next, in step 3866, the game control means 1900 executes the discard tile process corresponding to the discard tile button 19.

Next, in step 3868, the game control means 1900 sets a command related to the current hand information (a command to the sub-control board 3000, which is sent in the control command sending process of step 2006), and in the next step 3650, executes the self-draw control process described below. Note that the command to be sent to the sub-control board 3000 in the process of step 3868 includes information related to the hand of tiles for which the discard operation has been performed, etc.

Next, in step 3870, the game control means 1900 refers to the winning combination temporary storage means 2110a and determines whether or not a BB combination has been achieved. The BB combination in this case is a promoted BB combination.

If the answer is Yes in step 3870, then in step 3872 the game control means 1900 determines whether the counter value n of the remaining ball number counter 1902b is not 0. If the answer is No in step 3872, the game control means 1900 determines that there are no remaining balls and proceeds to step 3720. On the other hand, if the answer is Yes in step 3872, that is, if there are remaining balls, then in step 3873 the game control means 1900 enables the operation of the win button (BET button 18) and the end game button 26.

Next, in step 3874, the game control means 1900 determines whether or not the win button (BET button 18) or the game end button 26 has been operated. If the answer is Yes in step 3874, the process proceeds to the BB promotion determination process (step 3720) described below. On the other hand, if the answer is No in step 3874, the game control means 1900 returns the process to step 3864a.

On the other hand, if the answer is No at step 3870, then at step 3876 the game control means 1900 determines whether the counter value n of the remaining ball count counter 1902b is not 0.

If the answer is Yes in step 3876, then in step 3878, the game control means 1900 determines whether or not a winning combination is possible with the remaining balls. If the answer is No in step 3878, then the game control means 1900 determines that a winning combination is not possible, executes automatic end processing, and ends this processing. On the other hand, if the answer is Yes in step 3878, then the game control means 1900 determines that a winning combination is possible, and proceeds to step 3880, where the game control means 1900 executes end button invalidation processing, which will be described later, and returns processing to step 3864a. Here, the processing in step 3864a is as described above, but for example, in a state in which there are two "7" hand tile patterns, such as "7-2-7" in (d) of FIG. 31, the hand tile patterns may be automatically discarded without operating the discard button. In the case of (d), the hand tile pattern of "2" is automatically discarded. This configuration allows the player to concentrate solely on the firing operation, providing a gaming machine that allows the player to immerse himself in the game. The gaming control means 1900 determines whether the discard tile button 19, which is the left button 19a, the middle button 19b, or the right button 19c, has been operated. In step 3864a, if the gaming machine is designed to be capable of firing game balls continuously and there are multiple balls remaining (e.g., 2), the discard tile button 19 may be operated multiple times to discard multiple tehai symbols.

On the other hand, if the answer is No in step 3876, that is, if there are no remaining balls, then in step 3882, the game control means 1900 determines whether or not a winning combination has been achieved. If the answer is Yes in step 3882, the process proceeds to step 3750. On the other hand, if the answer is No in step 3882, the game control means 1900 determines that a winning combination has not been achieved, and executes an automatic end process to end this process.

Next, the game control means 1900 executes the payout number calculation process (step 3750) described below, and ends this process.

Next, FIG. 17 is a flowchart of the self-drawn ball control process related to the subroutine of step 3650 in FIGS. 14 to 16. First, in step 3652, the self-drawn game ball supply control means 1902a sets one game ball at the launch position of the game ball launcher.

Next, in step 3656, the self-drawn tile control means 1902 determines whether or not the input signal receiving means 1101 has received a special ball entry operation gate passing signal, i.e., whether or not the game ball has passed through the special ball entry operation gate 12. If the answer is Yes in step 3656, in step 3658, the self-drawn tile control means 1902 refers to the flag temporary storage means 2101 and determines whether or not the special game flag (the flag that is turned on in step 3704 described below) is on.

If the answer is Yes in step 3658, in step 3660, the self-drawn tile control means 1902 opens the special ball entrance 11 for a predetermined period of time (in this example, the period until the end of the ongoing game). Note that the opening period of the special ball entrance 11 is not limited to this, and it may be configured to close after a predetermined time has elapsed. In such a configuration, it is sufficient that the period is long enough for a game ball that has passed through the special ball entrance operating gate 12 to enter the special ball entrance 11 as is, and it may be configured to be open for, for example, one second (in that case, the special ball entrance 11 will open when a game ball enters the special ball entrance operating gate 12 again in the same game).

Next, the ball entry process in steps 3662 to 3668 will be described in detail. First, the process in steps 3662 to 3664 is the ball entry process for the symbol entry ports. First, in step 3662, the self-drawn tile control means 1902 judges whether the game ball has entered any of the symbol entry ports 13. If the answer is Yes in step 3662, in step 3664, the self-drawn tile control means 1902 temporarily stores the pattern based on the entered symbol entry port (for example, if the ball enters the symbol entry port 13-13, the "7" tehai pattern) as self-drawn tile information (the self-drawn tile information is newly assigned to the hand tile), and proceeds to step 3670. In step 3664, the game control means 1900 displays the temporarily stored pattern information in the tehai area of the main display device 36.

Next, the ball entry processing for the special ball entry port in steps 3666 to 3668, which is executed if the answer is No at step 3662, will be described. First, at step 3666, the self-drawn tile control means 1902 determines whether or not the game ball has entered the special ball entry port 11. Here, if the answer is No at step 3666, the process returns to step 3656 and loops until the answer is Yes at step 3662 or step 3666, that is, until the game ball enters the pattern ball entry port 13 or the special ball entry port 11. On the other hand, if the answer is Yes in step 3666, in step 3668, the self-drawn tile control means 1902 temporarily stores a predetermined symbol (in this example, a seven symbol in normal game mode, or character A symbol in special game mode such as BB) as self-drawn tile information (the self-drawn tile information is newly assigned to the hand tile) and proceeds to step 3670. In addition, in step 3668, the game control means 1900 displays the temporarily stored symbol information in the tehai area and the gimmick area of the main display device 36.

In addition, the score increasing device flag is turned on in any of the following cases.
(1) When BB3 to BB6 are activated and it is not the final round, enter the ball through the special ball entry hole 11 or the pattern ball entry hole 13-13. (2) When BB7 is activated, enter the ball through the special ball entry hole 11 or the pattern ball entry hole 13-13. (3) When BB2 is activated and it is the 5th round or later and it is not the final round, enter the ball through the special ball entry hole 11 or the pattern ball entry hole 13-13.

The score increase device flag is turned on during BB, and for example, when a winning combination of 25 medals is achieved, 5 medals are added to the number of medals won (for a total of 30 medals).

Next, in step 3670, the self-drawn tile control means 1902 judges whether or not the game ball has entered the score increase device 1 activation gate 14 or the symbol entry port 13-13. If the answer is Yes in step 3670, in step 3672, the self-drawn tile control means 1902 temporarily stores information that the game ball has entered the score increase device 1 activation gate 14 or the symbol entry port 13-13 as entry ball information, and proceeds to step 3674. The entry ball information temporarily stored here includes information on which ball was fired when the ball entered, and the temporarily stored entry ball information is stored until the end of the game. For example, if the first ball fired passes through the score increase device 1 activation gate 14, this entry ball information is temporarily stored. On the other hand, if the answer is No in step 3670, proceeds to step 3674.

In step 3672, if both of the following (1) and (2) are satisfied, the score increasing device flag is turned on.
(1) BB1 or BB2 is activated and within the 4th round.
(2) Before the first ball entry (including the special ball entry port 11) occurs during this BB game, the game ball passes through the score increase device 1 activation gate 14, or the first ball entry is at the pattern ball entry port 13-13.

Next, in step 3674, the self-drawn tile control means 1902 sets a command related to the hand tile information (a command to the sub-control board 3000, which is sent in the control command sending process of step 2006). Note that the command to be sent to the sub-control board 3000 in the process of step 3674 contains the self-drawn tile information that has been temporarily stored after executing the self-draw and the hand tile information that has already been acquired.

Next, in step 3676, the self-drawn tile control means 1902 subtracts 1 from the counter value of the remaining ball count counter 1902b, and ends this process.

Next, FIG. 18 is a flowchart of the winning role determination process related to the subroutine of step 3700 in FIG. 14. First, in step 3702, the role determination means 1903 refers to the current winning role and the determined bonus pattern, and determines whether the current winning role is BB1 or BB2.

If the answer is Yes in step 3702, in step 3704, the role determination means 1903 turns on the special game flag in the temporary flag storage means 2101.

Next, in step 3706, the role determination means 1903 refers to the current winning role and the determined bonus pattern, and sets a value corresponding to the current winning role (the number of BB rounds) to the special game number counter (a decrement counter that measures the number of times BB rounds are executed). If it is BB1, it sets 4, and if it is BB2, it sets 9.

Next, in step 3708, the role determination means 1903 turns on the special ball entrance operation gate enable flag in the temporary flag storage means 2101 (when the flag is turned on, a flag that opens the special ball entrance 11 when a game ball passes through the special ball entrance operation gate 12 can be turned on), and ends this process. Note that this process also ends if the answer is No in step 3702.

Next, FIG. 19 is a flowchart of the payout number calculation process related to the subroutine of step 3750 in FIGS. 14 to 16. First, in step 3752, the payout number calculation means 1904 determines whether or not a special game is in progress. If the answer is Yes in step 3752, in step 3754, the payout number calculation means 1904 determines whether or not a specific round is in progress.

Here, the specific round is any one of the following rounds:
(1) All rounds of BB1.
(2) Any round other than the final round of BB2 to BB6.
(3) All rounds of BB7.

If the answer is Yes in step 3754, in step 3756, the payout number calculation means 1904 determines whether the score increase device flag is on.

If the answer is Yes in step 3756, the payout number calculation means 1904 sets the payout amount to the number of medals acquired by the winning combination plus 5 medals in step 3758, and proceeds to step 3762.

On the other hand, if the answer is No in steps 3752, 3754, and 3756, the payout number calculation means 1904 sets the value of the number of medals won by the winning role as the payout in step 3760, and proceeds to step 3762. In steps 3758 and 3760, the payout number calculation means 1904 refers to the winning medal number table 1904a for each winning role based on the winning role code temporarily stored in the winning role temporary storage means 2110a, calculates the number of medals won by the winning role, and sets the calculation result in a temporary working storage area (not shown) of the winning medal number temporary storage means 2110b.

Next, in step 3762, the payout number calculation means 1904 turns on the winning flag, and in step 3764, sets a command (a command to the sub-control board 3000, which is sent in the control command sending process of step 2006) related to winning-related information (winning role, number of medals acquired, etc.), and ends this process.

FIG. 20 shows an example of a winning medal number table for each winning combination. The winning combinations and the number of medals won will be described below.
(1) When the winning combination code is 1 (see No. 1 in FIG. 20), the winning combination is a one-match combination, and the hand tile patterns of "1, 1, 1" are displayed in the hand tile area. In this case, the number of medals acquired is set to 1. Note that the one-match combination is a winning combination of the BB combination when the operating pattern number in the normal game mode (when BB is not activated) shown in FIG. 12 is 13, etc.
(2) When the winning combination code is 2, the winning combination is a two-set, and the hand tile pattern of "2, 2, 2" is displayed in the hand tile area. In this case, the number of medals to be won is set to 2. Note that when the operating pattern number in the normal game mode is 14, the two-set is a winning combination of BB.
(3) When the winning combination code is 3, the winning combination is a three-set, and the hand tile pattern of "3-3-3" is displayed in the hand tile area. In this case, the number of medals to be won is set to 3. Note that when the operating pattern number in the normal game mode is 15, the three-set is a winning combination of BB.
(4) When the winning combination code is 4, the winning combination is a four-set, and the hand tile patterns of "4-4-4" are displayed in the hand tile area. In this case, the number of medals to be won is set to 12. Note that when the working pattern number in the normal game mode is 12, the four-set is a winning combination of BB.
(5) When the winning combination code is 5, the winning combination is a five-set, and the hand tile pattern of "5-5-5" is displayed in the hand tile area. In this case, the number of medals to be won is set to 15. Note that when the working pattern number in the normal game mode is 10, the five-set is a winning combination of BB.
(6) When the winning combination code is 6, the winning combination is a set of sixes, and the hand tile pattern of "6, 6, 6" is displayed in the hand tile area. In this case, the number of medals to be won is set to 18. In addition, when the operating pattern number in the normal game mode is 8, etc., the set of sixes is a winning combination of BB.
(7) When the winning combination code is 7, the winning combination is a set of sevens, and the hand tile pattern of "7-7-7" is displayed in the hand tile area. In this case, the number of medals to be won is set to 21. The set of sevens is a winning combination for the BB combination in all game states and for all active symbol numbers.
(8) When the winning combination code is 8 to 13, the winning combination is a set of characters A to F, and hand tile patterns such as "A, A, A" are displayed in the hand tile area. In this case, the number of medals to be won is set to 25. Note that a set of characters A to F is a winning combination only in the special game state.
(9) When the winning code is 14, the winning combination is 331, and the hand tile pattern of "3, 3, 1" is displayed in the hand tile area. In this case, the number of medals acquired is set to 1. Note that when the operating pattern number in the normal game mode is 16, the 331 combination is the winning combination of BB.
(10) When the winning combination code is 15, the winning combination is a total of 15, and the total of the hand tile patterns in the hand tile area is 15 (excluding a set of fives) is displayed. In this case, the number of medals obtained is set to 1. Note that the total of 15 is a winning combination for the BB role when the active pattern number in the normal game mode is 12, etc. For example, a bonus pattern in which the hand tile patterns of "7-7-1" are displayed in the hand tile area is a winning combination with a BNS total of 15.
(11) When the winning combination code is 16, the winning combination is a total of 16, and the combination of the hand tile patterns in the hand tile area is displayed as 16. In this case, the number of medals obtained is set to 2. Note that the total of 16 is the winning combination of BB when the active pattern number in the normal game mode is 11, etc. For example, a bonus pattern in which the hand tile patterns of "7, 7, 2" are displayed in the hand tile area is a winning combination of BNS total of 16.
(12) When the winning combination code is 17, the winning combination is a total of 17, and the combination of the hand tile patterns in the hand tile area is displayed with a total of 17. In this case, the number of medals to be acquired is set to 3. Note that the total of 17 is a winning combination of BB when the active pattern number in the normal game mode is 10, etc. For example, a bonus pattern in which the hand tile patterns of "7, 7, 3" are displayed in the hand tile area is a winning combination of BNS total of 17.
(13) When the winning combination code is 18, the winning combination is a total of 18, and the total of the hand tile patterns in the hand tile area is 18 (excluding sixes). In this case, the number of medals to be won is set to six. In addition, the total of 18 is a winning combination for the BB role when the active pattern number in the normal game mode is 9, etc. For example, a bonus pattern in which the hand tile patterns of "7, 7, 4" are displayed in the hand tile area is a winning combination with a BNS total of 18.
(14) When the winning combination code is 19, the winning combination is a total of 19, and the combination in which the total of the hand tile patterns in the hand tile area is 19 is displayed. In this case, the number of medals obtained is set to 10. Note that the total of 19 is a winning combination for the BB role when the active pattern number in the normal game mode is 8, etc. For example, a bonus pattern in which the hand tile patterns of "7-7-5" are displayed in the hand tile area is a winning combination with a BNS total of 19.
(15) When the winning combination code is 20, the winning combination is a total of 20, and the combination in which the total of the hand tile patterns in the hand tile area is 20 is displayed. In this case, the number of medals obtained is set to 15. In addition, when the operating pattern number in the normal game mode is 22, etc., the total of 20 is a winning combination of BB. For example, a bonus pattern in which the hand tile patterns of "7, 7, 6" are displayed in the hand tile area is a winning combination of BNS total of 20.
(16) When the winning combination code is 21 to 23, the winning combination is a combination of different characters, and hand tile patterns such as "A, B, C" are displayed in the hand tile area. In this case, the number of medals to be acquired is set to 25. Note that this combination is a winning combination only in the special game state.
(17) When the winning combination code is 24, the winning combination is a combination of a character and a symbol other than the seven symbol, and the hand tile symbols such as "A, B, 6" are displayed in the hand tile area. In this case, the number of medals to be won is set to 25. This combination is a winning combination only in the special game state.

Next, FIG. 21 is a flowchart of the BB promotion determination process, which is a subroutine of step 3720 in FIG. 16.

First, in step 3722, the role determination means 1903 refers to the current winning role and the determined bonus pattern, and determines whether the current winning role is a BB role or not.

If the answer is Yes in step 3722, in step 3724, the role determination means 1903 resets the special game flag in the temporary flag storage means 2101. Resetting means turning off the special game flag that is on and then turning the special game flag on again.

Next, in step 3726, the role determination means 1903 refers to the current winning role and the determined bonus pattern, and sets a value corresponding to the current winning role (the number of BB rounds) to the special game number counter (a decrement counter that measures the number of times BB rounds are executed). If it is BB3, it sets 10, if it is BB4, it sets 11, if it is BB5, it sets 12, if it is BB6, it sets 13, and if it is BB7, it sets 14.

Next, in step 3728, the role determination means 1903 resets the special ball entrance activation gate enable flag in the flag temporary storage means 2101 and ends this process. Note that this process also ends if the answer is No in step 3722.

Next, FIG. 22 is a flowchart of the end button disable process, which is a subroutine of step 3880 in FIG. 16.

First, in step 3880-2, the game control means 1900 determines whether or not the game end button 26 has been operated. If the answer is No in step 3880-2, this process ends. On the other hand, if the answer is Yes in step 3880-2, the process proceeds to step 3880-4.

Next, in step 3880-4, the game control means 1900 determines whether the current BB round is the final round. If the answer is No in step 3880-4, this process ends. On the other hand, if the answer is Yes in step 3880-4, the process proceeds to step 3880-6.

Next, in step 3880-6, the game control means 1900 judges whether or not a new BB role (promoted BB role) can be aimed for. In detail, the game control means 1900 checks the current Tehai symbol and the remaining balls, and judges whether or not a promoted BB role can be established using the remaining balls. Here, whether or not a new BB role can be established using the remaining balls is whether or not the relationship of "remaining balls ≧ 3 - number of seven symbols obtained other than the role" is satisfied. If the answer is No in step 3880-6, in step 3880-8, the game control means 1900 sets a command (a command to the sub-control board 3000 side, which is transmitted in the control command transmission process of step 2006) related to the announcement performance according to the game status (indicating that a promoted BB role cannot be aimed for, indicating that a winning role may be established with the remaining balls, indicating a right hit, etc.) and ends this process.

In addition, in the case of a game state where there is no possibility of winning and a new BB role cannot be aimed for with the remaining balls, an announcement effect according to the game state may be executed. For example, in the case where there are two balls remaining in the final round of BB2 to 6 (if No in step 3880-6), and there are no hand tile patterns of sevens acquired other than by the role in the hand tile area 16 such as "6, 5, 4", an announcement effect is executed in step 3880-8 to indicate that the BB role cannot be aimed for. This announcement effect is an effect that notifies the player that there is a possibility of winning other than the BB role if the player hits the right side, as well as an effect that is executed during BB, and also during a game in a normal game state, when it is not possible to aim for the BB role with the remaining two balls, for example, when there are two balls remaining and there are no hand tile patterns of sevens acquired other than by the role in the hand tile area 16 such as "6, 5, star". In this case, the announcement is not a right-hand hit announcement, but an announcement according to the hand tile pattern, and it is preferable to announce, for example, "You can aim for a six or five." Also, for example, in the DB performance described below, if a BNS total of 18 (see the performance table in FIG. 12) is determined as a winning combination, and the game ball enters the "1" hand tile pattern ball entry hole 13-3 on the first and second balls, even if the remaining two balls enter the "7" hand tile pattern ball entry hole 13-13, the total will not reach 18, so it is preferable to announce a left-hand hit so that the remaining two balls aim for a one-match. By making appropriate announcements according to the game state in this way, it is possible to announce the possibility of winning to the player, and by not making an announcement, it is possible to reduce disadvantages to the player.

On the other hand, if the answer is Yes in step 3880-6, then in step 3880-10, the game control means 1900 turns on the end button operation confirmation status flag.

Next, in step 3880-12, the game control means 1900 controls the state of the game end button 26 to be in an operation confirmation state. In this operation confirmation state, the game control means 1900 controls the operation of the game end button 26 to be disabled. By disabling the game end button 26 in this way, it is possible to prevent a decrease in the player's motivation to play thereafter due to the player accidentally ending the game when there is a possibility of achieving a promotion BB role, which is a highly profitable winning role.

In addition, when the operation of the game end button 26 is detected in the operation confirmation state in which the operation of the game end button 26 is invalid, it is preferable that the game control means 1900 sets and transmits a command (a command to the sub-control board 3000 side, which is transmitted in the control command transmission process of step 2006) related to the announcement performance (displaying a warning message, etc.) according to the game state. Then, it is preferable that the sub-control board 3000 that receives this command controls to display a warning message indicating that there is still a possibility that the promotion BB role will be established (executes a warning announcement such as "There is still a chance of promotion BB"). By configuring in this way, it is possible to prevent the player from accidentally ending the game by notifying the player that there is a possibility that the promotion BB role, which has a high profitability, will be established among the winning roles. In addition, it is possible to prevent the player from accidentally ending the game by providing the game end button 26 in a position that is difficult for the player to easily operate. Furthermore, by making the game end button 26 a button that is difficult for the player to operate (for example, a button whose operation surface is recessed further than the base surface), it is possible to prevent the player from accidentally ending the game. Furthermore, by making the game end button 26 smaller than the other buttons (preferably the smallest), it is possible to prevent the player from accidentally ending the game.

In step 3880-12, the game control means 1900 controls so that the operation of the game end button 26 is invalid, but the operation of the discard tile button 19 is valid. Then, when any te-hai symbol is discarded by operating the discard tile button 19, the game control means 1900 ends the end button confirmation state, and controls so that the operation of the game end button 26 is valid.

Next, in step 3880-14, the game control means 1900 determines whether or not a period of 5000.53 ms has elapsed since transitioning to the operation confirmation state. This period is configured to be measured using a timer. Note that the period is not limited to 5000.53 ms. If the answer is No in step 3880-14, this process is repeated until a period of 5000.53 ms has elapsed.

On the other hand, if the answer is Yes in step 3880-14, in step 3880-16, the game control means 1900 turns off the end button operation confirmation state flag to end the operation confirmation state, and in step 3880-18, controls the operation of the game end button 26 to be valid.

Next, in step 3880-20, the game control means 1900 determines whether or not the game end button 26 has been operated. If the answer is Yes in step 3880-20, the game control means 1900 determines that the game end button 26 has not been operated a second time, ends this process, and proceeds to step 3864a in FIG. 16.

On the other hand, if the answer is No at step 3880-20, the game control means 1900 determines that the game end button 26 has been operated for the second time, and ends this process and the game execution control process during BB (final).

In the first embodiment, the operation of the game end button 26 is enabled after the period of step 3880-14 has elapsed, but it may be left disabled instead of enabled. By leaving it disabled in this way, it is possible to reliably prevent the player from accidentally ending the game when there is a possibility of achieving a promotion BB role, which is a highly profitable winning role.

Next, FIG. 23 is a flowchart of the game end process, which is a subroutine of step 3900 in FIG. 5.

First, in step 3902, the game end control means 1905 refers to the flag area of the temporary flag storage means 2101 and determines whether the winning flag is on or not. If the answer is Yes in step 3902, in step 3904, the game end control means 1905 turns off the winning flag in the flag area of the temporary flag storage means 2101.

Next, in step 3906, the game end control means 1905 refers to the acquired medal number temporary storage means 2110b, and adds the acquired medal number calculated in step 3750 to the CRE counter value of the medal information temporary storage means 1201. Note that even if a BB pattern combination is completed, no medals are awarded (no payout), but the payout may be set to 1 medal, 15 medals, etc.

Next, in step 3908, the game end control means 1905 refers to the medal information temporary storage means 1201 and determines whether the CRE counter value after the increment is greater than "50". If the answer is No in step 3908, the game end control means 1905 proceeds to step 3914. On the other hand, if the answer is Yes in step 3908, in step 3910, the game end control means 1905 refers to the medal information temporary storage means 1201 and calculates the number of medals that exceed "50" from the CRE counter value, and the payout control means 2200 discharges the calculated number of medals into the medal tray 5.

Next, in step 3912, the game end control means 1905 sets the CRE counter of the medal information temporary storage means 1201 to "50".

Next, in step 3914, the game end control means 1905 refers to the flag temporary storage means 2101 and determines whether the special game flag is on. If the answer is Yes in step 3914, in step 3916, the game end control means 1905 subtracts "1" from the counter value of the special game game count counter 1906a in the special game related information temporary storage means 2111. In this process, the game end control means 1905 also temporarily stores the subtracted value.

Next, in step 3918, the game end control means 1905 refers to the special game related information temporary storage means 2111 and determines whether the special game game count counter value is 0. If the answer is No in step 3918, that is, if there are remaining rounds in which the special game (BB) can be played, the process proceeds to step 3926. On the other hand, if the answer is Yes in step 3918, that is, if the rounds in which the special game (BB) can be played have ended, in step 3922, the game end control means 1905 turns off the special game flag in the flag area of the flag temporary storage means 2101, and proceeds to step 3924.

On the other hand, if the answer is No in step 3902, then in step 3920, the game end control means 1905 refers to the flag temporary storage means 2101 to determine whether the special game flag is on or not, and if the answer is Yes in step 3920, the process proceeds to step 3922 (if the player does not win during the special game, the special game will be halted). On the other hand, if the answer is No in step 3920, the process proceeds to step 3924. Note that if the answer is No in step 3914, the process also proceeds to step 3924.

Next, in step 3924, the game end control means 1905 turns off the special entrance gate activation flag in the flag area of the flag temporary storage means 2101. If the special entrance gate activation flag is on, the game end control means 1905 controls it to be turned off, but if the special entrance gate activation flag is off, it controls it to proceed to the next step without doing anything.

Next, in step 3926, the game end control means 1905 turns off the score increase device flag in the flag area of the temporary flag storage means 2101.

Next, in step 3928, the game end control means 1905 refers to the game status temporary storage means 2100, displays information after the game ends (for example, the number of medals won if the game is a win) on the main display device 36, and ends this process.

If the special game flag is not on, the game end control means 1905 may, for example, initialize each flag and temporary storage means. In addition, the processing on the sub-control board 3000 side may also initialize the currently running performance.

Next, the control processing executed on the sub-control board 3000 side will be described with reference to Figures 24 and 25. First, Figure 24 is a main flowchart on the sub-control board 3000 side in the mahjong ball game machine according to the first embodiment. Here, the processing in Figure 24 (a) is processing on the sub-control board 3000 side executed after resetting when the game machine is powered on. That is, when the game machine is powered on, in step 5002, the sub-control board 3000 executes initial processing based on the information received from the main control board 1000 side (for example, when RAM clear information is received → the RAM on the sub-control board 3000 side is initialized, and when various information commands are received → the performance-related information at the time of power failure is reset to the RAM on the sub-control board 3000 side). After that, it moves to a loop processing that repeatedly executes (b), which is the repetitive processing routine of the sub-control board 3000.

When (b) is executed, as shown in the process of FIG. 1(b), first, in step 5100, the sub-control board 3000 executes the hand display control process described below. Next, in step 5500, predetermined display control processes such as various navigation effects and preview effects are executed on the first effect display device 16 and the second effect display device 10 at predetermined timings based on other information (e.g., game start signal, medal information, number of remaining balls, special ball entry signal, game end signal, etc.), and this repeat processing routine is terminated.

As described above, the sub-control board 3000 adopts a form in which the sub-side main routine (S5100 to S5500) is looped after being reset. The process in FIG. 1C is an interrupt process of the sub-control board 3000, and is a process flow (c) in the case where a signal from the STB signal line in the main control board 1000 described above is connected to one terminal (in this example, the NMI terminal) of the CPU of the sub-control board 3000. That is, when an NMI interrupt occurs in the CPU of the sub-control board 3000 (when the STB signal line is turned on), in step 5004, the sub-control board 3000 checks the command input port (input port of the data signal line) from the main control board 1000 side. Then, in step 5006, the sub-control board 3000 temporarily stores the command sent from the main control board 1000 side in the RAM on the sub-control board 3000 side based on the confirmation result, and returns to the process that was being executed immediately before this interrupt process.

Next, FIG. 25 is a flowchart of the hand tile display control process related to the subroutine of step 5100 in FIG. 24. First, in step 5102, the display control means 3100 determines whether or not it has received a command related to hand tile information from the main control board 1000. If the answer is Yes in step 5102, in step 5104, the display control means 3100 displays the hand tiles on the first performance display device 16 based on the received hand tile information (displaying the hand tiles after discarding, the hand tiles after self-drawing, etc. as appropriate based on the hand tile information), and proceeds to step 5106. On the other hand, if the answer is No in step 5102, it also proceeds to step 5106.

Next, in step 5106, the display control means 3100 determines whether or not a command related to winning has been received from the main control board 1000. If the answer is Yes in step 5106, in step 5108, the display control means 3100 executes a winning effect (an effect executed when a win occurs, and different effects are executed when a win occurs with a BB role and when a win occurs with a role other than BB) on the second effect display device 10 based on the command related to winning, and ends this process. Note that this process also ends if the answer is No in step 5106.

Next, using Figure 26, we will explain command transmission according to the number of balls entering the symbol entrance 13. Figure 26 is a diagram showing the output of commands from the main control board 1000 to the sub-control board 3000 and the timing of presentation on the sub-control board 3000 based on a game ball entering the symbol entrance 13 in the normal game state. Note that it is not limited to the normal game state, but may also be a special game state. Also, it is not limited to the symbol entrance 13, but may also be the special entrance 11, gate 12, gate 14, etc.

First, the main control board 1000 transmits a ball entry command to the sub-control board 3000 based on the ball entering one of the pattern ball entry ports 13. The ball entry command is information on the ball entry position of the pattern ball entry port 13 (information indicating which of the 27 pattern ball entry ports the ball entered).

Next, the main control board 1000 transmits a hand information command to the sub-control board 3000. The hand information command is, for example, a command related to the hand information shown in step 3674, and is a command for displaying the hand tile patterns in the hand tile area 16.

Next, the main control board 1000 transmits an operating pattern display command to the sub-control board 3000. The operating pattern display command is a command for showing the operating information of BB. In this example, the main control board 1000 determines that the BB role has been established at this timing and transmits the operating pattern display command to the sub-control board 3000, but this timing is not limited.

Next, the main control board 1000 transmits a winning symbol information command to the sub-control board 3000. The winning symbol information command is a command for indicating information on the winning combination and the payout. In this example, the main control board 1000 transmits a winning symbol information command including information on the BB combination and the payout for the BB combination, which is 21 coins, to the sub-control board 3000.

Next, the main control board 1000 transmits a wait command to the sub-control board 3000. The wait command is a command that is transmitted after a series of commands have been transmitted, and indicates that this is the final piece of information.

Next, the main control board 1000 transmits a game end command to the sub-control board 3000. The game end command is a command that indicates the end of the game.

Here, if the hand tile area 16 is not filled with hand tile symbols (in the case of the main display device 36, the Tehai symbols in the Tehai area) at the timing of T1 (if two or fewer game balls have been fired), the sub-control board 3000 is configured to perform an effect when the next hand tile information command is received. On the other hand, if the hand tile area 16 is filled with hand tile symbols at the timing of T1 (if three or more game balls have been fired), the sub-control board 3000 is configured to perform an effect when the wait command received after the hand tile information command is received (at the timing of T2). Note that the effect performed when the hand tile area 16 is not filled with hand tile symbols and the effect performed when the hand tile area 16 is filled with hand tile symbols may be the same or different. This effect may be based on the hand tile information command.

In this way, when the hand patterns are full, a series of many commands are sent from the main control board to the sub-control board in response to a ball entering the hand, so the processing burden can be reduced by having the sub-control board perform the effects based on the wait command received at the end of the series of commands, rather than the hand tile information command received immediately after the ball entering the hand. Furthermore, from the player's perspective, no matter when the effects are executed, the difference is so momentary that it is imperceptible, so the interest in the game is not diminished, and the fairness of the game can be ensured.

In addition, when simultaneous balls enter the pattern ball entrance 13 (for example, when two balls enter the pattern ball entrance 13 in the same interrupt of the main control board), the main control board 1000 is configured to transmit two pieces of ball entrance information to the sub-control board 3000 with one command. The sub-control board 3000, based on receiving this command, controls the sub-control board 3000 to perform the performance corresponding to the two ball entrance information at the same time, and performs the performance of the ball entrance information with a predetermined high priority first. Then, the sub-control board 3000 controls the performance based on the ball entrance information with a low priority in the next interrupt. In this way, by configuring the main control board to be able to transmit one command including two ball entrance information, it is not necessary to set up a program for priority processing when transmitting commands in the case of simultaneous winning, and the program capacity can be reduced. On the other hand, the sub-control board increases the program capacity, but by performing the performance separately, it is possible to prevent confusion among players. In addition, the predetermined high priority ball entrance information is, for example, the ball entrance information of the pattern ball entrance 13 corresponding to the seven symbol is given the highest priority. In addition, the priority is increased in the order of ball entry information for the pattern ball entry port 13 corresponding to the number pattern, ball entry information for the pattern ball entry port 13 corresponding to the character pattern, and ball entry information for the pattern ball entry port 13 corresponding to the playing card pattern, but this order is not required as long as a predetermined priority is determined. Furthermore, the priority is increased in the order of 7 to 1 for the number patterns, but the reverse is also possible, as long as a predetermined priority is determined. The priority is increased in the order of A to E for the character patterns, but the reverse is also possible, as long as a predetermined priority is determined. The priority is increased in the order of TA to TD for the playing card patterns, but the reverse is also possible, as long as a predetermined priority is determined.

Next, using FIG. 27, we will explain the windmill navigation effect, which is a navigation effect of the firing strength using the recommended firing strength display area 16-9. The windmill navigation effect is a navigation image that is displayed when playing a game in which firing is performed toward the windmill 15, and is an effect that displays the windmill image FG (shown by a dashed line in FIG. 3) and the like.

Figure 27 (a) shows the display when the power is turned on. In the control command transmission process of step 2006, the main control board 1000 transmits a command to execute the windmill navigation effect to the sub-control board 3000, and the sub-control board 3000 displays the windmill image FG (shown as a solid circle in the figure) based on the command received. The display position of the windmill image FG after power is turned on is the initial position. The sub-control board 3000 also displays the emission intensity in the emission intensity display area 16-7. Since the emission intensity after power is turned on is 0, the value 0 is displayed in the emission intensity display area 16-7. Furthermore, the sub-control board 3000 displays a level meter image in the level meter display area 16-8. Since the emission intensity after power is turned on is 0, a level meter image indicating that the emission intensity is 0 is displayed in the level meter display area 16-8. After the windmill image FG is displayed, the windmill image FG may be left displayed, or may be erased after a predetermined time has elapsed.

Figure 27 (b) shows the windmill navigation effect during a launch operation, which is a launch operation 1 (an operation with a launch strength of 450) in which the player is operating the launch handle 4. In the control command transmission process of step 2006, the main control board 1000 transmits a command to execute the windmill navigation effect (a command including a launch strength corresponding to the operation of the launch handle 4 by the player) to the sub-control board 3000, and the sub-control board 3000 displays the launch strength, level meter image, and windmill image FG as the windmill navigation effect based on the command reception. Note that the display position of the windmill image FG in (b) remains at its initial position. Next, the player rotates the launch handle 4 to the right while referring to the windmill image FG to adjust the amount of operation. The sub-control board 3000 displays the launch strength corresponding to the amount of operation of the launch handle 4 in the launch strength display area 16-7. Since the launch strength in launch operation 1 is 450, the value of 450 is displayed in the launch strength display area 16-7. Furthermore, the sub-control board 3000 displays in the level meter display area 16-8 a level meter image of the firing intensity according to the amount of operation of the firing handle 4. Since the firing intensity in firing operation 1 is 450, a level meter image indicating that the firing intensity is 450 is displayed in the level meter display area 16-8.

Figure 27 (c) shows a windmill navigation effect during a launch operation, which is a launch operation 2 (an operation with a launch strength of 470) in which the player is operating the launch handle 4. The windmill image FG is configured to be adjusted up and down by operating the up and down keys of the cross button SB-2. For example, if the game ball launched in launch operation 1 does not reach the windmill 15, the windmill image FG can be moved up and adjusted by operating the up key of the cross button SB-2, and the launch operation 2 in (c) shows an adjustment to a position higher than that in (b). The windmill image FG can also be adjusted down by operating the down key of the cross button SB-2. The sub-control board 3000 then displays the windmill image FG at a position higher than the position of launch operation 1 in (b) based on the player's operation of the up key of the cross button SB-2. Next, the player rotates the launch handle 4 to the right while referring to the windmill image FG that has been moved to the upper position to adjust the operation amount. At this time, it is preferable to adjust the launch handle 4 so that the tip of the level meter image is located inside the windmill image FG. The sub-control board 3000 displays the launch intensity corresponding to the operation amount of the launch handle 4 in the launch intensity display area 16-7. Since the launch intensity in the launch operation 2 is 470, the value of 470 is displayed in the launch intensity display area 16-7. Furthermore, the sub-control board 3000 displays a level meter image of the launch intensity corresponding to the operation amount of the launch handle 4 in the level meter display area 16-8. Since the launch intensity in the launch operation 2 is 470, a level meter image indicating that the launch intensity is 470 is displayed in the level meter display area 16-8. Note that the launch intensity (470) in the launch operation 2 is set to the launch intensity that reaches the windmill 15. After the windmill image FG is adjusted, the windmill image FG is configured to be displayed (returned) to the initial position after a predetermined time has elapsed (for example, when the time when the game is not being played reaches a predetermined time), but the windmill image FG may continue to be displayed at the adjusted position. Furthermore, when a predetermined period of time has elapsed during which no game has been played, the first performance display device 16 and the second performance display device 10 may be configured to execute a demo display (a display indicating that a game is waiting to be played).

The position of the windmill image FG has a limited adjustable range and can be adjusted in 32 steps (0 to 31). The adjustable range may be configured not to be limited. The windmill image FG is also used as a navigation effect to aim at the windmill 15 in the play area, but it may also be configured to be used when aiming at the symbol entrance 13 or other objects other than the windmill 15. The adjustable range is the range that can be launched into the center hit area in normal play.

Since individual differences occur in launch devices, the launch position may differ slightly for each gaming machine even when the same launch volume is used for launch. In particular, since the launch strength in the first embodiment only indicates an approximate value that is not equal to the launch volume, even if a player launches using this launch strength as a reference, there will be fluctuations in the actual launch volume value. Therefore, by having the player adjust the appropriate launch position guideline (windmill) for each gaming machine, individual differences due to launch devices can be absorbed.

Next, using Figure 29, we will explain the game in the normal game mode. In the normal game mode, the bonus pattern of BNS Seven is the winning combination for all operating symbol numbers, so the game basically involves aiming the game ball at the center hit area and firing it. Note that, depending on the operating symbol number determined by lottery (e.g., pattern 13, etc.), there are patterns in which you can win without aiming at the center hit area, but in the example of Figure 29, we will explain it assuming that operating symbol number 1 is the winning combination.

(a) is a diagram showing, for example, the standby state of step 3101. The second performance display device 10 displays a "standby" image indicating that the game is on standby. The first performance display device 16 displays a star image in the hand tile area 16. The star image is not a hand tile pattern, but an image indicating a standby state in which no hand tile patterns are displayed in the hand tile area.

(b) is a diagram showing that after the BET button 18 for starting a game is operated, the first ball is launched by operating the launch handle, and the first launched game ball enters the ball. The launched game ball passes through the gate 14 and enters the symbol entry port 13-13. This gate 14 passage information (information indicating that the launched game ball has passed through the gate and entered the symbol entry port, etc.) is used for the segment display described below. The second performance display device 10 displays an "Aim at the gate" image indicating that the gate 14 should be aimed, and an up arrow image indicating the gate 14 is displayed. These displays are called a middle hit notification. Note that either one of the displays may be used as a middle hit notification, and in the middle hit notification, the speaker and lamp are configured to notify with a middle hit sound and lamp pattern. The middle hit notification is displayed after the BET button 18 is operated, and continues to be displayed until the three launched balls enter the ball. Additionally, the second performance display device 10 displays a "Stage A" image indicating that the current performance stage is Stage A. A performance stage is a performance mode indicated by the background, and in this example, performance stages such as Stages A to C, Stage P, Stage SC, and Stage DB are shown as examples. The left hand tile area 16-1 of the first performance display device 16 displays a hand tile pattern of "7" based on a game ball entering the pattern ball entry hole 13-13. As there are no second or third balls entering, the middle hand tile area 16-2 and right hand tile area 16-3 remain as star images.

(c) shows that the second game ball has entered the gate. The released game ball does not pass through the gate 14 and enters the symbol entry port 13-4. The second performance display device 10 continues to display the center hit notification. The second performance display device 10 also continues to display the "Stage A" image. The middle tile area 16-2 of the first performance display device 16 displays the hand tile pattern "2" based on the game ball entering the symbol entry port 13-4. Since there is no third ball, the right hand tile area 16-3 remains as a star image. Note that information that a game ball was released but did not pass through the gate 14 (information indicating that the released game ball did not pass through the gate and entered the symbol entry port, etc.) is used for the segment display described below.

(d) is a diagram showing that the third game ball has entered. The released game ball passes through the gate 14 and enters the symbol entry port 13-13. The second performance display device 10 displays a discard tile navigation effect by character X, which recommends discarding a "2". The discard tile navigation effect on the second performance display device 10 has character X appear, and character X announces, "Discard a "2"!!" The second performance display device 10 also continues to display the "Stage A" image. The right hand tile area 16-3 of the first performance display device 16 displays a hand tile pattern of "7" based on the game ball entering the symbol entry port 13-13. As a result of judging whether or not a winning combination has been established (step 3506), it is determined that a winning combination has not been established, and therefore one of the hand tile patterns must be discarded. Here, the first display device 16 is configured to execute a discard navigation effect in which the hand tile symbol "2" that is not required for a winning combination is surrounded by a dashed line to highlight the hand tile symbols to be discarded. Note that in (d), if the game end button 26 is operated, the game is forced to end. Also, in the state of (d) where there are three hand tile symbols, if it is determined that there is no possibility of achieving a winning combination by firing one more ball (for example, in the case of 726), the game is automatically ended.

(e) is a diagram showing the state after the discard button 19 is operated in accordance with the discard navigation effect to discard the "2" hand tile pattern in the middle hand tile area 16-2. The second effect display device 10 displays a launch navigation effect that recommends aiming for the "7". For example, a "Aim for 7!!" image is displayed. The second effect display device 10 also continues to display the "Stage A" image. The middle hand tile area 16-2 of the first effect display device 16 displays a star image. Note that the hand tile patterns displayed in the hand tile area 16 may be rearranged after the discard button 19 is operated. For example, hand tile patterns are displayed in the left hand tile area 16-1 and the middle hand tile area 16-2, and the right hand tile area 16-3 is placed in a standby state. By configuring in this way, if a player has a tenpai, it is possible to clearly display to the player that they have a tenpai. In (e), the game is not forcibly ended when the game end button 26 is operated, but it may be ended. In (e), if the player has two "7" hand tile patterns (e.g., patterns obtained through the pattern entrance 13-13, not patterns obtained through the role), the main control board 1000 controls the discard operation of the "7" hand tile pattern to be invalid. In this way, a gaming machine can be provided that does not cause a player to suffer a disadvantage by accidentally discarding a hand tile pattern that may result in a BB role.

(f) is a diagram showing that the fourth game ball has entered. The released game ball passes through the gate 14 and enters the symbol entry port 13-11. The second performance display device 10 displays a "disappointing" image indicating that the winning combination was not achieved. The middle hand tile area 16-2 of the first performance display device 16 displays a hand tile pattern of "6" based on the game ball entering the symbol entry port 13-11. As a result of determining whether or not a winning combination has been achieved (step 3520), it is determined that the winning combination is not achieved, so a process to automatically end the game is executed and the game is ended. Note that if the symbol entry port 13 into which the ball entered is the symbol entry port 13-13, the winning combination determination process of step 3700 and the payout number calculation process of step 3750 are executed, and then the game is ended.

Next, using FIG. 30, a game 1 in the special game state will be described. In each round of the special game state (for example, BB1), when the game ball passes through the gate 14 in the first ball and a winning combination of 25 medals is established, 5 medals are added to the number of medals acquired (for a total of 30 medals), so the first ball is basically shot aiming at the center hit area. Then, from the second ball onwards, the game is aimed at the special ball entrance 11, so the game is aimed at the right hit area. In this example, the explanation will be given assuming that the operating pattern number 1 is won. The first ball is shot aiming at the right hit area depending on the type of BB. For example, in rounds 5 to 8 of BB2, rounds other than the final round of BB3 to 6, and BB7, all shots including the first ball are aimed at the right hit area.

(a) is a diagram showing the state in which one round of BB1 has begun after BB1 has been awarded a winning hand and the BET button 18 has been operated to start the game. The second performance display device 10 displays the image "READY" and an image of an up arrow to notify the player of a mid-hit. If a shot has been fired, it displays "GO" (described below). The second performance display device 10 also displays the image "BB1 1st round" to indicate that the current BB is BB1 and that this is the first round. The first performance display device 16 displays an image of a star in the hand tile area 16.

(b) is a diagram showing that the first ball is launched by operating the launch handle and the first game ball launched enters the ball. The launched game ball passes through the gate 14 and enters the symbol entry port 13-13. The second performance display device 10 displays an "Aim right" image, which indicates that the player is aiming at the special entry port 11 in the right-hand hitting area, and a right arrow image, which indicates a right-hand hit. These displays are called right-hand hit notifications. Either of the displays may be a right-hand hit notification, or a notification as shown in (e). For the right-hand hit notification, the speaker and lamp are configured to notify with a sound and lamp pattern for right-hand hits. The second performance display device 10 continues to display the "BB1 1 round" image. The middle hit notification displayed in (a) is configured to be erased when the first game ball launched enters any of the entry ports. The left-hand tile area 16-1 of the first performance display device 16 displays the hand tile pattern of "7" based on the game ball entering the pattern entry hole 13-13. The second and third balls have not been fired and therefore do not enter the game, so the middle-hand tile area 16-2 and right-hand tile area 16-3 remain as star images.

(c) is a diagram showing that the second game ball has entered the game. The game ball that was shot passes through the gate 14 and enters the symbol entry hole 13-4. The second performance display device 10 continues to display the right hit notification. In addition, the second performance display device 10 continues to display the "BB1 1 round" image. The middle hand tile area 16-2 of the first performance display device 16 displays the hand tile pattern "2" based on the game ball entering the symbol entry hole 13-4. Since there is no third ball, the right hand tile area 16-3 remains as a star image. Note that in (c), the game ball should have been shot at the right hit area, but it was shot toward the middle hit area by mistake, and the game ball that was shot is detected at the gate 14. If a game ball is detected at the gate 14 in this game state, a warning may be issued. In this way, the player can notice that he/she made a shooting mistake and adjust the shooting strength at the next shot.

(d) is a diagram showing that the third gaming ball has entered the game. The released gaming ball passes through the gate 12 and enters the special ball entry port 11. The second performance display device 10 displays a discard tile navigation display recommending discarding a "2". The second performance display device 10 also continues to display the "BB1 1 round" image. The right hand tile area 16-3 of the first performance display device 16 displays the hand tile pattern of "A" based on the gaming ball entering the special ball entry port 11. As a result of judging whether or not a winning combination has been achieved (step 3506), it is determined that the winning combination is not achieved, and so one or two tiles (multiple tiles can be discarded) must be discarded. The discard tile navigation effect highlights the tile symbols to be discarded by surrounding the "2" tile symbol that is not required for the winning combination with a dashed line, thereby informing the player of the tile symbols to be discarded. Note that in (d), if the game end button 26 is operated, the game is forcibly ended.

(e) is a diagram showing the state after the player operates the discard button 19 according to the discard navigation effect to discard the hand tile pattern "2" in the middle hand tile area 16-2. The second effect display device 10 displays a launch navigation effect to notify the player of a right hit. For example, it displays an image "Aim right!!" and a right arrow image. In addition, the second effect display device 10 continues to display the image "BB1 1 round". The middle hand tile area 16-2 of the first effect display device 16 displays an image of a star. It is also possible to configure the hand tile patterns displayed in the hand tile area 16 to be rearranged after the discard button 19 is operated. For example, the hand tile patterns are displayed in the left hand tile area 16-1 and the middle hand tile area 16-2, and the right hand tile area 16-3 is put into a standby state. By configuring in this way, if a hand is in a tenpai state, it is possible to clearly display to the player that the hand is in a tenpai state. In addition, in (e), the game is configured not to be forcibly ended when the game end button 26 is operated, but it may be configured to end the game.

(f) shows that the fourth game ball has entered the game. The released game ball passes through the gate 12 and enters the special ball entrance 11. The second performance display device 10 displays a "Win" image and a right arrow image indicating that a winning combination has been achieved, but the right arrow image may be configured to disappear at this timing. The second performance display device 10 also continues to display a "BB1 1 round" image, but this display may be configured to disappear at this timing. The middle tile area 16-2 of the first performance display device 16 displays a hand tile pattern of "A" based on the game ball entering the special ball entrance 11. Note that "7, A, A" is the winning combination of No. 22 (see FIG. 20). Then, the payout number calculation process of step 3750 is executed, and then the game ends.

Next, using FIG. 31, we will explain game 2 in the special game state. In the final round of play in the special game state (for example, BB2), the game is designed so that the promoted BB role is achieved by having three balls enter the symbol entry holes 13-13 to complete the BNS Seven, so the 21 balls that can be fired are basically fired aiming at the center hit area. If there is no possibility of completing the BNS Seven when there are only two balls left, the game is designed so that the player can gain more benefit by aiming for the special entry hole 11, so the game balls are basically fired aiming at the right hit area. In this example, we will explain the case assuming that the operating symbol number 35 when BB2 is activated is the winning number.

(a) is a diagram showing the state in which the final round of BB2 has started after the eighth round of BB2 has ended and the BET button 18 for starting the game has been operated. The second performance display device 10 displays a middle hit notification. The middle hit notification here differs from previous middle hit notifications in that it displays a "Aim for 7" image, indicating that the player should aim for the "7" symbol entrance 13-13, and also displays a down arrow image pointing to the "7" symbol entrance 13-13. Note that either one of the displays may be used as the middle hit notification. The second performance display device 10 also displays a "BB2 Final Round" image, indicating that the current BB is BB2 and that this is the final round. The first performance display device 16 displays a star image in the hand tile area 16.

(b) is a diagram showing that the first gaming ball has entered the game area. The released gaming ball passes through the gate 14 and enters the symbol entry hole 13-13. The second performance display device 10 continues to display the center hit notification. The second performance display device 10 also continues to display the "BB2 Final Round" image. The left hand tile area 16-1 of the first performance display device 16 displays the hand tile pattern "7" based on the gaming ball entering the symbol entry hole 13-13. As the second and third balls have not entered the game area, the middle hand tile area 16-2 and right hand tile area 16-3 remain as star images.

(c) is a diagram showing that the second game ball has entered the game area. The released game ball passes through the gate 14 and enters the symbol entry hole 13-4. The second performance display device 10 continues to display the center hit notification. The second performance display device 10 also continues to display the "BB2 Final Round" image. The middle tile area 16-2 of the first performance display device 16 displays the hand tile pattern "2" based on the game ball entering the symbol entry hole 13-4. As there is no third ball entering the game area, the right hand tile area 16-3 remains as an image of a star.

(d) is a diagram showing that the third game ball has entered the game. The released game ball passes through the gate 14 and enters the symbol entry port 13-13. The second performance display device 10 displays a discard tile navigation effect that recommends discarding the "2". The second performance display device 10 also continues to display the "BB2 Final Round" image. The right hand tile area 16-3 of the first performance display device 16 displays the hand tile pattern of "7" based on the game ball entering the symbol entry port 13-13. As a result of determining whether or not a winning combination has been established (step 3506), it is determined that a winning combination has not been established, so one of the hand tile patterns must be discarded. However, as a discard tile navigation effect, a performance is executed in which the hand tile pattern of "2", which is not required for the winning combination, is surrounded by a dashed line to highlight the hand tile pattern to be discarded. In addition, in (d), if the game end button 26 is operated, this operation is invalidated and the game is not forcibly ended. Furthermore, if there are three tiles in the hand and it is determined that there is no possibility of achieving a winning combination by firing the remaining balls (for example, if there is one ball remaining and the combination is "7, 2, 6" etc.), a process is configured to automatically end the game (in this case, a failure occurs).

(e) is a diagram showing the state after the discard button 19 is operated according to the discard navigation effect to discard the "2" hand tile pattern in the middle hand tile area 16-2. The second effect display device 10 displays a launch navigation effect, which is a mid-hit notification that recommends aiming for "7". For example, a "Aim for 7!!" image is displayed. The second effect display device 10 also continues to display the "BB2 Final Round" image. The middle hand tile area 16-2 of the first effect display device 16 displays a star image. Note that the hand tile patterns displayed in the hand tile area 16 may be rearranged after the discard button 19 is operated. For example, hand tile patterns are displayed in the left hand tile area 16-1 and the middle hand tile area 16-2, and the right hand tile area 16-3 is placed in a standby state. By configuring in this way, if a player has a tenpai, it is possible to clearly display to the player that he or she has a tenpai. In addition, in (e), if it is the final round of BB2 and the player has a "7" tile pattern obtained by something other than a role, the main control board 1000 controls to disable the discard operation of the "7" tile pattern. In this way, it is possible to provide a gaming machine that does not disadvantage the player by accidentally discarding a tile pattern that may result in a BB role that will promote the player.

(f) is a diagram showing that the fourth game ball has entered the game. The released game ball passes through the gate 14 and enters the symbol entrance 13-13. The second performance display device 10 displays a "Win" image indicating that a winning combination has been achieved. The second performance display device 10 also continues to display the "BB2 Final Round" image, but this display may be configured to be erased at this timing. The middle hand tile area 16-2 of the first performance display device 16 displays a "7" hand tile pattern based on the game ball entering the symbol entrance 13-13. The first performance display device 16 also displays a "777 Promotion Bonus Role Established" image indicating that the BNS Sevens have been aligned to form a winning combination with the promotion BB role. Then, the BB promotion determination process of step 3720 and the payout number calculation process of step 3750 are executed, and then the game ends.

Next, the chance eye effect in the normal game mode will be explained using FIG. 32. The chance eye effect is an effect that is executed when BNS chance eye 1-6 (operating symbol number 2-7) or the like is selected as a bonus pattern in the normal game mode. Note that in this example, the explanation will be given assuming that operating symbol number 2 has been selected.

(a) is a diagram showing a state in which a chance notice has been executed in a game start presentation state in which a game has started. In the game start presentation state, the game start presentation is configured to be executed, and in this example, a chance notice is executed. The chance notice is a presentation executed when a BNS chance eye 6 or the like (see the presentation table in FIG. 12) is determined as a winning combination, and is a presentation that notifies that BNS chance eyes 1 to 6 may be selected in the game. The second presentation display device 10 displays a chance notice by character X. The second presentation display device 10 also displays a "Stage B" image indicating that the current stage is Stage B. The first presentation display device 16 displays a star image in the hand tile area 16.

(b) is a diagram showing that all four balls have been released, and that the fourth game ball has entered the game. The second performance display device 10 displays an image of "The result is..." by character X, and executes the first stage of the winning role suggestion performance in the chance eye performance. In the first stage of the winning role suggestion performance, it is not notified whether or not a winning role has been achieved, but it may be notified that a winning role has been achieved. In addition, the second performance display device 10 continues to display the "Stage B" image. The first performance display device 16 displays the hand pattern of "7, 6, 7".

(c) is a diagram showing the second stage of the winning hand suggestion effect. The second effect display device 10 displays a "Too bad?" image by character X, displaying the second stage of the winning hand suggestion effect. The second stage of the winning hand suggestion effect is an effect that suggests that there is a high possibility that the winning hand has not been achieved. In addition, the second effect display device 10 continues to display the "Stage B" image. The first effect display device 16 continues to display the "7-6-7" hand tile pattern.

(d) is a diagram showing the button effect in the chance eye effect. The second effect display device 10 displays a button image and executes the button effect in the chance eye effect. The second effect display device 10 also continues to display the "Stage B" image. The first effect display device 16 continues to display the "7-6-7" hand tile pattern. The button effect may be the third stage of the winning role suggestion effect.

(e) is a diagram showing the third stage (final) of the winning role suggestion effect after the sub-input button SB is operated by the player in (d). The second effect display device 10 displays a "chance eye established" image by character X, and executes the third stage of the winning role suggestion effect. The third stage of the winning role suggestion effect is a result effect indicating that the chance eye role has been established as a winning role. The second effect display device 10 also continues to display the "Stage B" image. The first effect display device 16 displays the "7-6-7" hand tile pattern, which is a rearrangement of the "7-6-7" hand tile pattern. If the button effect is the third stage of the winning role suggestion effect, (e) corresponds to the fourth stage (final) of the winning role suggestion effect.

(f) is a diagram showing that the game result is a win. The second performance display device 10 executes a performance of a win notification by character X. The second performance display device 10 also continues to display the "Stage B" image. The first performance display device 16 continues to display the rearranged "7, 7, 6" hand tile patterns. Next, the winning combination determination process of step 3700 and the payout number calculation process of step 3750 are executed to end the game.

Next, the SC effect in the normal game mode will be explained using FIG. 33. The SC effect is executed when a bonus pattern (operating symbol number 21) such as BNS one, two, or three is selected in the normal game mode. The SC effect is a mission-like effect that is completed in one game, presenting a mission such as "Aim for 111!" and confirming a BB when the mission is completed. In this example, the explanation will be given assuming that operating symbol number 21 has been won.

(a) is a diagram showing the game result before the SC performance, and shows the game waiting state. The second performance display device 10 displays a "Disappointment" image and a "Stage B" image. The first performance display device 16 displays the hand patterns of "7, 6, 4", which are not winning combinations.

(b) is a diagram showing a game start preparation state after the BET button 18 is operated. The game start preparation state is a game state from when the BET button 18 is operated until the game start presentation is executed. The second presentation display device 10 executes a stage change presentation. The first presentation display device 16 displays a star image in the hand tile area 16. Here, the stage change to the SC presentation can be a change by the stage change presentation or a change without the stage change presentation. If the previous game is a normal stage (e.g., stages A to C) and the next game is to execute the SC presentation, the stage is changed to the stage SC by the stage change presentation, but if the previous game is a special stage (e.g., stage P) and the next game is to execute the SC presentation, the stage is changed to the stage SC without the stage change presentation. The stage change presentation may be executed in the game start presentation state shown in (c) below. The case of executing the SC presentation from the special stage will be described later.

(c) is a diagram showing a state in which the SC effect is being executed in the game start effect state after the game start preparation state. In the game start effect state, it is configured to execute the game start effect, and in this example, the SC effect is executed. The SC effect is an effect that is executed when BNS one set or the like (see the effect table in FIG. 12) is determined as the winning combination, and in this example, it is an effect that notifies that BNS one set, BNS two set, and BNS three set may be selected in the game. The second effect display device 10 displays a "111" image, a "222" image, and a "333" image. Although the figure shows it simply, in reality, the "Aim for 111!" image, the "Aim for 222!" image, and the "Aim for 333!" image are displayed. In addition, the second effect display device 10 displays a "Stage SC" image indicating that the current stage is Stage SC. The first effect display device 16 displays a star image in the hand tile area 16.

(d) is a diagram showing the timing when a predetermined time (e.g., 6 seconds) has elapsed since the game start preparation state of (b) was entered. When a predetermined time (e.g., 6 seconds) has elapsed since the game start preparation state was entered, the sub-control board 3000 controls the state to be in the firing intensity monitoring state 1 when the game state is in the SC performance (game start performance state) and no ball has been fired yet. In the firing intensity monitoring state 1, when the firing intensity is in a strong range that is a specific range (for example, when the firing intensity is in the range of intensity for firing to the right-hand hitting area), the second performance display device 10 displays an image "Please return to left-hand hitting" as an announcement performance according to the game state. For example, when the firing intensity is in the strong range in the firing intensity monitoring state 1, the fired game ball will enter the special ball entrance 11 and will be less likely to enter the pattern ball entrances 13-21 to 23, so such a left-hand hitting notification is executed. In addition, in the left-hand hitting notification, the speaker and lamp are also configured to notify with a sound and lamp pattern for left-hand hitting. In addition, in the firing intensity monitoring state 1, if the firing intensity changes from the appropriate range, which is the range of intensity that can be fired into the left hit area or the center hit area, to the strong range, the "Please return to left hit" image is displayed. In addition, in the firing intensity monitoring state 1, if the firing intensity changes from the strong range to the appropriate range, the "Please return to left hit" image is erased. In addition, in the firing intensity monitoring state 1, if the game start performance of the SC performance ends in the state where the "Please return to left hit" image is displayed, the firing intensity monitoring state 1 ends and the "Please return to left hit" image is erased. By making an appropriate announcement according to the game status in this way, it is possible to announce the importance of the SC performance to the player, and by not making an announcement, it is possible to suppress disadvantages to the player. In addition, it is preferable to configure it so that a center hit notification is made when the firing intensity is in the appropriate range when a predetermined time (for example, 6 seconds) has passed since the game start preparation state was entered.

(e) is a diagram showing that all four balls have been released, and that the fourth game ball has entered the game. The second performance display device 10 displays an image of "One Match!" by character X, and executes a performance suggesting a winning role. The performance suggesting a winning role here is a result performance indicating that the BNS one match has been established as a winning role. In addition, the second performance display device 10 continues to display the "Stage SC" image. The first performance display device 16 displays the hand pattern of "1, 1, 1".

(f) is a diagram showing that the game result is a win. The second performance display device 10 executes a performance of a win notification by character X. The second performance display device 10 also continues to display the "Stage SC" image. The first performance display device 16 also continues to display the "1, 1, 1" hand pattern. The first performance display device 16 also displays the "111 Bonus role achieved" image, which indicates that a BNS one-match has been achieved and a winning role with the BB role has been achieved. Next, the winning role determination process of step 3700 and the payout number calculation process of step 3750 are executed to end the game.

Next, the DB effect in normal game mode will be explained using FIG. 34. The DB effect is executed when a bonus pattern with a BNS total of 20 (operating symbol number 22) is selected in normal game mode. The DB effect is a one-game-contained effect, and indicates that if the total value of the numbers on the symbols in one's hand is equal to or greater than the dealer's total value, it will result in BB. Note that in this example, the explanation will be given assuming that operating symbol number 22 has been selected.

(a) is a diagram showing the results of the game before the DB performance, and shows the game waiting state. The second performance display device 10 displays a "Disappointment" image and a "Stage B" image. The first performance display device 16 displays the hand patterns of "7, 6, 4", which are not winning combinations.

(b) is a diagram showing a state of preparation for starting a game after the BET button 18 is operated. The second performance display device 10 executes a stage change performance. The first performance display device 16 displays an image of a star in the hand tile area 16. Here, the stage can be changed to a DB performance by a stage change performance or without a stage change performance. If the previous game was a normal stage (e.g., stages A to C) and a DB performance is to be executed in the next game, the stage is changed to DB by a stage change performance, but if the previous game was a special stage (e.g., stage P) and a DB performance is to be executed in the next game, the stage is changed to DB without a stage change performance. The stage change performance may be executed in the game start performance state shown in (c) below. The case of executing a DB performance from a special stage will be described later.

(c) is a diagram showing a state in which a DB effect is being executed in a game start effect state after the game start preparation state. In the game start effect state, it is configured to execute a game start effect, and in this example, a DB effect is executed. The DB effect is a mission-like effect that is completed in one game, and when it is cleared, it becomes BB. In this example, the DB effect is executed when a BNS total of 20 (see the effect table in FIG. 12) is determined as a winning role, and it is an effect that presents that if the total value of the numbers of the hand tile patterns is equal to or greater than the dealer's total value of 20, it will be BB. The second effect display device 10 displays a dealer image, a "Can you make it more than 20?" image, and a "20" image. In addition, the second effect display device 10 displays a "stage DB" image indicating that the current stage is stage DB. The first effect display device 16 displays a star image in the hand tile area 16.

(d) is a diagram showing that all four balls have been shot, and that the fourth game ball has entered the game. The second performance display device 10 displays a "unfortunate" image to indicate that the winning role was not achieved. The second performance display device 10 also continues to display a "stage DB" image. The first performance display device 16 displays the hand pattern of "7-7-5". Here, the temporary game status storage means 2100 temporarily stores game information A indicating that the winning role was not achieved in the DB performance. Note that in this example, a case where a winning role was not achieved using four balls was shown, but the game information is also temporarily stored in the same way when the game is automatically ended because there is no possibility of a winning role being achieved after using three balls. In this case, the temporary game status storage means 2100 temporarily stores game information B indicating that the winning role was not achieved in the DB performance.

(e) is a diagram showing the game start presentation state of the next game after the BET button 18 is operated after the DB presentation. The second presentation display device 10 executes a stage change presentation. The first presentation display device 16 displays an image of a star in the hand tile area 16. Note that if a winning combination cannot be achieved in the DB presentation, the stage is always changed in the next game.

(f) is a diagram showing the game state after the stage change effect changes the stage to stage C in the first game after the DB effect. The second effect display device 10 executes a comment effect by character X. In this comment effect, it is possible to execute an effect that reflects the content of the game one game before (the content of the DB effect). For example, if the game ends without a winning combination being achieved in the DB effect, the comment effect for the next game is configured to display a comment such as "Too bad for you just now," which is a comment that reflects the content of the game one game before (the content of the DB effect). Note that this comment is an effect based on the temporarily stored game information A, and in the case of game information B, it is configured to display a comment such as "You need to practice a little more." By configuring in this way, it is possible to provide the player with an effect that maintains a continuous flow over a period of multiple games.

The content of the comment is configured to differ based on the segment display described below. For example, for a beginner, a comment such as "Sorry about that earlier" is displayed, whereas for an advanced player, a comment such as "You still have a long way to go" is displayed. By configuring it in this way, it is possible to provide the player with a presentation that links the player's current rank with their gameplay.

Next, the effects in stage P will be described with reference to FIG. 35 and FIG. 36. Stage P is a special stage that can only be transitioned to in a normal game state (a non-BB state in which BB is not continuing) after the end of promotion BB (e.g., BB7). In detail, it is a stage (a stage in which a lion character is displayed in FIG. 35(c)) that is transitioned to based on the execution of a stage change effect (FIG. 35(b)) in the game start effect state of the first game after the end of promotion BB (FIG. 35(a)). Stage P is a stage in which the player stays for a period of multiple games (e.g., a period of 10 games), and is configured such that stage change is prohibited during the multiple games. Then, after the period of multiple games has passed (FIG. 35(d)), a stage change effect (FIG. 35(e)) is executed in the next game start effect state in which the stage change prohibition period is no longer in effect, and the player transitions to a stage different from stage P (e.g., stage A shown in FIG. 35(f)).

If an SC or DB effect is won in a game that involves a stage change (Fig. 36(b), Fig. 36(e)), the stage change effect is not performed in the game start effect state, but the stage is changed to stage P in the game start preparation state (Fig. 36(b), Fig. 36(e)), and the SC effect (Fig. 36(c)) or DB effect (Fig. 36(f)) is executed in the game start effect state.

When the SC effect is won in the next game in FIG. 36(a), the control is as follows. The sub-control board 3000 judges whether it is the first game immediately after the promotion BB ends. The sub-control board 3000 judges that the promotion BB has ended even if the promotion BB has ended due to a crash. When the sub-control board 3000 operates the BET button 18 and judges that it is the first game immediately after the promotion BB ends and that the SC effect should be executed, it forcibly rewrites the stage to stage P without executing a stage change effect in the game start preparation state, and displays the background of stage P, outputs the BGM of stage P, and executes a light-up effect of the lamp of stage P. In this way, by not generating a stage change effect when an SC effect occurs in the first game after the promotion BB ends, it is possible to notify the player that an SC effect or DB effect has been won.

On the other hand, the DB effect is similar, and if the DB effect is won in the next game of FIG. 36 (d), the control is as follows. The sub-control board 3000 judges whether it is the first game immediately after the promotion BB ends. The sub-control board 3000 judges that the promotion BB has ended even if the promotion BB has ended due to a crash. If the sub-control board 3000 determines that it is the first game immediately after the promotion BB ends when the BET button 18 is operated and that a DB effect is to be executed, it forcibly rewrites the stage to stage P without executing a stage change effect in the game start preparation state, and executes displaying the background of stage P, outputting the BGM of stage P, and lighting up the lamp of stage P. In this way, by not generating a stage change effect when a DB effect occurs in the first game after the promotion BB ends, it is possible to notify the player that a DB effect or SC effect has been won.

In (e) of Figure 35, it has been explained that a stage change effect is executed in the next game start effect state when the stage change prohibited period has ended, and a transition is made to a stage different from stage P. However, if all of the following four conditions are met when the BET button 18 is operated, the stage may be forcibly rewritten to stage A, and the background of stage A is displayed, the BGM of stage A is played, and the lamp of stage A is illuminated.
(1) The game is in normal play mode.
(2) The stage is stage P.
(3) It is not a period during which stage change effects are prohibited.
(4) It is not an activation pattern number that executes an SC or DB effect.

By configuring it in this way, if a stage change effect occurs after the stage change prohibition period has ended, it is possible to give the player a sense of expectation that they may have won a DB effect, SC effect, or the like.

As shown in FIG. 35(f), the game may be configured to execute a comment presentation that reflects the content of multiple games. In this comment presentation, a presentation that reflects the content of 10 games of stage P can be executed. For example, since character X is not displayed in stage P, the game is configured to display a comment such as "It's been a while." It is preferable that this comment be a presentation based on game information that temporarily stores the results of multiple games. By configuring the game in this way, it is possible to provide the player with a presentation that maintains a continuous flow even over a long period of time.

The content of the comment is configured to differ based on the segment display, which will be described later. For example, if there was a chance to achieve a winning combination in the fifth play of stage P, but it was not achieved, a beginner might see a comment such as "You were close in the play five plays ago," whereas an advanced player might see a comment such as "You were no good at all." By configuring it in this way, it is possible to provide the player with an effect that links the player's current rank with the play.

Next, an example (Example 1) of an announcement effect according to the game state will be described with reference to FIG. 37. The announcement effect according to the game state in FIG. 37 is an announcement effect according to a special game state, and is an effect related to the windmill navigation effect, so the windmill navigation effect described above will also be described.

Figure 37 (a) shows the special game state, where the firing intensity of Figure 27 (c) is 470. In the special game state, the second performance display device 10 is configured to display the image "READY" when the game state is a specified game state 1.

The predetermined gaming state 1 is a gaming state that satisfies all of the following (1) to (3).
(1) The game status is a specific round of a special game (for example, all rounds of BB1 and 7, and rounds other than the final round of BB2 to BB6).
(2) No shots have been fired in a particular round.
(3) The player operates the launch handle 4 with a launch strength equal to or greater than a predetermined strength (e.g., 401 or greater), and the launch button 44 is turned OFF.

If the firing intensity is less than a predetermined firing intensity (e.g., less than 401), the "READY" image is not displayed even if conditions (1) and (2) are met. Also, if the firing intensity becomes less than a predetermined firing intensity while the "READY" image is displayed, the "READY" image is erased. In detail, if the main control board 1000 determines that the game is in a predetermined game state 1, it transmits a command for displaying "READY" to the sub-control board 3000 in the control command transmission process of step 2006, and the sub-control board 3000 displays the "READY" image based on the command reception. On the other hand, if the main control board 1000 determines that the game is no longer in the predetermined game state 1, it transmits a command for erasing "READY" to the sub-control board 3000 in the control command transmission process of step 2006, and the sub-control board 3000 erases the "READY" image based on the command reception. Additionally, other effect images (arrow images in the figure) may be displayed at the same time as the "READY" image.

Figure 37 (b) shows a special game state, where the firing intensity of Figure 27 (c) is 470. In the special game state, the second effect display device 10 is configured to display an image of "GO" when the game state is a specified game state 2.

The predetermined gaming state 2 is a gaming state that satisfies all of the following (1) to (4).
(1) The game status is a specific round of a special game (for example, all rounds of BB1 and 7, and rounds other than the final round of BB2 to BB6).
(2) No shots have been fired in a particular round.
(3) The player operates the launch handle 4 with a launch strength equal to or greater than a predetermined strength (e.g., 401 or greater).
(4) The launch button 44 is turned ON.

When the "READY" image is displayed and the game reaches a predetermined game state 2 (one game ball is released at this timing), the "READY" image is erased and the "GO" image is displayed. Instead of erasing the "READY" image, the "GO" image may be displayed on top of the "READY" image or overwritten. In detail, when the main control board 1000 determines that the game is in the predetermined game state 2, it transmits a command for displaying "GO" to the sub-control board 3000 in the control command transmission process of step 2006, and the sub-control board 3000 displays the "GO" image based on the command reception. On the other hand, when the main control board 1000 determines that the game is no longer in the predetermined game state 2, it transmits a command for erasing "GO" to the sub-control board 3000 in the control command transmission process of step 2006, and the sub-control board 3000 erases the "GO" image based on the command reception, and displays the "READY" image if the game is in the predetermined game state 1. Furthermore, if the launched game ball is a foul ball, one game ball is set in the launching device, and if a predetermined game state 1 is reached, a "READY" image is displayed. Then, if a predetermined game state 2 is reached after that, a "GO" image is displayed. Note that other presentation images (arrow images in the figure) may be displayed at the same time as the "GO" image.

By making appropriate announcements according to the game status in this way, the importance of the first ball in a special game can be announced to the player, while not making an announcement can prevent disadvantage to the player. Furthermore, when the game ball passes through the score increase device 1 activation gate 14 on the first ball of a specific round and a winning combination of 25 medals is achieved, 5 medals are added to the number of medals acquired (for a total of 30 medals), so this is an important firing operation for the player. Therefore, by executing announcement performances according to such game status, game play is provided that does not cause disadvantage to the player.

Next, an example of an announcement effect according to the game state (Example 2) will be described using FIG. 38. FIG. 38 shows an announcement effect according to the game state in the final round of play after 8 rounds in the game state BB2 (BB3 to BB6 are also possible).

(a) is a diagram showing that the second ball has been fired in the eighth round of BB2. The second performance display device 10 displays a "Aim right" image, indicating that the player should aim at the special ball entrance 11 in the right-hitting area, and also displays a right arrow image, indicating a right-hit, to notify the player of a right-hit. The second performance display device 10 also displays a "BB2 8th round" image. The hand tile area 16 of the first performance display device 16 displays "7, A, Star".

(b) is a diagram showing that a winning hand has been achieved in the 8th round of BB2. The second performance display device 10 displays a "Win" image indicating that a winning hand has been achieved. The second performance display device 10 also displays a "BB2 8th round" image. The second performance display device 10 also displays a right arrow image indicating a right hit. The hand area 16 of the first performance display device 16 displays "7, A, A" which constitute the winning hand.

(c) is a diagram showing the round end processing state (state in which payout processing in round play is performed) after the end of 8 rounds of play of BB2. When a predetermined time (e.g., 3 seconds) has elapsed since the round end processing state was entered, the sub-control board 3000 controls to enter the firing intensity monitoring state 2. Then, in the firing intensity monitoring state 2, if the firing intensity is equal to or greater than a predetermined intensity, the second performance display device 10 displays the "Please return to left hitting" image as an announcement performance according to the game state. Note that a "Please return to center hitting" image may also be displayed. If the final round of play is started with the firing intensity (right hitting firing intensity) of (b) as it is, there is a high risk of blowing out in the final round. Therefore, it is configured to execute an announcement performance as a dedicated message that focuses on returning the firing handle 4 to a game state in which the firing handle 4 is fired to the left hitting area. Note that, it is preferable to display the "Please return to left hitting" image to promote firing to the left hitting area when the predetermined intensity is equal to or greater than 600, for example. In this case, if the firing strength of the firing handle is less than 600, the image "Please operate the BET button" may be displayed. Also, if the firing strength of the firing handle changes from less than 600 to 600 or more, the image "Please return to left hand" may be displayed. Furthermore, if the firing strength of the firing handle becomes less than 600 in the state of (c), the system may be configured to allow the credits to be settled. When the settlement is made, it is preferable to erase the images "Please return to left hand" and "Please operate the BET button." By making an appropriate announcement according to the game state in this way, it is possible to inform the player of the importance of the final round of the special game, and by not making an announcement, it is possible to suppress disadvantages to the player.

In addition, in (c), the main control board 1000 controls to perform a wait process for a predetermined period (for example, 5 seconds) after the round end process state is reached. This wait process is different from the wait process of step 3180, but instead of steps 3180-2, 3180-4, and 3180-6, it is a process to determine whether 5 seconds have passed. If it is determined that 5 seconds have not passed, the main control board 1000 executes a process to disable the operation of the BET button 18 (the same process as step 3180-8). If it is not in a state where medals cannot be inserted, the main control board 1000 drives the medal blocker to a state where medals can be inserted, and executes the same process as steps 3180-10 and 12. On the other hand, if it is determined that 5 seconds have passed, the main control board 1000 executes a process to enable the operation of the BET button 18 (the same process as step 3180-14). If it is not in a state where medals cannot be inserted, the main control board 1000 drives the medal blocker to a state where medals can be inserted, and executes the same process as step 3180-16. In this way, preparations for playing the game, such as inserting medals, can be made while the wait process is in progress, making it possible to effectively utilize the wait time during which nothing could be done, and allowing the game to be played smoothly after the wait process is released.

(d) is a diagram showing the state of preparation for starting play after the BET button 18 is operated after the eight rounds of play of BB2 have ended. The second performance display device 10 displays the image "BB2 Final Round." The first performance display device 16 displays an image of a star in the hand tile area 16. The active symbol number is 35.

(e) is a diagram showing the timing when a predetermined time (e.g., 0.5 seconds) has elapsed since the game start preparation state of (d) was entered. When a predetermined time (e.g., 0.5 seconds) has elapsed since the game start preparation state was entered, the sub-control board 3000 controls the game to enter the firing intensity monitoring state 3 when the game state is in which the performance of the final round is being executed and no ball has been fired yet. Then, in the firing intensity monitoring state 3, if the firing intensity is equal to or greater than a predetermined intensity, the second performance display device 10 displays an image "Please return to left hitting" as an announcement performance according to the game state. Note that the "Please hit in the middle" image may be displayed, and if the firing intensity is less than the predetermined intensity without being equal to or greater than the predetermined intensity in the firing intensity monitoring state 3, a middle hit notification such as an image "Next is a middle hit!" may be executed. In the state of (e), if the game enters the final round with the firing intensity of (b) (firing intensity for right hitting), there is a high risk of being blown out in the final round. Therefore, the system is configured to execute an announcement performance as a dedicated message that focuses on returning the game state in which the launch handle 4 is launched to the left hit area. It is preferable to display a "Please return to left hit" image when the predetermined strength is reached, for example, 600 or more, to encourage launching to the left hit area. It may also be configured to display a "Please return to left hit" image when the launch strength of the launch handle goes from less than 600 to 600 or more. By making an appropriate announcement in this way according to the game state, it is possible to inform the player of the importance of the final round of the special game, and by not making an announcement, it is possible to prevent disadvantages to the player.

(f) is a diagram showing the state after the appropriate firing strength has been achieved in the state of (e). The second performance display device 10 displays the "Aim for 7" image, which indicates that the player should aim for the symbol entrance 13-13, and also executes a middle hit notification by displaying a down arrow image. The second performance display device 10 also displays the "BB2 Final Round" image. The hand tile area 16 of the first performance display device 16 displays "Star Star Star".

Next, the segment display (rank display) of a player will be explained using FIG. 39. The segment display of a player displays five levels of segments based on the player's skill, and the five levels of segments are (1) first play, (2) beginner, (3) intermediate player, (4) advanced player, and (5) expert. For example, the rank is displayed in the rank display area 16-10 of FIG. 3 together with the character X of FIG. 39(a). Note that in FIG. 3, it is simply displayed as "beginner."

The segment is configured to determine the segment to which the current player belongs based on game data for a specific game period. The game data to be acquired as the game data for segmentation are the following (1) to (8), and the game data is configured to be acquired collectively at the end of each game.
(1) The number of times that the ball was hit with a launch strength in the range of 400 to 500 when it was fired before the third ball went in during normal gameplay (hereinafter referred to as the number of medium hits).
(2) The number of balls passing through the gate 14 up to the third ball during normal gameplay.
(3) The number of times a game is played in normal game mode.
(4) The number of times the player passes through the gate 14 during play in a special game state (hereinafter referred to as the number of BB hits).
(5) The number of plays that can increase the score in the special game state.
(6) Number of BBs.
(7) The total number of plays in the special play state.
(8) The number of consecutive shots up to the third ball in a game in a special game state (determined based on the number of shots up to the third ball going in, without determining whether the ball is a foul ball or not).

The initial judgment is configured to be made when a predetermined period 1 has elapsed since the start of the game, and is made by acquiring the following data.
(1) Number of hits.
(2) The number of balls passing through the gate 14 up to the third ball during normal gameplay.
(3) The number of times a game is played in normal game mode.
(7) The total number of plays in the special play state.

The segment for the first judgment is judged based on two parameters: the success rate of the middle hit and the rate of passing through gate 14. The success rate of the middle hit is calculated by (1)/{3 x (3)}, and the rate of passing through gate 14 is calculated by (2)/{3 x (3)}.

Then, the segment is determined by referring to the following (a) to (c), and the determined segment is displayed in the rank display area 16-10.
(a): If the center hit success rate is 80% or less and the gate 14 passing rate is 33% or less, the player is judged as a "beginner."
(b) If the success rate of center hits is 90% or more and the rate of passing through gate 14 is 66% or more, the player is judged to be an "advanced player."
(c): Anything other than (a) and (b) will be judged as "intermediate level."

The second judgment is configured to be made when a predetermined period 2 has elapsed since the first judgment, and is made by acquiring the following data.
(1) Number of hits.
(2) The number of balls passing through the gate 14 up to the third ball during normal gameplay.
(3) The number of times a game is played in normal game mode.
(4) Number of hits during BB.
(5) The number of plays that can increase the score in the special game state.
(6) Number of BBs.
(7) The total number of plays in the special play state.
(8) The number of consecutive shots up to the third ball in a game in a special game state (determined based on the number of shots up to the third ball going in, without determining whether the ball is a foul ball or not).

The segment for the second judgment is determined based on four parameters: the success rate of normal shots, the rate of rapid fire, the success rate of perfect shots during BB, and the number of BBs achieved. The success rate of normal shots is calculated by (1)/{3 x (3)}. The rate of rapid fire is calculated by (8)/(3). The success rate of perfect shots during BB is calculated by (4)/(5). The number of BBs achieved is calculated by referring to the number of BBs in (6).

First, referring to FIG. 39(b), it is determined whether the calculation result satisfies the value of the currently-located segment. Next, referring to FIG. 39(c), it is determined how many of the four conditions in FIG. 39(b) are satisfied, and a new segment is determined. The determined segment is displayed in the rank display area 16-10. From the third time onwards, the determination should be made when a predetermined period of time has passed since the previous determination.

By configuring the system to calculate and display the player's skill in this way, players will aim to reach higher segments, making the game more interesting.

Next, using Figure 42, we will explain the wait occurrence indication effect that is displayed during gameplay and indicates that a wait may occur.

(a) is a diagram showing a game in progress, showing the timing 75 seconds after the 7th game and 175 seconds after the 20th game. Note that this is the same timing as (a) in Figure 9. In this state, the second performance display device 10 displays an image of character X. The second performance display device 10 also displays an image of "Stage A." The hand tile area of the first performance display device 16 displays the hand tile pattern of "7, star, 7."

(b) is an image diagram showing Example 1 of a wait occurrence indication effect. If the BET button 18 is operated during the period from (a) of FIG. 42 to (e) of FIG. 42 to end the current game and start the next game, a wait process will occur. For this reason, the device is configured to execute a wait occurrence indication effect that indicates to the player in advance that a wait process may occur. In Example 1, the second performance display device 10 displays a character X image and a "Let's take a break" image as a comment effect to notify the player to delay the game for a while. The second performance display device 10 also displays a "Stage A" image. The hand tile pattern of "7-star-7" is continuously displayed in the hand tile area of the first performance display device 16.

(c) is an image showing Example 2 of a wait occurrence suggestion effect. In Example 2, the second effect display device 10 displays an image of character X. The second effect display device 10 also displays a "Stage A" image. The hand tile pattern of "7-star-7" is continuously displayed in the hand tile area of the first effect display device 16. The first effect display device 16 also displays an image saying "If you continue playing like this, a wait will occur" to suggest the occurrence of a wait.

(d) is an image diagram showing Example 3 of a wait occurrence indication effect. In Example 3, the second effect display device 10 displays an image of character X and a wait indication meter image. The wait indication meter image indicates the time until no wait will occur by using an indicator image shown in black. The indicator image is configured to get smaller over time and disappear when the time comes when no wait will occur. In addition, the second effect display device 10 displays a "Stage A" image. The hand tile pattern of "7-star-7" is continuously displayed in the hand tile area of the first effect display device 16.

(e) is a diagram showing the game in progress, showing the timing 81 seconds after the 7th game and 181 seconds after the 20th game. Note that this is the same timing as FIG. 9(b). In this state, the second performance display device 10 displays an image of character X and an image "It's OK to fire" to suggest to the player that there will be no wait even if the player fires and ends the game. The second performance display device 10 also displays a "Stage A" image. The hand tile pattern of "7-star-7" is displayed in the hand tile area of the first performance display device 16.

(f) shows that the fourth game ball has entered the winning hand. The second performance display device 10 displays a "disappointing" image indicating that the winning combination was not achieved. The middle hand tile area 16-2 of the first performance display device 16 displays the hand tile pattern of "6" based on the game ball entering the pattern entry hole 13-11. As a result of determining whether or not a winning combination has been achieved (step 3506), it is determined that the winning combination is not achieved, so a process to automatically end the game is executed, and the game is ended.

By implementing such suggestive effects, it is possible to allow the player to play at an appropriate speed. In addition, in (e), the timing at which the indicator image is erased may be set to be earlier than 81 seconds since the 7th game or 181 seconds since the 20th game. In this way, it is possible to prevent a wait from occurring when a game ends, allowing the player to play in an appropriate situation.

The conditions for ending the game are listed below.
(1) If the number of remaining game balls becomes zero when a hand tile pattern is acquired, the game ends (automatic end).
(2) When the hand patterns are acquired, a winning combination of patterns is displayed. If the player then presses the BET button 18 without discarding any tiles, the game ends.
(3) If a winning combination of tiles is not displayed when the hand patterns are acquired and the player then presses the end game button 26 without discarding any tiles, the game ends.
(4) In a game that is started without the condition sequence device in operation (normal game state), when a combination of symbols (BB role) that will activate the condition sequence device when the hand tile symbols are acquired is displayed, the game will end (automatic end), except when the combination of symbols includes the hand tile symbols acquired by the role.
(5) In a game that is started with the condition sequence device in operation (for example, BB2), if a combination of symbols that will cause a new condition sequence device to operate (a combination of symbols that will result in BB3) is displayed when the hand tile symbols are acquired, the game will end (automatic end), except when the combination of symbols includes the hand tile symbols acquired by the role object.
(6) If a winning combination of symbols is not displayed when the hand symbols are acquired and it is impossible to display a winning combination of symbols even after using all remaining balls, the game will end (automatically end).
(7) If a winning combination of symbols (e.g., "1-1-1") is displayed when the hand patterns are acquired, and it is impossible to display a winning combination of symbols different from the winning combination (e.g., "7-7-7") even if all remaining balls are used, the game will end (automatically end).
(8) With the condition continuation device in operation, when the hand patterns are acquired, the winning combination of patterns ("7, A, A") is displayed and it is determined that the maximum payout (30 tiles) will be made, the game will end (automatically end), but it does not have to end automatically.
(9) When the hand patterns are acquired, a winning combination of patterns is displayed. If the player then presses the end game button 26 without discarding any tiles, the game ends.

The image displayed on the first performance display device 16 may be displayed on the second performance display device 10, and the image displayed on the second performance display device 10 may be displayed on the first performance display device 16. In other words, the image described above may be displayed on either the first performance display device 16 or the second performance display device 10. Also, the first performance display device 16 and the second performance display device 10 may be used as a display device, display means, or notification means without distinguishing between them. Also, while the lamp is exemplified as being in a lighting state 1 (lit) and a lighting state 2 (off), examples are also included in which lighting state 1 and lighting state 2 are distinguished by differences in color, blinking pattern, etc.

<<Second embodiment>>
Here, an example of a configuration that can be further applied to the above-mentioned embodiment will be described in detail below as a second embodiment. Note that the example of the performance described below can be appropriately combined with the configuration in the first embodiment.

The mahjong ball game machine according to the second embodiment is a mahjong ball game machine that uses a total of 14 types of tiles (figures) including "A1 (blank A1)", "A2 (blank A2)", "B1 (blank B1)", "B2 (blank B2)", "C1 (blank C15)", "C2 (blank C2)", "K (key 1)", "Q (key 2)", "7 (diamond 1)", "Y (diamond 2)", "E (watermelon)", "F (cherry)", "G (bell)", and "H (cylinder)" to play the game (aiming for the combination of these tiles to be the BNS activation role described later or the winning role, which is the predetermined winning role shown in FIG. 57). In other words, unlike a general mahjong ball game machine, it is configured to be able to play the game using tiles of a type different from mahjong tiles, but this is not limited to this, and the technology can be applied to a general mahjong ball game machine. In addition, there is no problem in increasing or decreasing the types of tiles.

The configuration of the cabinet of the Mahjong ball game machine according to the second embodiment is the same as that of the first embodiment. The configuration of the game board 2 will be described with reference to FIG. 43. In the center of the game area surrounded by the guide rail 9, the second performance display device 10 consisting of a liquid crystal display device is arranged, on the right side of the second performance display device 10, a special ball entrance 11 (also called a role object), and directly above the special ball entrance 11, a score increase device 1 operation gate 14 (also called a gate 14) through which the game ball can pass is arranged. Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 43, on the lower side of the game area of the game board 2, multiple (25 in this example) pattern ball entrance ports 13 (13-1, 13-2, ..., 13-25) are arranged in the horizontal direction. In addition, on the left side of the game area of the game board 2, a score increase device 1 operation gate 22 (also called a gate 22) and a pattern ball entrance port 13-26 are arranged. In this example, a total of 26 pattern ball entrance ports 13 are arranged in the game area.

Each symbol entrance (symbol entrance 13-1, 13-2, ...) displays a tile symbol. In detail, as shown in FIG. 43, the symbol entrances 13-1, 13-2, ... 13-25 located on the lower side of the play area are assigned, from the left as seen by the player, "A1", "B1", "B2", "Q", "K", "Q", "B1", "B2", "B1", "C1", "C2", "Y", "7", "Y", "C2", "C1", "B1", "E", "F", "G", "H", "G", "F", "E", and "A2", in that order. The symbol entrance 13-26 located on the left side of the play area is assigned "K".

As shown in FIG. 43, the pattern arrangement (the arrangement of the pattern entry holes) is configured to be asymmetrical. In detail, K (scoring probability 55%) and Q (scoring probability 40%) are arranged in the left hitting area, and are the pattern entry holes to be aimed at when BNS operating roles 15 to 18 are selected. On the other hand, H (scoring probability 24.2%), G (scoring probability 46%), F (scoring probability 23.4%), and E (scoring probability 6.4%) are arranged in the right hitting area, and are the pattern entry holes to be aimed at when BNS operating roles 01 to 14 are selected. In addition, 7 (scoring probability 3%) and Y (scoring probability 17%) are arranged in the center hitting area, and are the pattern entry holes to be aimed at when BNS operating roles 19 to 22 are selected. By making the pattern arrangement (the arrangement of the pattern entry holes) asymmetrical in this way, the game can be executed in the launch direction according to the type of BNS operating role determined, and the interest of the game can be improved. In addition, the order of the pattern entrances 13 (13-1, 13-2, ..., 13-26) is merely an example and can be changed without any problem, and the number of pattern entrances is also merely an example and can be increased or decreased without any problem.

A special ball entry gate 12 (also called gate 12) is arranged above the play area of the play board 2. Note that a windmill 15 may be arranged as in the first embodiment. Also, a center ornament 16 is arranged in the center of the play area, as shown in FIG. 1 of the first embodiment, although not shown. Furthermore, a main display device 36 consisting of a 7-segment display area and a dot display area is provided in the lower part of the play board 2. Note that in the second embodiment, as shown in FIG. 43, the play area is described as being divided into three, with the left play area being the left hitting area, the middle play area being the center hitting area, and the right play area being the right hitting area, but the play area may be divided into two, in which case there are two, a left hitting area and a right hitting area, and the center hitting area is an area included in the left hitting area.

The 7-segment display area of the main display device 36 is composed of 11 7-segment displays, not shown, including a number of stored coins display, a number of dispensed coins display, information display 1, information display 2, information display 3, status display 1, status display 2, status display 3, and status display 4 to 6.

The stored medal count indicator is an indicator that displays the number of medals stored in the storage device, for example, displaying 00 or 50. It also displays an error code (for example, 88) in the event of an unrecoverable error.

The payout number display shows the number of medals (01, 30, etc.) according to the number won at the end of play when a winning combination of symbols is displayed. It also displays 00 from the time medals are inserted until the end of play. It also displays an error code (e.g., E0-E7, F0-F7, etc.) when a recoverable error occurs, and an error code (e.g., 88) when an unrecoverable error occurs.

The information display 1 displays the number of game balls that have entered the ball entry ports, including the special ball entry port, during play. When the game start button is pressed, it displays 0. Furthermore, when an unrecoverable error occurs, it displays an error code (e.g., 88).

The information display 2 displays the number of consecutive operations of the release condition device while the condition consecutive device is in operation (for example, 1 to E as the number of rounds). The number also includes the operation of the release condition device of the operating game, and if a new BB is activated while a BB is in operation, the display returns to 1. When the condition consecutive device is not in operation, 0 is displayed. Also, an error code (for example, 8) is displayed when an unrecoverable error occurs.

The information display 3 displays the number of balls remaining to be entered through the special entry port (e.g., 0 to 5) while the open condition device is in operation. When the condition continuity device is not in operation, it displays 0. It also displays an error code (e.g., 8) when an unrecoverable error occurs.

The status indicator 1 is an indicator that displays the number of bets, and is always lit up according to the number of medals stored in the storage device. If the number of medals is less than 3, the indicator is off, and if the number is 3 or more, the indicator is lit.

The status indicator 2 is an indicator that displays the number of bets, and is always lit up according to the number of medals stored in the storage device. If the number of medals is less than 2, the indicator is off, and if the number is 2 or more, the indicator is lit.

The status indicator 3 is an indicator that displays the number of bets, and is always lit up according to the number of medals stored in the storage device. When the number of medals is 0, it is off, and when the number is 1 or more, it is lit.

The status indicators 4 to 6 are all lit during play and off at other times. When they change from off to on, it indicates that play has started, and when they change from on to off, it indicates the time when the next coin can be inserted or play can start.

The dot display area of the main display device 36 is composed of 15 dot displays: Te-hai area 1, Te-hai area 2, Te-hai area 3, reel area 1, reel area 2, reel area 3, operating pattern area, increase area 1, increase area 2, increase area 3, operation type area, reel acquisition area 1, reel acquisition area 2, reel acquisition area 3, and release condition device maximum continuous operation count display area.

Tehai area 1 displays the leftmost Tehai pattern (left Tehai). Tehai area 2 displays the second Tehai pattern from the left (middle Tehai). Tehai area 3 displays the third Tehai pattern from the left (right Tehai). Tehai areas 1 to 3 are collectively referred to as the Tehai areas.

The reel area 1 displays the pattern that is being selected by the reel (special ball entrance 11) and is displayed on the far left. The reel area 2 displays the pattern that is being selected by the reel and is displayed second from the far left. The reel area 3 displays the pattern that is being selected by the reel and is displayed third from the far left. The pattern that is being selected by the reel is configured to be displayed in the tehai area as the pattern displayed by the activation of the reel by operating the discard tile button 19, left selection button 27, right selection button 28, and decision button 29.

The operating pattern area displays a pattern corresponding to the operating pattern number (see pattern No. in Figure 49) determined by lottery at the start of play. Increase area 1 displays the operable state of score increase device 1. Increase area 2 displays the operable state of score increase device 2. Increase area 3 displays the operable state of score increase device 3. The operation type area uses three LEDs to display the type of condition successive device (BB1 to BB71) that is in operation.

The reel acquisition area 1 displays that the pattern displayed in the te-hai area 1 is a pattern displayed by the operation of the reel (special ball entrance 11). The reel acquisition area 2 displays that the pattern displayed in the te-hai area 2 is a pattern displayed by the operation of the reel. The reel acquisition area 3 displays that the pattern displayed in the te-hai area 3 is a pattern displayed by the operation of the reel. The opening condition device maximum continuous operation count display area displays the opening condition device maximum continuous operation count (number of rounds) of the condition continuous device currently in operation.

LEDs that emit light in various colors are used as light sources in lamp-equipped decorative devices that correspond to lamp device 8 (see Figure 1).

As shown in FIG. 44, the operation panel 3 and its vicinity are provided with a first performance display device 16 consisting of a liquid crystal display or the like, a medal insertion slot 17, and various operation buttons (button switches). These various operation buttons are composed of a BET button 18, a left button 19a, a middle button 19b, and a right button 19c for operating the discarded tiles, a medal payout button 25 that can be operated to pay out medals stored in the credits, a game end button 26 (also called the end button 26), a left selection button 27, a right selection button 28, a decision button 29, a sub input button SB, a cross button SB-2, and the like. The left button 19a, the middle button 19b, and the right button 19c are also called the discarded tile button 19. In the mahjong ball game machine according to the second embodiment, the BET button 18 and the win button (a button that can be operated when a winning hand is established) are configured as a common button (BET button 18), but may be configured as separate buttons.

When the BET button 18 is pressed during game standby while the display of the stored medal number indicator is 3 or more, the display is subtracted by 3 and the game is started. Note that the game is also started if the BET button 18 is pressed when three medals have been inserted.

The function of subtracting three reserved coins and starting a game is configured to disable operation of the BET button 18 if the wait process described in the first embodiment has not been completed. For example, the function of automatically starting the next game when the BET button 18 is operated while BB is activated as a winning operation is disabled if the wait process has not been completed. Note that the function may be configured to automatically start a game when the wait process is completed, or may be configured to not automatically start a game but to start when the BET button 18 is operated again.

The left button 19a is a button for operating the discarded tile of the leftmost Tehai pattern (left Tehai) in the Tehai area 1, and is the same as in the first embodiment, so a description will be omitted.

The middle button 19b is a button for operating the discarded tile of the second Tehai pattern from the left in the Tehai area 2 (middle Tehai), and is the same as in the first embodiment, so a description will be omitted.

The right button 19c is a button for operating the discarded tile of the third Tehai pattern from the left in the Tehai area 3 (right Tehai), and is the same as in the first embodiment, so a description will be omitted.

The medal payout button 25, when pressed during game standby, pays out and settles the medals corresponding to the CRE counter value and the bet counter value.

The game end button 26 is a button that ends the game when pressed during play when there are three Te-hai symbols and a winning symbol combination is not displayed. On the other hand, if there are three Te-hai symbols and a winning symbol combination is displayed during play, the game is not ended. In other words, when there are three Te-hai symbols and a winning symbol combination is displayed, the game end button 26 is controlled to be disabled.

The left selection button 27 is a button for selecting the displayed pattern of the "pattern being selected by the reel" that is displayed multiple times when the reel is in operation, and is the same as in the first embodiment, so a description thereof will be omitted.

The right selection button 28 is a button for selecting the displayed pattern of the "pattern being selected by the reel" that is displayed multiple times when the reel is in operation, and is the same as in the first embodiment, so a description is omitted.

The decision button 29 is a button that, when the reel is in operation, acquires (displays) the selected "pattern being selected by the reel" as the pattern displayed by the operation of the reel, and is the same as in the first embodiment, so a description thereof will be omitted.

The sub-input button SB is an operating member that is electrically connected to the sub-substrate 3000, and when operated (pressed) causes a performance based on that operation to be executed. As it is the same as in the first embodiment, a description thereof will be omitted.

The cross button SB-2 is an operating member electrically connected to the sub-board 3000, and by operating (pressing) the cross key, a performance based on that operation is selected. As it is the same as in the first embodiment, a description thereof will be omitted.

When a player operates the various buttons mentioned above (pressing them to turn on the switch contacts), for example pressing the middle button 19b, a discard tile signal is generated, and this signal is input to a control board consisting of a microcomputer. Then, software (hereafter referred to as a program) installed in the ROM of the control board analyzes the input signal and executes processing corresponding to this analyzed input signal, thereby progressing the game.

The first effect display device 16 and the second effect display device 10 are used to display necessary information and effect images to the player as the game progresses. Here, these effect display devices are not managed by the main control board 1000, which is directly related to the prize ball payout decision, but by the sub-board 3000, to which game information from the main control board 1000 is transmitted in a unidirectional manner. The main control board 1000 and the sub-board 3000 are control boards equipped with separate CPUs. Alternatively, the sub-board 3000 may be a sub-main board, and the effect display device may also be a sub-sub board equipped with a CPU, and the sub-sub board may be configured to execute display control of the effects on the effect display device side based on commands from the sub-main board.

As shown in FIG. 44, the first performance display device 16 mainly displays the hand tile area 16, which is a display area for the hand tile patterns that make up the player's hand, including the left hand tile area 16-1, middle hand tile area 16-2, and right hand tile area 16-3, the credit area 16-4 which is a display area showing the current number of medals the player has stored in the mahjong ball game machine, the round display area 16-5 which is a display area showing continuing rounds during a BB, the total number of medals won area 16-6 which is a display area showing the number of medals won in a series of BBs, the firing intensity display area 16-7 which is a display area showing the firing intensity as a number, the level meter display area 16-8 which is a display area showing the firing intensity with a level meter image, and the recommended firing intensity display area 16-9 which is a display area showing (suggesting) the recommended firing intensity for the current playing state, and outputs information that is essential for progressing through the game to the player in an easy-to-understand manner. Although not shown, the first effect display device 16 displays the number of game balls remaining during one game. The round display area 16-5 may also display the number of remaining rounds in the current BB.

The left hand tile area 16-1 displays the hand tile pattern corresponding to the left tehai in tehai area 1, the middle hand tile area 16-2 displays the hand tile pattern corresponding to the middle tehai in tehai area 2, the right hand tile area 16-3 displays the hand tile pattern corresponding to the right tehai in tehai area 3, the credit area 16-4 displays a value corresponding to the number of stored coins indicator, and the round display area 16-5 displays a value corresponding to the information display 2. The total number of coins acquired area 16-6 may display a value corresponding to the number of coins paid out indicator during non-BBs, and during BBs, it may alternate between displaying the number of medals acquired in a series of BBs and the value corresponding to the number of coins paid out indicator.

In the following explanation, when it is stated that hand tile patterns are displayed in the left-hand tile area 16-1, it can be interpreted as the left tehai (left tehai pattern) being displayed in the tehai area 1, and vice versa. The same is true for the middle-hand tile area 16-2 and tehai area 2, and the right-hand tile area 16-3 and tehai area 3. For the sake of explanation, when it is stated that hand tile patterns are displayed in the left-hand tile area 16-1, it is assumed that the left tehai is also displayed in the tehai area 1, and the same is true for the middle-hand tile area 16-2 and tehai area 2, and the right-hand tile area 16-3 and tehai area 3.

The second effect display device 10 is primarily used as a means of displaying effects and other information during gameplay, and outputs information to enhance the entertainment value of the game, such as effects and other information during gameplay.

Next, various functions of the Mahjong ball game machine according to the second embodiment will be described with reference to the block diagram of FIG. 45. First, the main control board 1000 is connected to various peripheral devices, including a sub-board 3000 related to the performance display, a medal payout device 4000 that pays out medals based on payout instructions from the main control board 1000, and the main display device 36, so that information can be transmitted between them. Game-related information from the main control board 1000 is transmitted unidirectionally to the sub-board 3000. Performance commands from the sub-board 3000 are transmitted to the first performance display device 16 and the second performance display device 10 (this may be either unidirectional or bidirectional). The sub-input button SB, the cross button SB-2, etc. are also connected to the sub-board 3000.

Here, the main control board 1000 includes a communication control means 1100 for receiving signals input from various sensors and transmitting various information and signals to various peripheral devices (e.g., the sub-board 3000), a medal management means 1200 for managing the number of medal credits and the number of medal bets as the game progresses and for processing the payout, a game start determination means 1300 for determining whether or not the game start conditions are met, and a bonus pattern (also called a BB pattern) for determining the combination of the BB role related to the current game using random numbers generated by a random number generation means. It has a BB pattern determination means 1600, a game control means 1900 that controls all aspects of the game, a game status temporary storage means 2100 that temporarily stores the current game status, etc., a payout control means 2200 that controls the medal payout device 4000 to pay out a predetermined number of medals, a game-related information storage means 2300 for storing information related to the game (image data, audio data, etc.), and an information transmission control means 2500 for transmitting information related to the game status, such as the bonus pattern related to the current game and the execution timing of the effects, to the sub-board 3000. Each means will be described in detail below.

First, the communication control means 1100 has an input signal receiving means 1101 that receives operation signals from the BET button 18, left button 19a, middle button 19b, right button 19c, medal payout button 25, end button 26, left selection button 27, right selection button 28, decision button 29, launch button 44, etc., input signals from the ball entry detection sensor of the special ball entry port 11, the ball entry detection sensors of the pattern ball entry ports 13-1, 13-2, etc., and the ball entry detection sensor of the special ball entry port operation gate 12, and an information transmitting means 1102 that transmits information and signals to various peripheral devices (e.g., the sub-board 3000). When the BET button and the win button are provided separately, the communication control means 1100 is configured to receive input signals from the win button 24.

Next, the medal management means 1200 has a medal information temporary storage means 1201 that temporarily stores the number of medal credits and the number of medal bets.

The BB pattern determination means 1600 has a BB pattern determination/content determination table 1601 that is referenced when determining the bonus pattern for the current game.

Next, the game control means 1900 includes discard tile control means 1901 which controls the discard tile process, hand-drawn tile control means 1902 which controls the hand-drawn tile process, hand determination means 1903 which determines whether the hand tile data completes a winning combination, payout number calculation means 1904 which calculates the number of medals acquired for the winning combination when it is determined that the winning combination is completed, game end control means 1905 which controls the game end process, and special game control means 1906 which controls the BB process.

Here, the self-drawn tile control means 1902 has a self-drawn game ball supply control means 1902a that controls the supply of one game ball to the launching device when the conditions for executing a self-drawn tile are met. The self-drawn tile control means 1902 also has a remaining ball counter 1902b that counts the remaining number of game balls that can be used in the game.

The payout number calculation means 1904 also has a winning medal number table 1904a for each winning role that is referenced when calculating the number of medals won by a winning role.

The special game control means 1906 also has a special game game counter 1906a that counts the number of remaining games (remaining number of rounds) of the BB in the event that the game is overrun and not ended.

Next, the game status temporary storage means 2100 has temporary flag storage means 2101 which temporarily stores on/off information of various flags, temporary game ball number storage means 2102 which temporarily stores the number of remaining game balls in the game, temporary tile information storage means 2103 which temporarily stores tile information in the game, temporary BB pattern storage means 2106 which temporarily stores the BB role in the game, temporary winning information storage means 2110 which temporarily stores winning information in the game (winning role, number of medals won), and temporary special game related information storage means 2111 which temporarily stores information related to special games in the game (for example, the number of remaining games of BB). Here, the temporary tile information storage means 2103 has a temporary hand information storage means 2103a that temporarily stores hand information for the game, and a temporary discarded tile information storage means 2103b that temporarily stores discarded tile information for the game. The temporary winning information storage means 2110 has a temporary winning combination storage means 2110a that temporarily stores the winning combination for the game, and a temporary number of medals acquired storage means 2110b that temporarily stores the number of medals acquired calculated by the payout number calculation means 1904.

Next, the sub-substrate 3000 has a display control means 3100 that executes control to display various effects, and an information transmission/reception control means 3200 that receives various information and signals from the main control substrate 1000. Each means will be described in detail below.

The display control means 3100 includes a self-drawn tile display control means 3120 that controls the display related to self-drawn tile that increases the number of tiles in the hand corresponding to the ball entrance when a game ball enters one of the pattern entrances 13 or when a game ball enters the special entrance 11, a discarded tile display control means 3130 that controls the display when a tile is discarded from the hand, a notice effect display control means 3140 that controls the display of effects related to the interest of the game such as stage change effects and chance notices, a navigation effect display control means 3150 that controls the display of navigation effects, which are effects for supporting the interest of the game and the progress of the game, and a display-related information temporary storage means 3160 that stores information related to various displays such as effects.

Although not shown in the figure, the payout control means 2200 is provided with a control circuit section (launch control means) of the launch device, and is also connected to the payout control means 2200 and the launch device (launch handle 4, launch motor, ball feed device, etc.).

In the second embodiment, the game balls can be launched continuously depending on the game state. For example, in the normal game state (normal game state), three game balls can be launched continuously, and three game balls are loaded into a ball alignment passage provided upstream of a ball feed device that supplies game balls to the launching device, and when the previous game ball is launched, the ball feed device is operated to supply the next game ball to the launching device. Note that, depending on the game state, the game balls cannot be launched continuously, and in that case, one game ball is loaded into a ball alignment passage provided upstream of a ball feed device that supplies game balls to the launching device, and when the previous game ball is launched and the game ball enters the pattern ball entrance 13, etc., the ball feed device is operated to supply the next game ball to the launching device. Note that the configuration of the launching device and the launching handle 4 are the same as those of the first embodiment, so the description will be omitted.

Next, the processing flow of the Mahjong ball gaming machine 1 according to the second embodiment will be described with reference to a flowchart etc. The processing flow on the main control board side of the Mahjong ball gaming machine 1 according to the second embodiment is similar to that of FIG. 5 of the first embodiment, and therefore will not be described. The medal management processing according to the second embodiment is also similar to the medal management processing S3100 of the first embodiment (see FIG. 7), and therefore will not be described. Furthermore, the wait processing related to the subroutine of step 3180 in the medal management processing S3100 is also similar to that of the first embodiment (see FIG. 8), and therefore will not be described. Furthermore, examples 1 and 2 of the wait processing are also similar to that of the first embodiment (see FIG. 9), and therefore will not be described.

Next, the remaining ball count setting process of the second embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 46. FIG. 46 is a flowchart of the remaining ball count setting process S3200 according to the second embodiment.

First, in step 3202, the game start determination means 1300 refers to the flag temporary storage means 2101 to determine whether or not the special game flag is on. The special game flag is a flag that is turned on by the role determination means 1903 in step 3704.

If the answer is Yes in step 3202, in step 3206-2, the game start determination means 1300 determines whether or not it is a chance round for a special game. If the answer is Yes in step 3206-2, in step 3208, the game start determination means 1300 sets n _S (the number of balls corresponding to the type of special game) as the information of the number of remaining balls n in the game ball number temporary storage means 2102, and ends this process. Note that a chance round is a round in which the number of remaining balls is more than three. Also, the chance round is a round in which the BB can be overwritten (promotion of the BB). Note that, for rounds in which a game is played with the same number of remaining balls (three balls) as the hand tile patterns (three patterns), the BB is not overwritten, but the BB may be configured to be overwritten. In other words, a round in which the number of remaining balls is three or less may be a chance round.

In detail, the game start determination means 1300 sets the counter value n of the remaining ball counter 1902b to n S (e.g., 4 to 19) as information on the remaining ball number _n by referring to the remaining ball number table 1 during special play (FIG. 47) or the remaining ball number table 2 during special play (FIG. 48). Note that the remaining ball number table 1 during special play and the remaining ball number table 2 during special play may not be configured separately, but may be configured to be one remaining ball number table during special play.

On the other hand, if the answer is No in step 3206-2, in step 3210, the game start determination means 1300 sets n _T (the number of balls during a special game other than the chance round) as information on the remaining number of balls n in the temporary game ball number storage means 2102, and ends this process.

In detail, the game start determination means 1300 sets the counter value n of the remaining ball counter 1902b to nT (e.g., 3) as information on the remaining ball number _n by referring to the remaining ball number table 1 for special games (FIG. 47) or the remaining ball number table 2 for special games (FIG. 48). Note that, since the remaining balls are 3 except for the chance round, 3 balls may be set without referring to the table.

If the answer is No in step 3202, in step 3212, the game start determination means 1300 sets n _U (the number of balls during normal play: “4” in this example) as the information on the number of remaining balls n in the game ball number temporary storage means 2102, and ends this process. In detail, the value of the number of remaining balls n is set to the counter value n of the remaining ball counter 1902b.

Next, the bonus role determination process according to the second embodiment will be described. The bonus role determination process according to the second embodiment is similar to the bonus role determination process S3250 according to the first embodiment, so a description thereof will be omitted.

Next, the BB pattern determination and content determination table according to the second embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 49. FIG. 49 is an example of the BB pattern determination and content determination table 1601 according to the second embodiment, and is a diagram showing a bonus pattern determination table. As shown in the figure, in the second embodiment, the type of BB to be activated and the bonus pattern are determined by drawing lots from 253 patterns. Note that the drawing is not limited to 253 patterns, and may be more than this. In the second embodiment, the capacity of the memory area of the main control board 1000 is 1 byte, so the number of patterns is set within the range (maximum 256) within the capacity of the memory area of the main control board 1000.

There are 22 types of bonus patterns, from BNS activation role 01 to 22, and the combinations of the following symbols are as follows.
(1) BNS Operation Part 01: "H.H.H" (Cylinder, Cylinder, Cylinder)
(2) BNS Operator 02: "H.G.E." (Cylinder, Bell, Watermelon)
(3) BNS Operator 03: "H.G.F." (Cylinder, Bell, Cherry)
(4) BNS operator 04: "H・G・H/G" (cylinder・bell・cylinder or bell)
(5) BNS Operator 05: "H.E.F." (Cylinder, Watermelon, Cherry)
(6) BNS Operator 06: "H E H/E" (Cylinder, Watermelon, Cylinder or Watermelon)
(7) BNS actuator 07: "H F H/F" (Cylinder Cherry Cylinder or Cherry)
(8) BNS Activator 08: "GGG" (Bell Bell Bell)
(9) BNS Activator 09: "G.E.F." (Bell, Watermelon, Cherry)
(10) BNS Activator 10: "G E G/F" (Bell, Watermelon, Bell/Cherry)
(11) BNS Activator 11: "G.F.G/F" (Bell, Cherry, Bell/Cherry)
(12) BNS Operator 12: "E.E.E." (Watermelon Watermelon Watermelon)
(13) BNS Operator 13: "E F E/F" (Watermelon Cherry Watermelon/Cherry)
(14) BNS Activator 14: "F.F.F." (Cherry Cherry Cherry)
(15) BNS Operator 15: "K.K.K." (Key 1, Key 1, Key 1)
(16) BNS operator 16: "K.K.Q" (Key 1, Key 1, Key 2)
(17) BNS operator 17: "K.Q.Q" (Key 1, Key 2, Key 2)
(18) BNS operator 18: "Q Q Q" (Key 2, Key 2, Key 2)
(19) BNS operator 19: "7-7-7" (Diamond 1-Diamond 1-Diamond 1)
(20) BNS operator 20: "7-7-Y" (Diamond 1-Diamond 1-Diamond 2)
(21) BNS operator 21: "7・Y・Y" (Diamond 1・Diamond 2・Diamond 2)
(22) BNS operator 22: "Y.Y.Y." (Diamond 2, Diamond 2, Diamond 2)

In a game state other than a special game (when BB is not activated, during normal gameplay, normal gameplay state), the pattern is determined by referring to the column for when BB is not activated in the bonus pattern determination table. For example, if the acquired random number for determining a bonus role is a random number indicating pattern 1, and activated symbol number 1 is determined, the type of BB that will be activated depending on the game result will be BB9, BB4, BB3, or BB2. In detail, if the combination "7, 7, 7" corresponding to the BNS activation role 19 is completed as a bonus pattern in the game, it will be BB9, which is the type 1 of the activated BB. If the combination "7, 7, Y" corresponding to the BNS activation role 20 is completed as a bonus pattern in the game, it will be BB4, which is the type 2 of the activated BB. If the combination "7, Y, Y" corresponding to the BNS activation role 21 is completed as a bonus pattern in the game, it will be BB3, which is the type 3 of the activated BB. If the combination "Y, Y, Y" corresponding to the BNS activation role 22 is completed as a bonus pattern in the game, it will be BB3, which is the type 4 of the activated BB. Note that the pattern numbers 1 to 253 indicate the activation symbol numbers.

In addition, when the acquired bonus role determination random number is a random number indicating pattern 2, and the activation symbol number 2 is determined, the type of BB that will be activated depending on the game result will be one of BB10, BB4, BB3, or BB2. In detail, if the combination "7-7-7" corresponding to the BNS activation role 19 is completed in the game as a bonus pattern, the type of BB that will be activated will be BB10, which is pattern 1; if the combination "7-7-Y" corresponding to the BNS activation role 20 is completed in the game as a bonus pattern, the type of BB that will be activated will be BB4, which is pattern 2; if the combination "7-Y-Y" corresponding to the BNS activation role 21 is completed in the game as a bonus pattern, the type of BB that will be activated will be BB3, which is pattern 3; and if the combination "Y-Y-Y" corresponding to the BNS activation role 22 is completed in the game as a bonus pattern, the type of BB that will be activated will be BB2, which is pattern 4.

The obtained random number for determining the bonus role is a random number indicating pattern 21, and when activation symbol number 21 is determined, the type of BB that will be activated depending on the game result is only BB9, and the bonus patterns are BNS activation role 01, BNS activation role 06, and BNS activation role 12. BNS activation role 01 is a combination of three Hs, BNS activation role 06 is a combination of two Hs and one E or one H and two Es, and BNS activation role 12 is a combination of three Es.

In addition, when in the BB1 state as a special game, the pattern is determined by referring to the table of columns when BB1 is activated in the bonus pattern determination table, when in the BB2 state as a special game, the pattern is determined by referring to the table of columns when BB2 is activated in the bonus pattern determination table, and when in the BB3 state as a special game, the pattern is determined by referring to the table of columns when BB3 is activated in the bonus pattern determination table, and the same is true from the activation of BB4 to the activation of BB71.

When BB is activated, the bonus pattern is determined using the same table over multiple rounds. For example, when BB5 is activated, as shown in FIG. 47, the number of rounds is 4, so the bonus pattern is determined over three games from round 2 to round 4 by referring to the table when BB5 is activated. On the other hand, when BB is not activated, the bonus pattern is determined for only one game of the game by referring to the table when BB is not activated. The table when BB is activated is a more advantageous table than the table when BB is not activated. In this way, when BB is activated, the bonus pattern is determined using an advantageous table over a larger number of games compared to when BB is not activated. This allows the player to experience the process of gradually gaining an advantage, making the gaming machine more interesting to play.

Next, the game execution start control process of the second embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 50. FIG. 50 is a flowchart of the game execution start control process of the second embodiment, which is related to the subroutine of step 3400 in FIG. 5. First, in step 3402, the game control means 1900 sets a timer and starts measuring the elapsed time required for the game. This timer is set at the start of each game, and is the timer referenced in the wait process S3180. The timer is configured to record up to the start of the previous 20 games, and thereafter discard (overwrite) the oldest ones.

Next, in step 3404, the game control means 1900 refers to the flag area of the temporary flag storage means 2101 and determines whether the special game flag (the flag that is turned on in step 3704) is on. If the answer is No in step 3404, in step 3500, the game control means 1900 executes the non-BB game execution control process of the second embodiment described below, and ends this process.

On the other hand, if the answer is Yes in step 3404, then in step 3408-2, the game control means 1900 determines whether or not this is a chance round for special play. If the answer is No in step 3408-2, then in step 3800, the game control means 1900 executes the BB game execution control process of the second embodiment described below, and ends this process.

On the other hand, if the answer is Yes in step 3408-2, in step 3850, the game control means 1900 executes the BB game execution control process (chance round) of the second embodiment described below, and ends this process.

Next, the non-BB game execution control process of the second embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 51. FIG. 51 is a flowchart of the non-BB game execution control process, which is related to the subroutine of step 3500 in the game execution start control process. First, in step 3650, the game control means 1900 executes the self-draw control process. The self-draw control process allows three game balls to be fired consecutively. In the case of consecutive firings, it is preferable to execute the self-draw control process for each firing, rather than executing the self-draw control process for the previous firing and then executing the self-draw control process for the next firing.

Next, in step 3502, the game control means 1900 determines whether or not three game balls have been fired. This determination can be made by using the value of the fired ball counter to determine whether or not they have been fired. Note that re-fires are not counted. If the answer is No in step 3502, the process returns to step 3650, and if the answer is Yes in step 3502, the process proceeds to step 3504.

Next, in step 3504, the game control means 1900 determines whether or not the three game balls have already entered the slot. This determination can be made by detecting whether or not the balls have already entered the slot using the ball entry detection sensors in the symbol entry slot 13 and the special entry slot 11. If the answer is No in step 3504, the process returns to step 3650, and if the answer is Yes in step 3504, the process proceeds to step 3506.

Next, in step 3506, the game control means 1900 refers to the winning combination temporary storage means 2110a and determines whether or not a winning combination has been achieved with the current Tehai symbol. Note that in step 3506 of the second embodiment, it is preferable to determine whether or not a BB combination has been achieved as the winning combination.

If the answer is Yes in step 3506, then in step 3508 the game control means 1900 determines whether or not the win button (BET button 18) or the game end button 26 has been operated. If the answer is No in step 3508, that is, if it is determined that the win button (BET button 18) or the game end button 26 has been operated, then the game control means 1900 proceeds to step 3700. If the answer is Yes in step 3508, then the game control means 1900 proceeds to step 3514a.

Next, in step 3514a, the game control means 1900 determines whether any of the discard tile buttons 19, the left button 19a, the middle button 19b, or the right button 19c, has been operated. If the answer is No in step 3514a, the process returns to step 3508. On the other hand, if the answer is Yes in step 3514a, the process proceeds to step 3516.

On the other hand, if the answer is No at step 3506, then in step 3510 the game control means 1900 determines whether or not there is a possibility that a winning combination will be achieved with the remaining balls. In normal game mode, the number of balls that can be fired is four, so there is one remaining ball. Therefore, it is determined whether or not there is a possibility that a winning combination will be achieved with one remaining ball. If the answer is No at step 3510, the game control means 1900 determines that there is no possibility that a winning combination will be achieved, and executes an automatic end process to end this process. Note that in step 3510 of the second embodiment, it is preferable to determine whether or not there is a possibility that a BB combination will be achieved as a winning combination.

On the other hand, if the answer is YES at step 3510, then in step 3512 the game control means 1900 determines whether or not the game end button 26 has been operated. If the answer is NO at step 3512, the game control means 1900 determines that the game end button 26 has been operated, and ends this process. On the other hand, if the answer is YES at step 3512, the game control means 1900 determines that the game end button 26 has not been operated, and proceeds to step 3514b.

Next, in step 3514b, the game control means 1900 determines whether any of the discard tile buttons 19, the left button 19a, the middle button 19b, or the right button 19c, has been operated. If the answer is No in step 3514b, the process returns to step 3512. On the other hand, if the answer is Yes in step 3514b, the process proceeds to step 3516.

In addition, in steps 3514a and b, the game control means 1900 may control to invalidate the discard operation of the symbols constituting the BNS activation role (the symbols constituting the BNS activation roles 01 to 22) under specific conditions. The specific conditions here are when the BB is not activated and the player has two symbols constituting the BNS activation role (for example, the number 7 symbol obtained by something other than a role) as Te-hai symbols. In other words, when the BB is not activated and the player has two symbols constituting the BNS activation role, the game control means 1900 controls to invalidate the discard operation of the symbols constituting the BNS activation role. By invalidating the discard operation of the symbols constituting the BNS activation role in this way, it is possible to prevent the player from accidentally discarding the Te-hai symbol that may result in the highly profitable BB role among the winning roles, thereby preventing the player's motivation to play from decreasing. In addition, in a state in which the discard operation of the symbols that constitute the BNS activation role is invalid, the game control means 1900 controls the lamp of the discard tile button 19 that corresponds to the symbols that constitute the two BNS activation roles to be turned off. The game control means 1900 also controls the lamp of the discard tile button 19 that corresponds to the remaining Te-hai symbol to be turned on. In this way, by turning off the two buttons that correspond to Te-hai symbols that may result in a winning role and turning on the button that corresponds to the Te-hai symbol that will not result in a winning role, the player can easily understand that he or she should discard the Te-hai symbol that corresponds to the lit button, and can also suggest to the player that the BB role is completed with one more tile.

Next, in step 3516, the game control means 1900 executes the discard tile process corresponding to the discard tile button 19.

Next, in step 3518, the game control means 1900 sets a command related to the current hand information (a command to the sub-board 3000, which is sent in the control command sending process of step 2006), and in the next step 3650, executes the self-draw control process. Note that the command to be sent to the sub-board 3000 in the process of step 3518 includes information related to the hand of tiles for which the discard operation has been performed, etc.

Next, in step 3520, the game control means 1900 refers to the winning combination temporary storage means 2110a and determines whether or not a winning combination has been achieved with the current Tehai symbol. If the answer is No in step 3520, it determines that there is no possibility of a winning combination being achieved, and executes an automatic end process to end this process.

On the other hand, if step 3520 is Yes, the game control means 1900 executes steps 3700 and 3750 and terminates this process.

Next, the BB game execution control process of the second embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 52. FIG. 52 is a flowchart of the BB game execution control process of the second embodiment, which is related to the subroutine of step 3800 in the game execution start control process. First, in step 3650, the game control means 1900 executes the self-draw control process. In the BB game execution control process, the self-draw control process preferably fires three game balls in succession, but it is also possible to fire one ball at a time. When firing consecutive balls, it is preferable to execute the self-draw control process for each launch, rather than executing the self-draw control process for the previous launch and then executing the self-draw control process for the next launch.

Next, in step 3802, the game control means 1900 determines whether or not three game balls have been fired. This determination can be made by using the value of the fired ball counter to determine whether or not they have been fired. Note that re-fires are not counted. If the answer is No in step 3802, the process returns to step 3650, and if the answer is Yes in step 3802, the process proceeds to step 3804.

Next, in step 3804, the game control means 1900 determines whether or not the three game balls have already entered the slot. This determination can be made by detecting whether or not the balls have already entered the slot using the ball entry detection sensors in the symbol entry slot 13 and the special entry slot 11. If the answer is No in step 3804, the process returns to step 3650, and if the answer is Yes in step 3804, the process proceeds to step 3806.

Next, in step 3806, the game control means 1900 refers to the winning combination temporary storage means 2110a and determines whether or not a winning combination has been achieved with the current Te-hai symbol. The winning combination here is a combination with a payout of one coin for the winning combinations 01 to 28 described below.

If the answer is Yes in step 3806, the process of calculating the number of coins to be dispensed in step 3750 is executed and the process ends. On the other hand, if the answer is No in step 3806, the process of calculating the number of coins to be dispensed in step 3750 is not executed and the process ends.

Next, the game execution control process during BB (chance round) of the second embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 53. FIG. 53 is a flowchart of the game execution control process during BB (chance round) of the second embodiment, which is related to the subroutine of step 3850 in the game execution start control process. First, in step 3650, the game control means 1900 executes the self-drawn control process. In the game execution control process during BB (chance round), the self-drawn control process preferably fires three game balls in succession, but it is also possible to fire one ball at a time. When firing consecutive balls, it is preferable to execute the self-drawn control process for each launch, rather than executing the self-drawn control process for the previous launch and then the self-drawn control process for the next launch.

Next, in step 3852, the game control means 1900 determines whether or not three game balls have been fired. This determination can be made by using the value of the fired ball counter to determine whether or not they have been fired. Note that re-fires are not counted. If the answer is No in step 3852, the process returns to step 3650, and if the answer is Yes in step 3852, the process proceeds to step 3854.

Next, in step 3854, the game control means 1900 determines whether or not the three game balls have entered the slot. This determination can be made by detecting whether or not the balls have entered the slot with the ball entry detection sensors in the symbol entry slot 13 and the special entry slot 11. If the answer is No in step 3854, the process returns to step 3650, and if the answer is Yes in step 3854, the process proceeds to step 3856.

Next, in step 3856, the game control means 1900 refers to the winning combination temporary storage means 2110a and determines whether or not the BB combination is established with the current Tehai symbol. The BB combination here is a promoted BB combination, and a promoted BB combination is a BB combination that is more advantageous than the current BB combination. If the current BB combination is BB1, then BB18, BB10, BB9, BB8, BB6, or BB5 is applicable, and if the current BB combination is BB9, then BB18 or BB10 is applicable (see FIG. 49). For example, in a game during a BB (round game), if three game balls enter the symbol entry hole 13-13, three 7 symbols are formed, resulting in a BNS activation combination 19, and a win is achieved with BB9 (promoted BB combination), etc. If the answer is Yes in step 3856, in step 3858, the game control means 1900 validates the operation of the win button (BET button 18) and the game end button 26, and proceeds to step 3860.

Next, in step 3860, the game control means 1900 determines whether or not the win button (BET button 18) or the game end button 26 has been operated. If the answer is No in step 3860, that is, if it is determined that the win button (BET button 18) or the game end button 26 has been operated, the game control means 1900 proceeds to step 3720. If the answer is Yes in step 3860, the game control means 1900 proceeds to step 3864a.

Next, in step 3864a, the game control means 1900 determines whether or not the discard tile button 19, the left button 19a, the middle button 19b, or the right button 19c, has been operated. Note that in step 3864a, if the specifications of the gaming machine allow for continuous firing of game balls and there are multiple balls remaining (e.g., 2), the discard tile button 19 may be operated multiple times to discard multiple te-hai symbols. If the answer is No in step 3864a, the process returns to step 3858. On the other hand, if the answer is Yes in step 3864a, the process proceeds to step 3866.

On the other hand, if the answer is No in step 3856, in step 3862, the game control means 1900 disables the operation of the win button (BET button 18) and the game end button 26, and proceeds to step 3864b. Note that in step 3862, the game control means 1900 may execute the end button disable process of step 3880 for the game end button 26.

Next, in step 3864b, the game control means 1900 determines whether or not the discard tile button 19, the left button 19a, the middle button 19b, or the right button 19c, has been operated. Note that in step 3864b, if the specifications of the gaming machine allow for continuous firing of game balls and there are multiple balls remaining (e.g., 2), the discard tile button 19 may be operated multiple times to discard multiple te-hai symbols. If the answer is No in step 3864b, the process returns to step 3862. On the other hand, if the answer is Yes in step 3864b, the process proceeds to step 3866.

In step 3864b, for example, when there are two "7" hand tile patterns, such as "7, A2, 7", the hand tile patterns may be automatically discarded without operating the discard button. In this case, the "A2" hand tile pattern is automatically discarded. By configuring in this way, the player can concentrate only on the firing operation, so a gaming machine that allows the player to immerse himself in the game can be provided. The game control means 1900 determines whether the discard tile button 19 of the left button 19a, middle button 19b, or right button 19c has been operated. In step 3864b, if the specifications of the gaming machine are such that game balls can be fired continuously and the number of remaining balls is multiple (for example, 2), the discard button 19 may be operated multiple times to discard multiple tehai patterns. If the answer is No in step 3864b, the process returns to step 3862. On the other hand, if step 3864b is Yes, proceed to step 3866.

In addition, in steps 3864a and 3864b, the game control means 1900 controls to invalidate the discard operation of the symbols constituting the BB operating roles 01 to 22 under specific conditions. The specific conditions here are that during BB and having the symbols constituting the BB operating roles 01 to 22 as Te-hai symbols. In other words, if one or more of the symbols constituting the BB operating roles 01 to 22 are held as Te-hai symbols in any of the BB rounds among the multiple BBs, the game control means 1900 controls to invalidate the discard operation of the symbols constituting the BB operating roles 01 to 22. In this way, by invalidating the discard operation of the symbols constituting the BB operating roles 01 to 22, it is possible to prevent the player from accidentally discarding Te-hai symbols that may result in a highly profitable promoted BB role among the winning roles, thereby preventing the player's motivation to play from decreasing. Furthermore, in a state in which the discard operation of the symbols constituting the BB operating roles 01-22 is disabled, the game control means 1900 controls the lamps of the discard tile buttons 19 corresponding to the symbols constituting the BB operating roles 01-22 to be turned off. The game control means 1900 controls the lamps of the discard tile buttons 19 corresponding to the remaining Te-hai symbols to be turned on. In this way, by turning off the buttons corresponding to Te-hai symbols that may result in a winning role and turning on the buttons corresponding to Te-hai symbols that will not result in a winning role, the player can easily understand that they should discard the Te-hai symbols corresponding to the lit buttons.

Next, in step 3866, the game control means 1900 executes the discard tile process corresponding to the discard tile button 19.

Next, in step 3868, the game control means 1900 sets a command related to the current hand information (a command to the sub-board 3000, which is sent in the control command sending process of step 2006), and in the next step 3650, executes the self-draw control process. Note that the command to be sent to the sub-board 3000 in the process of step 3868 includes information related to the hand of tiles for which the discard operation has been performed, etc.

Next, in step 3870, the game control means 1900 refers to the winning combination temporary storage means 2110a and determines whether or not a BB combination has been achieved. The BB combination in this case is a promoted BB combination.

If the answer is Yes in step 3870, then in step 3872 the game control means 1900 determines whether the counter value n of the remaining ball number counter 1902b is not 0. If the answer is No in step 3872, the game control means 1900 determines that there are no remaining balls and proceeds to step 3720. On the other hand, if the answer is Yes in step 3872, that is, if there are remaining balls, then in step 3873 the game control means 1900 enables the operation of the win button (BET button 18) and the end game button 26.

Next, in step 3874, the game control means 1900 determines whether or not the win button (BET button 18) or the game end button 26 has been operated. If the answer is Yes in step 3874, the process proceeds to the BB promotion determination process (step 3720, similar to the first embodiment). On the other hand, if the answer is No in step 3874, the game control means 1900 returns the process to step 3864a.

On the other hand, if the answer is No at step 3870, then at step 3876 the game control means 1900 determines whether the counter value n of the remaining ball count counter 1902b is not 0.

If the answer is Yes in step 3876, then in step 3878, the game control means 1900 determines whether or not there is a possibility that a winning combination will be achieved with the remaining balls. If the answer is No in step 3878, then the game control means 1900 determines that there is no possibility that a winning combination will be achieved, executes the automatic end process, and ends this process. On the other hand, if the answer is Yes in step 3878, then the game control means 1900 determines that there is a possibility that a winning combination will be achieved, and proceeds to step 3880, where the game control means 1900 executes the end button invalidation process described later, and returns the process to step 3864a. Here, the process of step 3864a is as described above, but for example, in a state where there are two "7" hand tile patterns, such as "7, A2, 7", the hand tile patterns may be automatically discarded without operating the discard button. In this case, the hand tile pattern "A2" is automatically discarded. This configuration allows the player to concentrate solely on the firing operation, providing a gaming machine that allows the player to immerse himself in the game. The gaming control means 1900 determines whether the discard tile button 19, which is the left button 19a, the middle button 19b, or the right button 19c, has been operated. In step 3864a, if the gaming machine is designed to be capable of firing game balls continuously and there are multiple balls remaining (e.g., 2), the discard tile button 19 may be operated multiple times to discard multiple tehai symbols.

On the other hand, if the answer is No in step 3876, that is, if there are no remaining balls, then in step 3882, the game control means 1900 determines whether or not a winning combination with the BB role has been achieved. If the answer is Yes in step 3882, the process proceeds to step 3750. On the other hand, if the answer is No in step 3882, the game control means 1900 determines that a winning combination has not been achieved, and executes an automatic end process to end this process.

Next, the game control means 1900 executes the payout number calculation process (step 3750) described below, and ends this process.

Next, the self-drawn ball control process of the second embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 54. FIG. 54 is a flowchart of the self-drawn ball control process of the second embodiment, which is related to the subroutine of step 3650 in FIG. 51 to FIG. 53. First, in step 3652, the self-drawn ball supply control means 1902a sets one ball at the launch position of the ball launcher, and executes the launch process of step 3654, which will be described later.

Next, in step 3656, the self-drawn tile control means 1902 determines whether or not the input signal receiving means 1101 has received a special ball entry operation gate passing signal, i.e., whether or not the game ball has passed through the special ball entry operation gate 12. If the answer is Yes in step 3656, in step 3658, the self-drawn tile control means 1902 refers to the flag temporary storage means 2101 and determines whether or not the special game flag (the flag that is turned on in step 3704) is on.

If the answer is Yes in step 3658, in step 3660, the self-drawn tile control means 1902 opens the special entry port 11 for a predetermined period of time (in this example, the period until the end of the ongoing game).

Next, the ball entry processing of steps 3662 to 3668 will be described in detail. First, the processing of steps 3662 to 3664 is the ball entry processing of the pattern ball entry ports. First, in step 3662, the self-drawn tile control means 1902 determines whether the game ball has entered any of the pattern ball entry ports 13. If the answer is Yes in step 3662, in step 3664, the self-drawn tile control means 1902 temporarily stores the pattern based on the pattern ball entry port into which the ball entered (for example, if the ball entered pattern ball entry port 13-13, the "7" tehai pattern) as self-drawn tile information (the self-drawn tile information is newly assigned to the hand tile), and proceeds to step 3670-2. In step 3664, the game control means 1900 displays the temporarily stored symbol information in the touch area of the main display device 36.

Next, the ball entry processing at the special ball entry port in steps 3666 to 3668, which is executed if the answer is No at step 3662, will be described. First, at step 3666, the self-drawn tile control means 1902 determines whether or not the game ball has entered the special ball entry port 11. If the answer is No at step 3666, the process returns to step 3656 and loops until the answer is Yes at step 3662 or step 3666, that is, until the game ball enters the pattern ball entry port 13 or the special ball entry port 11. On the other hand, if the answer is Yes at step 3666, at step 3668, the self-drawn tile control means 1902 temporarily stores a specified pattern as self-drawn tile information (the self-drawn tile information is newly assigned to the hand tile), and proceeds to step 3670-2. In step 3668, the game control means 1900 displays the temporarily stored symbol information in the tehai area and the gambling area of the main display device 36.

Next, in step 3670-2, the self-drawn tile control means 1902 judges whether or not the game ball has entered the score increase device 1 operation gate 14 or the score increase device 1 operation gate 22. If the answer is Yes in step 3670-2, in step 3672, the self-drawn tile control means 1902 temporarily stores information that the game ball has entered the score increase device 1 operation gate 14 or the score increase device 1 operation gate 22 as entering ball information, and proceeds to step 3674. The entering ball information temporarily stored here includes information on which ball was fired when the ball entered, and the temporarily stored entering ball information is stored until the end of the game. For example, if the first ball fired passes through the score increase device 1 operation gate 14, this entering ball information is temporarily stored. On the other hand, if the answer is No in step 3670-2, proceeds to step 3674.

In step 3672, if the score increasing device 1 operable state is displayed in the increase area 1 of the main display device 36 and the game ends with a win, the score increasing device flag is turned on and the score increasing device flag 1 is turned on. There are two conditions for displaying the score increasing device 1 operable state in the increase area 1 of the main display device 36, and it is displayed when both (1) and (2) below are satisfied. The multiplication factor in this case is 30 times.
(1) From the second round onwards, except for games in which the number of balls fired is greater than three when a BB that is BB10 or higher and is not the highest BB (BB71) is activated, or from the second round onwards when the highest BB is activated.
(2) The game ball passes through the gate 14 or the gate 22. The display of the operable state of the score increasing device 1 ends at the same time as the end of the game.

In step 3672, if the score increasing device 2 operable state is displayed in the increase area 2 of the main display device 36 and the game ends with a win, the score increasing device flag is turned on and the score increasing device flag 2 is turned on. Note that there are two conditions for displaying the score increasing device 2 operable state in the increase area 2 of the main display device 36, and it is displayed when both (1) and (2) below are satisfied. The addition rate in this case is 15 times.
(1) When BB9 is activated, this must be from the second round onwards, excluding games in which the number of balls fired is greater than three.
(2) The game ball passes through the gate 14 or the gate 22. The display of the operable state of the score increasing device 2 ends at the same time as the game ends.

In step 3672, if the score increasing device 3 operable state is displayed in the increase area 3 of the main display device 36 and the game ends with a win, the score increasing device flag is turned on and the score increasing device flag 3 is turned on. The score increasing device 3 operable state is displayed in the increase area 3 of the main display device 36 under the following two conditions, and is displayed when both (1) and (2) below are satisfied. The multiplication factor in this case is 3 times.
(1) A game in which the number of balls fired when BB9 or higher and a BB that is not the highest BB is activated is greater than 3.
(2) The game ball passes through the gate 14 or the gate 22. The display of the operable state of the score increasing device 3 ends at the same time as the game ends.

Next, in step 3674, the self-drawn tile control means 1902 sets a command related to the hand tile information (a command to the sub-board 3000, which is sent in the control command sending process of step 2006). Note that the command to be sent to the sub-board 3000 in the process of step 3674 contains the self-drawn tile information that has been temporarily stored after executing the self-draw and the hand tile information that has already been acquired.

Next, in step 3676, the self-drawn tile control means 1902 subtracts 1 from the counter value of the remaining ball count counter 1902b, and ends this process.

Next, the winning role determination process of the second embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 55. FIG. 55 is a flowchart of the winning role determination process of the second embodiment, which is related to the subroutine of step 3700 in FIG. 51. First, in step 3702-2, the role determination means 1903 refers to the current winning role and the determined bonus pattern, and determines whether the current winning role is a BB role or not.

If the answer is Yes in step 3702-2, in step 3704, the role determination means 1903 turns on the special game flag in the temporary flag storage means 2101.

Next, in step 3706, the role determination means 1903 refers to the current winning role and the determined bonus pattern, and sets a value corresponding to the current winning role (the number of BB rounds) to the special game number counter (a decrement counter that measures the number of times BB rounds are executed). The number of rounds to be set is, for example, 2 for BB1 and 14 for BB71, as shown in the tables of Figures 47 and 48. The round in which BB was activated is the first round of BB.

Next, in step 3708, the role determination means 1903 turns on the special ball entrance operation gate enable flag in the temporary flag storage means 2101 (when this flag is turned on, a flag that opens the special ball entrance 11 when a game ball passes through the special ball entrance operation gate 12 can be turned on), and ends this process.

If the answer is No at step 3702-2, then at step 3710, the role determination means 1903 determines whether or not the winning role is other than BB.

If the answer is Yes at step 3710, then at step 3712, the role determination means 1903 temporarily stores the value of the number of medals corresponding to the winning role.

On the other hand, if the answer is No at step 3710, this process ends.

Next, the payout number calculation process of the second embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 56. FIG. 56 is a flowchart of the payout number calculation process of the second embodiment, which is related to the subroutine of step 3750 in FIG. 51 to FIG. 53. First, in step 3752, the payout number calculation means 1904 determines whether or not a special game is being played. If the answer is Yes in step 3752, in step 3756, the payout number calculation means 1904 determines whether or not the score increase device flag is on. In the following, the score increase device flag being on will be described as the score increase device being activated, and the score increase device flag being off will be described as the score increase device not being activated.

If the answer is Yes in step 3756, the payout number calculation means 1904 in step 3758-2 sets the payout value to the number of medals acquired by the winning combination multiplied by a multiplier corresponding to the type of score increase device flag that has been set, and proceeds to step 3762. For example, if the number of medals acquired by the winning combination is 1, and the score increase device flag is 1, the value of 1 multiplied by 30 is set to 30.

On the other hand, if the answer is No in steps 3752 and 3756, the payout number calculation means 1904 sets the value of the number of medals won by the winning role as the payout in step 3760, and proceeds to step 3762. In steps 3758-2 and 3760, the payout number calculation means 1904 refers to the winning medal number table 1904a for each winning role based on the winning role code temporarily stored in the winning role temporary storage means 2110a, calculates the number of medals won by the winning role, and sets the calculation result in a temporary working storage area (not shown) of the winning medal number temporary storage means 2110b.

Next, in step 3762, the payout number calculation means 1904 turns on the winning flag, and in step 3764, sets a command (a command to the sub-board 3000, which is sent in the control command sending process of step 2006) related to winning-related information (winning role, number of medals acquired, etc.), and ends this process.

Here, Fig. 57 is an example of a winning medal number table for each winning combination in the second embodiment, and the winning combination and the number of medals won will be described below. Note that the display order of the hand tile patterns is not limited to the following example.
(1) When the winning combination code is 1 (see No. 1 in FIG. 57), the winning combination is the winning combination 01, and the hand tile patterns of "A1, A1, A1" are displayed in the hand tile area. In this case, the number of medals to be won is set to 1.
(2) When the winning combination code is 2, the winning combination is the winning combination 02, and the hand tile patterns of "A1, A1, A2" are displayed in the hand tile area. In this case, the number of medals to be won is set to 1.
(3) When the winning combination code is 3, the winning combination is the winning combination 03, and the hand tile patterns of "A1, A2, A2" are displayed in the hand tile area. In this case, the number of medals to be won is set to 1.
(4) When the winning combination code is 4, the winning combination is the winning combination 04, and the hand tile patterns of "A2, A2, A2" are displayed in the hand tile area. In this case, the number of medals to be won is set to 1.
(5) When the winning combination code is 5, the winning combination is the winning combination 05, and the hand tile patterns of "A1, A1, B1/B2" are displayed in the hand tile area. In this case, the number of medals to be won is set to 1.
(6) When the winning combination code is 6, the winning combination is the winning combination 06, and the hand tile patterns of "A1, A1, C1/C2" are displayed in the hand tile area. In this case, the number of medals to be won is set to 1.
(7) When the winning combination code is 7, the winning combination is the winning combination 07, and the hand tile patterns of "A1, A1, H/G" are displayed in the hand tile area. In this case, the number of medals to be won is set to 1.
(8) When the winning combination code is 8, the winning combination is the winning combination 08, and the hand tile patterns of "A1, A1, E/F" are displayed in the hand tile area. In this case, the number of medals to be won is set to 1.
(9) When the winning combination code is 9, the winning combination is the winning combination 09, and the hand tile patterns of "A1, A1, K/Q" are displayed in the hand tile area. In this case, the number of medals to be won is set to 1.
(10) When the winning combination code is 10, the winning combination is a winning combination of 10, and the hand tile patterns of "A1, A1, 7" are displayed in the hand tile area. In this case, the number of medals to be won is set to 1.
(11) When the winning combination code is 11, the winning combination is the winning combination 11, and the hand tile patterns of "A1, A1, Y" are displayed in the hand tile area. In this case, the number of medals to be won is set to 1.
(12) When the winning combination code is 12, the winning combination is the winning combination 12, and the hand tile patterns of "A1, A2, B1/B2" are displayed in the hand tile area. In this case, the number of medals to be won is set to 1.
(13) When the winning combination code is 13, the winning combination is the winning combination 13, and the hand tile patterns of "A1, A2, C1/C2" are displayed in the hand tile area. In this case, the number of medals to be won is set to 1.
(14) When the winning combination code is 14, the winning combination is the winning combination 14, and the hand tile patterns of "A1, A2, H/G" are displayed in the hand tile area. In this case, the number of medals to be won is set to 1.
(15) When the winning combination code is 15, the winning combination is the winning combination 15, and the hand tile patterns of "A1, A2, E/F" are displayed in the hand tile area. In this case, the number of medals to be won is set to 1.
(16) When the winning combination code is 16, the winning combination is the winning combination 16, and the hand tile patterns of "A1, A2, K/Q" are displayed in the hand tile area. In this case, the number of medals to be won is set to 1.
(17) When the winning combination code is 17, the winning combination is the winning combination 17, and the hand tile patterns of "A1, A2, 7" are displayed in the hand tile area. In this case, the number of medals to be won is set to 1.
(18) When the winning combination code is 18, the winning combination is the winning combination 18, and the hand tile patterns of "A1, A2, Y" are displayed in the hand tile area. In this case, the number of medals to be won is set to 1.
(19) When the winning combination code is 19, the winning combination is the winning combination 19, and the hand tile patterns of "A2, A2, B1/B2" are displayed in the hand tile area. In this case, the number of medals to be won is set to 1.
(20) When the winning combination code is 20, the winning combination is the winning combination 20, and the hand tile patterns of "A2, A2, C1/C2" are displayed in the hand tile area. In this case, the number of medals to be won is set to 1.
(21) When the winning combination code is 21, the winning combination is the winning combination 21, and the hand tile patterns of "A2, A2, H/G" are displayed in the hand tile area. In this case, the number of medals to be won is set to 1.
(22) When the winning combination code is 22, the winning combination is the winning combination 22, and the hand tile patterns of “A2, A2, E/F” are displayed in the hand tile area. In this case, the number of medals to be won is set to 1.
(23) When the winning combination code is 23, the winning combination is the winning combination 23, and the hand tile patterns of "A2, A2, K/Q" are displayed in the hand tile area. In this case, the number of medals to be won is set to 1.
(24) When the winning combination code is 24, the winning combination is the winning combination 24, and the hand tile patterns of "A2, A2, 7" are displayed in the hand tile area. In this case, the number of medals to be won is set to 1.
(25) When the winning combination code is 25, the winning combination is the winning combination 25, and the hand tile patterns of "A2, A2, Y" are displayed in the hand tile area. In this case, the number of medals to be won is set to 1.
(26) When the winning combination code is 26, the winning combination is the winning combination 26, and the hand tile patterns of "A1/A2, K/Q/7/Y, K/Q/7/Y" are displayed in the hand tile area. In this case, the number of medals to be won is set to 1.
(27) When the winning combination code is 27, the winning combination is the winning combination 27, and the hand tile patterns of "A1/A2, A1, other than A2, A1, other than A2" are displayed in the hand tile area. However, this does not include the winning combination 19. In this case, the number of medals to be won is set to 1.
(28) When the winning combination code is 28, the winning combination is a winning combination 28, and the hand tile patterns of “A1, other than A2, A1, other than A2, A1, other than A2” are displayed in the hand tile area. In this case, the number of medals to be won is set to 1.

In this way, the number of medals to be acquired for all winning combinations is set to one. Incidentally, if the number of medals to be acquired for all winning combinations is one, there will be no difference in skill between players, so an entrance for a complete miss may be provided. Any combination of a pattern acquired from an entrance for a complete miss and another pattern will result in a miss. By configuring it in this way, the number of medals acquired can be varied depending on the skill of the player.

Next, the end button disabling process of the second embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 58. FIG. 58 is a flowchart of the end button disabling process related to the subroutine of step 3880 in FIG. 53.

First, in step 3880-2, the game control means 1900 determines whether or not the game end button 26 has been operated. If the answer is No in step 3880-2, this process ends. On the other hand, if the answer is Yes in step 3880-2, the process proceeds to step 3880-4-2.

Next, in step 3880-4-2, the game control means 1900 determines whether the current BB round is a chance round. If the answer is No in step 3880-4-2, this process ends. On the other hand, if the answer is Yes in step 3880-4-2, the process proceeds to step 3880-6.

Next, in step 3880-6, the game control means 1900 determines whether or not a new BB role (promoted BB role) can be aimed for. In detail, the game control means 1900 checks the current Tehai symbol and the remaining balls, and determines whether or not it is possible to achieve a promoted BB role using the remaining balls. If the answer is No in step 3880-6, in step 3880-8, the game control means 1900 sets a command (a command to the sub-board 3000 side, which is sent in the control command sending process of step 2006) related to an announcement performance according to the game status (indicating that a promoted BB role cannot be aimed for, indicating that a winning role may be achieved with the remaining balls, indicating a right hit, etc.), and ends this process.

In addition, when the game state is such that there is no possibility of winning and it is not possible to aim for a new BB role with the remaining balls, an announcement performance according to the game state may be executed.

On the other hand, if the answer is Yes in step 3880-6, then in step 3880-10, the game control means 1900 turns on the end button operation confirmation status flag.

Next, in step 3880-12, the game control means 1900 controls the state of the game end button 26 to be in an operation confirmation state. In this operation confirmation state, the game control means 1900 controls the operation of the game end button 26 to be disabled. By disabling the game end button 26 in this way, it is possible to prevent a decrease in the player's motivation to play thereafter due to the player accidentally ending the game when there is a possibility of achieving a promotion BB role, which is a highly profitable winning role.

In addition, when the operation of the game end button 26 is detected in the operation confirmation state in which the operation of the game end button 26 is invalid, it is preferable that the game control means 1900 sets and transmits a command (a command to the sub-substrate 3000 side, which is transmitted in the control command transmission process of step 2006) related to the announcement performance (displaying a warning message, etc.) according to the game state. Then, it is preferable that the sub-substrate 3000 that receives this command displays a warning message indicating that there is still a possibility that the promotion BB role will be established (executes a warning announcement such as "There is still a chance of promotion BB"). By configuring in this way, it is possible to prevent the player from accidentally ending the game by notifying the player that there is a possibility that the promotion BB role, which has a high profitability among the winning roles, will be established. In addition, it is possible to prevent the player from accidentally ending the game by providing the game end button 26 in a position that is difficult for the player to easily operate. Furthermore, by making the game end button 26 a button that is difficult for the player to operate (for example, a button whose operation surface is recessed further than the base surface), it is possible to prevent the player from accidentally ending the game. Furthermore, by making the game end button 26 smaller than the other buttons (preferably the smallest), it is possible to prevent the player from accidentally ending the game.

In step 3880-12, the game control means 1900 controls so that the operation of the game end button 26 is invalid, but the operation of the discard tile button 19 is valid. Then, when any te-hai symbol is discarded by operating the discard tile button 19, the game control means 1900 ends the end button confirmation state, and controls so that the operation of the game end button 26 is valid.

Next, in step 3880-14, the game control means 1900 determines whether or not a period of 5000.53 ms has elapsed since transitioning to the operation confirmation state. This period is configured to be measured using a timer. Note that the period is not limited to 5000.53 ms. If the answer is No in step 3880-14, this process is repeated until a period of 5000.53 ms has elapsed.

On the other hand, if the answer is Yes in step 3880-14, in step 3880-16, the game control means 1900 turns off the end button operation confirmation state flag to end the operation confirmation state, and in step 3880-18, controls the operation of the game end button 26 to be valid.

Next, in step 3880-20, the game control means 1900 determines whether or not the game end button 26 has been operated. If the answer is Yes in step 3880-20, the game control means 1900 determines that the game end button 26 has not been operated a second time, ends this process, and proceeds to step 3864a in FIG. 53.

On the other hand, if the answer is No at step 3880-20, the game control means 1900 determines that the game end button 26 has been operated for the second time, and ends this process and the game execution control process during BB.

In the second embodiment, the operation of the game end button 26 is enabled after the period of step 3880-14 has elapsed, but it may be left disabled instead of enabled. By leaving it disabled in this way, it is possible to reliably prevent the player from accidentally ending the game when there is a possibility of achieving a promotion BB role, which is a highly profitable winning role.

Next is the game end processing (step 3900), but this processing is the same as in the first embodiment, so a description will be omitted. Also, the sub-main processing and sub-side main routine on the sub-board 3000, the processing at the time of the NMI interrupt, and the hand tile display control processing (step 5100) are also the same as in the first embodiment, so a description will be omitted.

Next, the game flow (game state transition) of the second embodiment will be explained using Figure 59.

The main control board 1000 controls the game state at the start of play to the normal game state. The normal game state is the game state when the BB is not activated, and corresponds to, for example, the game state after the BB ends or the game state after the RAM clear process is executed (initial state).

When a winning symbol combination occurs during normal game play, the game state to which the game transitions is determined according to the type of symbol (below (a) to (e)). The main control board 1000 determines the game state based on the winning symbol combination and controls the transition.

<Game state transition to first group (first GR)>
In the normal game state, as shown by the right arrow in (a), the following game state transitions (1) to (4) are defined. BB1 to BB4 are called the first group, and any BB from BB1 to BB4 is called the first special game. The first group is also called CZ or chance zone A.

(1) In the case of a winning symbol combination that activates BB1 (for example, BNS activation role 15, etc.), BB1 is activated. Note that a game that results in a winning symbol combination for BB1 corresponds to one round of BB1, and the second round of BB1 is executed in the next game. If the BB role does not win, the game ends in the normal game mode.

(2) In the case of a winning symbol combination that activates BB2 (for example, BNS activation role 22), BB2 is activated. Note that a game that results in a winning symbol combination of BB2 corresponds to one round of BB2, and the second round of BB2 is executed in the next game. If the BB role does not win, the game ends in the normal game mode.

(3) In the case of a winning symbol combination that activates BB3 (for example, BNS activation role 21), BB3 is activated. Note that a game that results in a winning symbol combination of BB3 corresponds to one round of BB3, and the second round of BB3 is executed in the next game. If the BB role does not win, the game ends in the normal game state.

(4) In the case of a winning symbol combination that activates BB4 (for example, BNS activation role 20, etc.), BB4 is activated. Note that a game that results in a winning symbol combination of BB4 corresponds to one round of BB4, and the next game is configured to execute a second round of BB4. If the BB role does not win, the game ends in the normal game state.

<Game state transition to second group (second GR)>
In the normal game state, as shown by the right arrow in (b), the following game state transitions (5) to (8) are defined. BB5 to BB8 are called the second group, and any BB from BB5 to BB8 is called the second special game. The second group is also called CZ or chance zone B.

(5) In the case of a winning symbol combination that activates BB5 (for example, BNS activation role 22), BB5 is activated. Note that a game that results in a winning symbol combination of BB5 corresponds to one round of BB5, and the next game is configured to execute the second round of BB5. If the BB role does not win in the second to fourth round games, the game transitions to the normal game state.

(6) In the case of a winning symbol combination that activates BB6 (for example, BNS activation role 21), BB6 is activated. Note that a game that results in a winning symbol combination of BB6 corresponds to one round of BB6, and the next game is configured to execute the second round of BB6. If the BB role does not win in the second to fourth round games, the game transitions to the normal game state.

(7) In the case of a winning symbol combination that activates BB7 (for example, BNS activation role 21), BB7 is activated. Note that a game that results in a winning symbol combination of BB7 corresponds to one round of BB7, and the next game is configured to execute the second round of BB7. If the BB role does not win in the second to fourth round games, the game transitions to the normal game state.

(8) In the case of a winning symbol combination that activates BB8 (for example, BNS activation role 20), BB8 is activated. Note that a game that results in a winning symbol combination of BB8 corresponds to one round of BB8, and the next game is configured to execute the second round of BB8. If the BB role does not win in the second to fourth round games, the game transitions to the normal game state.

<Game state transition to the third group (third GR)>
In the normal game state, as shown by the right arrow in (c), the following game state transition (9) is determined. Although BB9 is called the third group, the third group may include other BBs (for example, BB10 and BB11). BB9 may also be called the third special game, regular bonus, or RB. Although the third group is only BB9 in this example, it should be noted that it is treated as a group or group.

(9) In the case of a winning symbol combination that activates BB9 (for example, BNS activation role 19, etc.), BB9 is activated. Note that a game that results in a winning symbol combination of BB9 corresponds to one round of BB9, and the next game is configured to execute the second round of BB9. If the BB role does not win in the second to fifth round games, the game will transition to the normal game state.

<Game state transition to the fourth group (fourth GR)>
In the normal game state, as shown by the right arrow in (d), the following game state transitions (10) to (12) are defined. BB10 is referred to as the fourth group, which includes BB11 and BB12. Any of BB10 to BB12 is referred to as the fourth special game. The fourth group is also referred to as the BB group.

(10) In the case of a winning symbol combination that activates BB10 (for example, BNS activation role 19, etc.), BB10 is activated. Note that a game in which a winning symbol combination results in BB10 corresponds to one round of BB10, and the next game is configured to execute the second round of BB10. If the BB role does not win in the second to fifth round games, the game transitions to the normal game state.

(11) In the case of a winning symbol combination that activates BB11 (for example, BNS activation role 1, etc.), BB11 is activated. Note that a game that results in a winning symbol combination for BB11 corresponds to one round of BB11, and the next game is configured to execute the second round of BB11. If the BB role does not win in the second to fifth round games, the game will transition to the normal game state.

(12) In the case of a winning symbol combination that activates BB12 (for example, BNS activation role 1, etc.), BB12 is activated. Note that a game that results in a winning symbol combination for BB12 corresponds to one round of BB12, and the second round of BB12 is executed in the next game. If the BB role does not win in the second to fifth round games, the game transitions to the normal game state.

<Game state transition to the 5th group (5th GR)>
BB13 to BB17 are referred to as the fifth group, and any one of BB13 to BB17 is referred to as the fifth special game. The game state transition of the fifth group will be described later. The fifth group is also referred to as the SBB group.

<Game state transition to the 6th group (6th GR)>
In the normal game state, as shown by the right arrow in (e), the following (11) game state transitions are defined. BB18 is called the sixth group, which also includes BB19 to BB22. Any of BB18 to BB22 is called the sixth special game or a special special game. The sixth group is also called the PBB group or the first PBB group.

(13) In the case of a winning symbol combination that activates BB18 (for example, BNS activation role 19, etc.), BB18 is activated. Note that a game that results in a winning symbol combination for BB18 corresponds to one round of BB18, and the next game is configured to execute the second round of BB18. If the BB role does not win in the second to seventh round games, the game transitions to the normal game state.

Next, we will explain the game state transitions in the first group. In the first group, the game state to which the game will subsequently transition is determined according to (14) to (18) below. These are the game state transitions indicated by the arrows (f1), (f2), and (g).

(14) As shown in (f1), in the case of a winning symbol combination that activates BB5 (for example, BNS activation role 22), BB5 is activated. If the BB role is not a winning symbol in the two-round game, the game transitions to the normal game state after the two-round game ends, as shown by the left arrow in (a).

(15) As shown in (f1), in the case of a winning symbol combination that activates BB6 (for example, BNS activation role 21), BB6 is activated. If the BB role does not win in the two-round game, the game transitions to the normal game state after the two-round game ends, as shown by the left arrow in (a).

(16) As shown in (f1), in the case of a winning symbol combination that activates BB7 (for example, BNS activation role 21), BB7 is activated. If BB is not awarded in the two-round game, the game transitions to the normal game state after the two-round game ends, as shown by the left arrow in (a).

(17) As shown in (f1), in the case of a winning symbol combination that activates BB8 (for example, BNS activation role 20), BB8 is activated. If the BB role does not win in the two-round game, the game will transition to the normal game state after the two-round game is completed, as shown by the left arrow in (a).

As shown in (18) (f2), in the case of a winning symbol combination that activates BB9 (for example, BNS activation role 19), BB9 is activated. If the BB role does not win in the two-round game, the game will transition to the normal game state after the two-round game is completed, as shown by the left arrow in (a).

As shown in (19)(g), in the case of a winning symbol combination that activates BB18 (for example, BNS activation symbol 15, etc.), BB18 is activated. If the BB symbol does not win in the two-round game, the game will transition to the normal game state after the two-round game is completed, as shown by the left arrow in (a).

Next, we will explain the game state transitions in the second group. In the second group, the game state to which the game will subsequently transition is determined according to (20) to (21) below. This is the game state transition indicated by the right arrows in (h) and (i).

As shown in (20) (h), in the case of a winning symbol combination that activates BB9 (for example, BNS activation role 20, etc.), BB9 is activated. If the BB role is not won in the games up to the final round, the game will transition to the normal game state after the special game ends, as shown by the left arrow in (b). The games up to the final round are the 3 games from rounds 2 to 4.

(21) As shown in (i), in the case of a winning combination of symbols that activates BB18 (for example, BNS activation role 15, etc.), BB18 is activated. If no winning is achieved in the games up to the final round, the game transitions to the normal game state after the special game ends, as shown by the left arrow in (b). The games up to the final round refer to the 3 games from rounds 2 to 4.

Next, we will explain the game state transitions in the third group. In the third group, the game state to which the game will subsequently transition is determined according to (22) to (23) below. These are the game state transitions indicated by the right arrows in (j) and (k).

(22) As shown in (j), in the case of a winning combination of symbols that activates BB10 (for example, BNS activation role 03), BB10 is activated. If the BB role does not win in the final round of the 5th game, the game will transition to the normal game state after the special game ends, as shown by the left arrow in (c).

As shown in (23) (k), in the case of a winning symbol combination that activates BB18 (for example, BNS activation role 03), BB18 is activated. If the BB role does not win in the final round, the 5th round of the game, the game will transition to the normal game state after the special game ends, as shown by the left arrow in (c).

Next, we will explain the game state transitions in the fourth group. In the fourth group, the game state to which the transition will occur is determined according to (24) to (26) below. These are the game state transitions indicated by the arrows (l), (m), (n), (o), and (p).

As shown in (24)(l), in the case of a winning combination of symbols that activates BB11 (for example, BNS activation role 01, etc.), BB11 is activated. If no winning is achieved in the final round of the 5th game, the game will transition to the normal game state after the special game ends.

As shown in (25)(m), in the case of a winning combination of symbols that activates BB18 (for example, BNS activation role 01, etc.), BB18 is activated. If no winning is achieved in the final round of the 5th game, the game will transition to the normal game state after the special game ends.

As shown in (26)(n), in the case of a winning combination of symbols that activates BB12 (for example, BNS activation role 01, etc.), BB12 is activated. If no winning is achieved in the final round of the 5th game, the game will transition to the normal game state after the special game ends.

As shown in (27)(o), in the case of a winning combination of symbols that activates BB18 (for example, BNS activation role 01, etc.), BB18 is activated. If no winning is achieved in the final round of the 5th game, the game will transition to the normal game state after the special game ends.

As shown in (28)(p), in the case of a winning combination of symbols that activates BB13 (for example, BNS activation role 01, etc.), BB13 is activated. If no winning is achieved in the final round of the 5th game, the game will transition to the normal game state after the special game ends.

Next, we will explain the game state transitions in the fifth group. In the fifth group, the game state to which the game will transition is determined according to (29) to (33) below. These are the game state transitions indicated by the arrows (q), (r), (s), (t), and (u).

As shown in (29)(q), when BB13 has a winning symbol combination that activates BB14 (for example, BNS activation symbol 01, not shown), BB14 is activated. If no winning symbol is obtained in the games up to the final round (the 5th and 6th round games), the game will transition to the normal game state after the special game ends.

As shown in (30)(r), when the winning symbol combination in BB14 is one that activates BB15 (for example, BNS activation symbol 01, not shown), BB15 is activated. If no winning symbol is obtained in the games up to the final round (the 5th and 6th round games), the game will transition to the normal game state after the special game ends.

As shown in (31)(s), when the winning symbol combination in BB15 is such that BB16 is activated (for example, BNS activation symbol 01, not shown), BB16 is activated. If no winning symbol is obtained in the games up to the final round (the games of rounds 5 and 6), the game will transition to the normal game state after the special game ends.

As shown in (32)(t), when the winning symbol combination in BB16 is one that activates BB17 (for example, BNS activation symbol 01, not shown), BB17 is activated. If no winning symbol is obtained in the games up to the final round (the games of rounds 5 and 6), the game will transition to the normal game state after the special game ends.

As shown in (33)(u), in the case of a winning symbol combination in BB17 that activates BB23 (for example, BNS activation symbol 01, not shown), BB23 is activated. If no winning symbol is obtained in the games up to the final round (the games of rounds 5 and 6), the game will transition to the normal game state after the special game ends.

Next, we will explain the game state transitions in the sixth group. In the sixth group, the game state to which the game will transition is determined according to (34) to (38) below. These are the game state transitions indicated by the arrows (v), (w), (x), (y), and (z).

As shown in (34) (v), when the winning symbol combination in BB18 activates BB19 (for example, BNS activation symbols 01-14, not shown), BB19 is activated. If no winning symbol is obtained in the seventh round of the game, which is the final round, the game will transition to the normal game state after the special game ends, as shown by the left arrow in (e).

As shown in (35) (w), in the case of a winning combination of symbols in BB19 that activates BB20 (for example, BNS activation combinations 01-14, not shown), BB20 is activated. Note that if no winning combination is achieved in the seventh round of the game, which is the final round, the game will transition to the normal game state after the special game ends.

As shown by (36) (x), in the case of a winning combination of symbols in BB20 that activates BB21 (for example, BNS activation combinations 01-14, not shown), BB21 is activated. Note that if no winning combination is achieved in the seventh round of the game, which is the final round, the game will transition to the normal game state after the special game ends.

As shown in (37) (y), in the case of a winning combination of symbols in BB21 that activates BB22 (for example, BNS activation combinations 01 to 14, not shown), BB22 is activated. Note that if no winning combination is achieved in the seventh round of the game, which is the final round, the game will transition to the normal game state after the special game ends.

As shown in (38) (z), when the winning symbol combination in BB22 is such that BB23 is activated (for example, BNS activation symbols 01-14, not shown), BB23 is activated. If no winning symbol is selected in the seventh round of the game, which is the final round, the game will transition to the normal game state after the special game ends.

Next, the game state transition from BB23 onwards will be explained. In the game state from BB23 onwards, the game state to which it will transition is determined according to (39) to (87) below. As explained below, in the game state from BB23 onwards, when a winning combination of symbols for a BB role is completed, it is configured to transition to the next BB. Note that the next BB (e.g. BB24) is a special game that is more advantageous than the previous BB (e.g. BB23).

(39) In the case of a winning combination of symbols in BB23 that activates BB24 (for example, BNS activation role 01, not shown), BB24 is activated, but if no winning combination is achieved in the games up to the final round, the game state is transitioned to the normal game state after the special game ends.

(40) In the case of a winning combination of symbols in BB24 that activates BB25 (for example, BNS activation role 01, not shown), BB25 is activated, but if no winning combination is achieved in the games up to the final round, the game state is transitioned to normal play after the special play ends.

(41) In the case of a winning combination of symbols in BB25 that activates BB26 (for example, BNS activation role 01, not shown), BB26 is activated, but if no winning combination is achieved in the games up to the final round, the game state is transitioned to the normal game state after the special game ends.

(42) In the case of a winning combination of symbols in BB26 that activates BB27 (for example, BNS activation symbol 01, not shown), BB27 is activated, but if no winning combination is achieved in the games up to the final round, the game state is transitioned to the normal game state after the special game ends.

(43) In the case of a winning combination of symbols in BB27 that activates BB28 (for example, BNS activation role 01, not shown), BB28 is activated, but if no winning combination is achieved in the games up to the final round, the game state is transitioned to the normal game state after the special game ends.

(44) In the case of a winning combination of symbols in BB28 that activates BB29 (for example, BNS activation role 01, not shown), BB29 is activated, but if no winning combination is achieved in the games up to the final round, the game state is transitioned to the normal game state after the special game ends.

(45) In the case of a winning combination of symbols in BB29 that activates BB30 (for example, BNS activation role 01, not shown), BB30 is activated, but if no winning combination is achieved in the games up to the final round, the game state is transitioned to the normal game state after the special game ends.

(46) In the case of a winning combination of symbols in BB30 that activates BB31 (for example, BNS activation symbol 01, not shown), BB31 is activated, but if no winning combination is achieved in the games up to the final round, the game state is transitioned to normal play after the special play ends.

(47) In the case of a winning combination of symbols in BB31 that activates BB32 (for example, BNS activation role 01, not shown), BB32 is activated, but if no winning combination is achieved in the games up to the final round, the game state is transitioned to the normal game state after the special game ends.

(48) In the case of a winning combination of symbols in BB32 that activates BB33 (for example, BNS activation symbol 01, not shown), BB33 is activated, but if no winning combination is achieved in the games up to the final round, the game state is transitioned to the normal game state after the special game ends.

(49) In the case of a winning combination of symbols in BB33 that activates BB34 (for example, BNS activation role 01, not shown), BB34 is activated, but if no winning combination is achieved in the games up to the final round, the game state is transitioned to the normal game state after the special game ends.

(50) In the case of a winning combination of symbols in BB34 that activates BB35 (for example, BNS activation role 01, not shown), BB35 is activated, but if no winning combination is achieved in the games up to the final round, the game state is transitioned to the normal game state after the special game ends.

(51) In the case of a winning combination of symbols in BB35 that activates BB36 (for example, BNS activation symbol 01, not shown), BB36 is activated, but if no winning combination is achieved in the games up to the final round, the game state is transitioned to the normal game state after the special game ends.

(52) In the case of a winning combination of symbols in BB36 that activates BB37 (for example, BNS activation symbol 01, not shown), BB37 is activated, but if no winning combination is achieved in the games up to the final round, the game state is transitioned to the normal game state after the special game ends.

(53) In the case of a winning combination of symbols in BB37 that activates BB38 (for example, BNS activation role 01, not shown), BB38 is activated, but if no winning combination is achieved in the games up to the final round, the game state is transitioned to the normal game state after the special game ends.

(54) In the case of a winning combination of symbols in BB38 that activates BB39 (for example, BNS activation symbol 01, not shown), BB39 is activated, but if no winning combination is achieved in the games up to the final round, the game state is transitioned to the normal game state after the special game ends.

(55) In the case of a winning combination of symbols in BB39 that activates BB40 (for example, BNS activation role 01, not shown), BB40 is activated, but if no winning combination is achieved in the games up to the final round, the game state is transitioned to the normal game state after the special game ends.

(56) In the case of a winning combination of symbols in BB40 that activates BB41 (for example, BNS activation role 01, not shown), BB41 is activated, but if no winning combination is achieved in the games up to the final round, the game state is transitioned to the normal game state after the special game ends.

(57) In the case of a winning combination of symbols in BB41 that activates BB42 (for example, BNS activation role 01, not shown), BB42 is activated, but if no winning combination is achieved in the games up to the final round, the game state is transitioned to the normal game state after the special game ends.

(58) In the case of a winning combination of symbols in BB42 that activates BB43 (for example, BNS activation role 01, not shown), BB43 is activated, but if no winning combination is achieved in the games up to the final round, the game state is transitioned to the normal game state after the special game ends.

(59) In the case of a winning combination of symbols in BB43 that activates BB44 (for example, BNS activation role 01, not shown), BB44 is activated, but if no winning combination is achieved in the games up to the final round, the game state is transitioned to the normal game state after the special game ends.

(60) In the case of a winning combination of symbols in BB44 that activates BB45 (for example, BNS activation role 01, not shown), BB45 is activated, but if no winning combination is achieved in the games up to the final round, the game state is transitioned to the normal game state after the special game ends.

(61) In the case of a winning combination of symbols in BB45 that activates BB46 (for example, BNS activation role 01, not shown), BB46 is activated, but if no winning combination is achieved in the games up to the final round, the game state is transitioned to the normal game state after the special game ends.

(62) In the case of a winning combination of symbols in BB46 that activates BB47 (for example, BNS activation symbol 01, not shown), BB47 is activated, but if no winning combination is achieved in the games up to the final round, the game state is transitioned to the normal game state after the special game ends.

(63) In the case of a winning combination of symbols in BB47 that activates BB48 (for example, BNS activation role 01, not shown), BB48 is activated, but if no winning combination is achieved in the games up to the final round, the game state is transitioned to the normal game state after the special game ends.

(64) In the case of a winning combination of symbols in BB48 that activates BB49 (for example, BNS activation symbol 01, not shown), BB49 is activated, but if no winning combination is achieved in the games up to the final round, the game state is transitioned to normal play after the special play ends.

(65) In the case of a winning combination of symbols in BB49 that activates BB50 (for example, BNS activation symbol 01, not shown), BB50 is activated, but if no winning combination is achieved in the games up to the final round, the game state is transitioned to normal play after the special play ends.

(66) In the case of a winning combination of symbols in BB50 that activates BB51 (for example, BNS activation role 01, not shown), BB51 is activated, but if no winning combination is achieved in the games up to the final round, the game state is transitioned to normal play after the special play ends.

(67) In the case of a winning combination of symbols in BB51 that activates BB52 (for example, BNS activation role 01, not shown), BB52 is activated, but if no winning combination is achieved in the games up to the final round, the game state is transitioned to the normal game state after the special game ends.

(68) In the case of a winning combination of symbols in BB52 that activates BB53 (for example, BNS activation role 01, not shown), BB53 is activated, but if no winning combination is achieved in the games up to the final round, the game state is transitioned to the normal game state after the special game ends.

(69) In the case of a winning combination of symbols in BB53 that activates BB54 (for example, BNS activation role 01, not shown), BB54 is activated, but if no winning combination is achieved in the games up to the final round, the game state is transitioned to the normal game state after the special game ends.

(70) In the case of a winning combination of symbols in BB54 that activates BB55 (for example, BNS activation role 01, not shown), BB55 is activated, but if no winning combination is achieved in the games up to the final round, the game state is transitioned to the normal game state after the special game ends.

(71) In the case of a winning combination of symbols in BB55 that activates BB56 (for example, BNS activation role 01, not shown), BB56 is activated, but if no winning combination is achieved in the games up to the final round, the game state is transitioned to the normal game state after the special game ends.

(72) In the case of a winning combination of symbols in BB56 that activates BB57 (for example, BNS activation symbol 01, not shown), BB57 is activated, but if no winning combination is achieved in the games up to the final round, the game state is transitioned to the normal game state after the special game ends.

(73) In the case of a winning combination of symbols in BB57 that activates BB58 (for example, BNS activation role 01, not shown), BB58 is activated, but if no winning combination is achieved in the games up to the final round, the game state is transitioned to the normal game state after the special game ends.

(74) In the case of a winning combination of symbols in BB58 that activates BB59 (for example, BNS activation role 01, not shown), BB59 is activated, but if no winning combination is achieved in the games up to the final round, the game state is transitioned to the normal game state after the special game ends.

(75) In the case of a winning combination of symbols in BB59 that activates BB60 (for example, BNS activation symbol 01, not shown), BB60 is activated, but if no winning combination is achieved in the games up to the final round, the game state is transitioned to the normal game state after the special game ends.

(76) In the case of a winning combination of symbols in BB60 that activates BB61 (for example, BNS activation role 01, not shown), BB61 is activated, but if no winning combination is achieved in the games up to the final round, the game state is transitioned to the normal game state after the special game ends.

(77) In the case of a winning combination of symbols in BB61 that activates BB62 (for example, BNS activation role 01, not shown), BB62 is activated, but if no winning combination is achieved in the games up to the final round, the game state is transitioned to the normal game state after the special game ends.

(78) In the case of a winning combination of symbols in BB62 that activates BB63 (for example, BNS activation role 01, not shown), BB63 is activated, but if no winning combination is achieved in the games up to the final round, the game state is transitioned to the normal game state after the special game ends.

(79) In the case of a winning combination of symbols in BB63 that activates BB64 (for example, BNS activation symbol 01, not shown), BB64 is activated, but if no winning combination is achieved in the games up to the final round, the game state is transitioned to the normal game state after the special game ends.

(80) In the case of a winning combination of symbols in BB64 that activates BB65 (for example, BNS activation symbol 01, not shown), BB65 is activated, but if no winning combination is achieved in the games up to the final round, the game state is transitioned to normal play after the special play ends.

(81) In the case of a winning combination of symbols in BB65 that activates BB66 (for example, BNS activation symbol 01, not shown), BB66 is activated, but if no winning combination is achieved in the games up to the final round, the game will transition to the normal game state after the special game ends.

(82) In the case of a winning combination of symbols in BB66 that activates BB67 (for example, BNS activation symbol 08, not shown), BB67 is activated, but if no winning combination is achieved in the games up to the final round, the game state is transitioned to the normal game state after the special game ends.

(83) In the case of a winning combination of symbols in BB67 that activates BB68 (for example, BNS activation symbol 08, not shown), BB68 is activated, but if no winning combination is achieved in the games up to the final round, the game state is transitioned to the normal game state after the special game ends.

(84) In the case of a winning combination of symbols in BB68 that activates BB69 (for example, BNS activation symbol 08, not shown), BB69 is activated, but if no winning combination is achieved in the games up to the final round, the game state is transitioned to the normal game state after the special game ends.

(85) In the case of a winning combination of symbols in BB69 that activates BB70 (for example, BNS activation symbol 08, not shown), BB70 is activated, but if no winning combination is achieved in the games up to the final round, the game state is transitioned to the normal game state after the special game ends.

(86) In the case of a winning combination of symbols in BB70 that activates BB71 (for example, BNS activation symbol 08, not shown), BB71 is activated, but if no winning combination is achieved in the games up to the final round, the game state is transitioned to the normal game state after the special game ends.

(87) In the case of a winning symbol combination in BB71 that activates BB71 (for example, BNS activation role 08, not shown), BB71 is activated, but if no winning occurs in the final 14-round game, the game transitions to the normal game state after the special game ends, as shown by the arrow (z2). Note that even if BB71 wins in the final 14-round game, the game may be set to the normal game state. In this way, by ending the series of consecutive wins when the final BB is reached, a gaming machine can be created that makes it easy for the player to see the profits that can be obtained from a series of consecutive wins (for example, X coins can be obtained in one consecutive win!).

The group BB may be referred to as follows.
(1) BB23 to BB27 are called the 7th group (7th GR, 7th group), and any BB is called the 7th special game. The games up to the final round of the 7th group are 6 to 8 rounds. The 7th group is also called the HBB group or simply HBB.
(2) BB29 to BB34 are referred to as the 8th group (8th GR, 8th group), and any BB is referred to as the 8th special game. The games up to the final round in the 8th group are rounds 7 to 9. The 8th group is also referred to as the HBB group or HBB2.
(3) BB35 to BB40 are referred to as the 9th group (9th GR, 9th group), and any BB is referred to as the 9th special game. The games up to the final round of the 9th group are rounds 8 to 10. The 9th group is also referred to as the HBB group or HBB3.
(4) BB41 to BB46 are called the 10th group (10th GR, 10th group), and any BB is called the 10th special game. The games up to the final round of the 10th group are rounds 9 to 11. The 10th group is also called the HBB group or HBB4.
(5) BB47 to BB52 are called the 11th group (11th GR, 11th group), and any BB is called the 11th special game. The games up to the final round of the 11th group are rounds 10 to 12. The 11th group is also called the HBB group or HBB5.
(6) BB53 to BB58 are called the 12th group (12th GR, 12th group), and any BB is called the 12th special game. The games up to the final round of the 12th group are the 11th to 13th round games. The 12th group is also called the HBB group or HBB6.
(7) BB59 to BB64 are called the 13th group (13th GR, 13th group), and any BB is called the 13th special game. The games up to the final round in the 13th group are rounds 12 to 14. The 13th group is also called the HBB group or HBB7.
(8) BB65 to BB71 are referred to as a 14th group (14th GR, 14th group), and any of the BBs is referred to as a 14th special game. The games up to the final round of the 14th group are the games of rounds 12 to 14. The 14th group may also be referred to as a PBB group or a second PBB group. BB71 may also be referred to as a 15th group (15th group), a 15th special game, or the last special game. The 15th group may also be referred to as a 15th GR, a PBB group, or a third PBB group.

In this way, when a BB is in operation, it is possible to activate a BB that is more advantageous than the other BB. This is called overwriting the BB. The BB can be overwritten by overwriting a BB with a larger number of possible shots, such as from BB11 to BB12, or by overwriting a BB with a larger number of rounds, such as from BB4 to BB9. In other words, it is sufficient that the BB after overwriting is in a more advantageous game state (BB) with a larger number of possible shots or a larger number of playable rounds than the game state (BB) before the overwriting. Note that overwriting a BB is sometimes described as transitioning from one BB to another BB.

In addition, although the transition from the fourth group to the fifth group is shown only as an example of transition from BB12 to BB13, it is also possible to transition from any BB in the fourth group (e.g., BB12) to any BB in the fifth group (e.g., BB17). Similarly, a transition may be made from any BB in the fifth group (e.g., BB13) to any BB in the seventh group (e.g., BB23), from any BB in the seventh group to any BB in the eighth group, from any BB in the eighth group to any BB in the ninth group, from any BB in the ninth group to any BB in the tenth group, from any BB in the tenth group to any BB in the eleventh group, from any BB in the eleventh group to any BB in the twelfth group, from any BB in the twelfth group to any BB in the thirteenth group, from any BB in the thirteenth group to any BB in the fourteenth group, or from any BB in the fourteenth group to any BB in the fifteenth group.

In addition, the number of balls that can be fired in the chance round of BB18 in the 6th group is not limited to 12, but may be 4 or more. BB18, which is a BB of 7 rounds, can be transferred from the first group, which is a group of BBs of 2 rounds, the second group, which is a group of BBs of 4 rounds, and the third group, which is a group of BBs of 5 rounds, so the minimum number of balls that can be fired in the chance round, 4 balls or more, is sufficient. If the number of balls that can be fired in BB18 is set to 4 in this way, the number of balls that can be fired in BB19 can be 5, the number of balls that can be fired in BB20 can be 6, the number of balls that can be fired in BB21 can be 7, and the number of balls that can be fired in BB22 can be 8. In addition, the 6th group may be provided between the third group and the fourth group, or between the fourth group and the fifth group. If the 6th group is provided between the third group and the fourth group, it is possible to transfer to the seventh group with the highest continuation rate of 90% without passing through the fourth group with a continuation rate of 70% and the fifth group with a continuation rate of 80%. If the sixth group is placed between the fourth and fifth groups, it is possible to move to the seventh group, which has the highest continuation rate of 90%, without passing through the fifth group, which has a continuation rate of 80%. By placing the sixth group, which is a special group in this way, it is possible to move to the group with the highest continuation rate without passing through a BB in between.

If a special game is running and the game crashes, the next game may be returned to normal game mode, or if the next game is a chance round, the chance round game may be executed.

Next, using Figures 60 and 61, we will explain the game of center hit in the normal game mode. In the normal game mode, the game is basically about shooting the game ball aiming at the center hit area. However, depending on the operating pattern number determined by lottery, there are also patterns in which you can win by aiming at the left hit area and the right hit area. Figures 60 and 61 will explain the case where the game is played aiming at the center hit area, where operating pattern number 1 is won when BB is not activated.

If the activated symbol number 1 is won when the BB is not activated, the following BNS activated roles (1) to (4) are determined as the bonus pattern. Therefore, the player shoots the game ball aiming at the center hitting area to aim at the symbol entrance hole 13-12, the symbol entrance hole 13-13, and the symbol entrance hole 13-14.
(1) BNS activation role 19. When the combination of the symbols “7-7-7” (1 diamond-1 diamond-1 diamond) is completed, BB9 is activated.
(2) BNS activation role 20. When the combination of the symbols “7-7-Y” (1 diamond-1 diamond-2 diamond) is completed, BB4 is activated.
(3) BNS activation role 21. When the combination of the symbols “7-Y-Y” (1 diamond-2 diamond-2) is completed, BB3 is activated.
(4) BNS activation role 22. When the combination of the symbols “Y・Y・Y” (2 diamonds・2 diamonds・2 diamonds) is completed, BB2 is activated.

(a) is a diagram showing, for example, the standby state of step 3101. The second performance display device 10 displays a "standby" image indicating that the game is on standby. The first performance display device 16 displays a star image in the hand tile area 16. The star image is not a hand tile pattern, but an image indicating a standby state in which no hand tile patterns are displayed in the hand tile area.

(b) is a diagram showing that after the BET button 18 for starting a game is operated, the launch handle is operated to launch the first ball, and the first launched game ball lands. The launched game ball lands in the symbol ball entrance 13-13. The second performance display device 10 displays a "Aim here" image indicating that the player should aim at the center hit area, as well as an up arrow image. In addition, the lamps of the symbol ball entrances 13-12, 13-13, and 13-14 are lit. The display of these images and the lighting of the lamps are called a center hit notification. Note that the speaker and the lamps of the frame are also configured to provide a notification with a sound and lamp pattern for center hits, so these are also included in the center hit notification. The center hit notification is displayed after the BET button 18 is operated and continues to be displayed until the three launched game balls land, and is a notification that is executed according to the type of bonus pattern corresponding to the operating symbol number. Additionally, the second performance display device 10 displays a "Stage A" image indicating that the current performance stage is Stage A, as well as a semi-transparent "+1" image. The left-hand tile area 16-1 of the first performance display device 16 displays a hand tile pattern of "7" based on a game ball entering the pattern ball entry hole 13-13. As there are no second or third balls entering, the middle-hand tile area 16-2 and right-hand tile area 16-3 remain displaying star images.

Here, the image of "+1" in a semi-transparent mode is an image that is displayed based on the ball entering the symbol entrance 13-13, and if the BNS activation role is completed when the game ends, the semi-transparent mode is changed to the normal mode of the image of "+1". When the image of "+1" is displayed, it is predicted that the number of possible launches will be +1 in the next game. The display of the semi-transparent mode suggests that the number of possible launches will increase in the next game, and the display of the normal mode means that it is confirmed that the number of possible launches will increase in the next game. In this way, since the game has a feature in which the number of possible launches in the next game can be changed depending on the type of entrance into which the launched game ball enters, it is possible to provide a gaming machine with high entertainment value. Note that the image is not limited to the "+1" image, and the image of a specified character may be displayed in a semi-transparent mode and a normal mode that is not semi-transparent. Also, the mode is not limited to the semi-transparent mode and the normal mode, and any mode that can be distinguished may be used, and only one mode may be displayed.

(c) is a diagram showing that the second game ball has entered the game ball. The released game ball has entered the symbol entry port 13-13. The second performance display device 10 and the symbol entry port continue to execute the center hit notification. The second performance display device 10 continues to display the "Stage A" image, and displays a "+2" image (two "+1" images may be displayed) instead of the semi-transparent "+1" image. The middle tile area 16-2 of the first performance display device 16 displays a "7" hand tile pattern based on the game ball having entered the symbol entry port 13-13. As there is no third ball, the right hand tile area 16-3 remains as a star image.

Here, the semi-transparent "+2" image is an image that is displayed based on the ball entering the symbol entrance 13-13 when the "+1" image is already displayed, and if the BNS activation role is completed when the game ends, the semi-transparent "+2" image is displayed in the normal mode. When the "+2" image is displayed, it predicts that the number of balls that can be fired will be +2 in the next game. The semi-transparent display suggests that the number of balls that can be fired will increase in the next game, and the normal display means that it is confirmed that the number of balls that can be fired will increase in the next game. In this way, since the game has a feature in which the number of balls that can be fired in the next game can be changed depending on the type of entrance into which the fired game ball enters, it is possible to provide a gaming machine with high entertainment value. Note that the image is not limited to "+2", and two images of a specified character may be displayed.

(d) is a diagram showing that the third game ball has entered. The released game ball has entered the symbol entry hole 13-16. The right hand tile area 16-3 of the first performance display device 16 displays the hand tile pattern of "C1" based on the game ball entering the symbol entry hole 13-16. As a result of determining whether or not a win with the BB role has been established (step 3506), since the win with the BB role is not established, one of the hand tile patterns must be discarded. Here, as a discard tile navigation effect on the first performance display device 16 side, the hand tile pattern of "C1" that is not necessary for a win with the BB role is surrounded by a dashed line, and a performance is executed to highlight the hand tile pattern to be discarded. The second performance display device 10 displays a discard tile navigation effect by the character X that recommends discarding "C1", but it may also be displayed as in the first performance display device 10. The discard navigation effect on the second display device 10 side is an effect in which character X appears and announces, "Discard 'C1'!!" The second display device 10 also continues to display the "Stage A" image and the "+2" image. Note that in (d), if the game end button 26 is operated, the game is not forcibly ended. In addition, in the state of (d) where there are three tiles in the hand, if it is determined that there is no possibility of winning with a BB role by firing one more ball (for example, in the case of "7, C1, C2", etc.), a process is configured to automatically end the game. In this case, the fourth ball cannot be fired, but since the win is with the winning role 28, the payout number calculation process is executed before the game is ended.

(e) shows the state after the discard button 19 is operated according to the discard navigation effect to discard the "C1" hand tile pattern in the right hand tile area 16-3. The second effect display device 10 executes a middle hit notification that recommends aiming for "7". For example, an image "Aim for 7!!" is displayed. Note that it is also possible to execute middle hit notifications like (b) or (c) in the same figure, or the middle hit notifications of (b) and (c) may be notifications similar to (e). By setting all notifications to (e), the middle hit notifications can be executed as mission effects (mission effects executed in one game). In addition, the second effect display device 10 continues to display the "Stage A" image and the "+2" image. The right hand tile area 16-3 of the first effect display device 16 displays a star image.

(f) is a diagram showing that the fourth game ball has entered. The released game ball is assumed to have entered the symbol entry hole 13-12. The second performance display device 10 displays a "win" image indicating that a win with the BB role has been achieved, and displays a "+2" image in the normal form (bold in the figure). Therefore, in the next game, the number of balls that can be released is increased by two to four, and six game balls can be released. If a win with the BB role is not achieved, the number of balls that can be released in the next game remains four. The right hand tile area 16-3 of the first performance display device 16 displays a "Y" hand tile pattern based on the game ball having entered the symbol entry hole 13-12. As a result of determining whether or not a win with the BB role has been achieved (step 3520), the game is ended after the winning role determination process of step 3700 and the payout number calculation process of step 3750 are performed as a win with the BB role. Even if the ball does not enter the symbol entry hole 13-12 and the like, and a win with the BB role is not achieved, there is a possibility that other winning roles have been achieved, so the game ends after executing the winning role determination process in step 3700 and the payout number calculation process in step 3750. In addition, in (f), since the symbol combination of "7-7-Y" (1 diamond-1 diamond-2 diamond) is completed, BB4 is activated and the game is considered to be one round of BB4.

In addition, when multiple types of BBs (BB9, BB4, BB3, BB2 in the order of advantageous degree) are selected as in the case of the operating symbol number 1, and the number of possible shots is less than the maximum (4) and the winning symbol combination is established, the discard operation may be controlled to be valid or invalid depending on the established symbol combination. For example, when the symbol combination "7-7-Y" of BB4, which is the second most advantageous BB, is completed on the third ball, the discard operation is valid. In other words, when "7-7-Y" is completed, the "Y" can be discarded to aim for the symbol combination "7-7-7". In this way, even when the winning combination is established, it is possible to provide a gameplay that allows the player to aim for a more advantageous BB, and even if the fourth ball does not enter the "7" symbol entry hole 13-13, since "7-7-Y" is completed by the third ball, two rounds of BB4 can be executed in the next game. In this way, you can aim for a more advantageous BB while still being guaranteed a minimum BB, making this a mahjong ball gaming machine that increases the excitement of the game.

When "7, 7, Y" is completed on the third ball, BB4 is activated by pressing the win button (BET button 18) or the game end button 26. For example, when the symbol combination "7, 7, 7" of BB9, which is the most advantageous BB, is completed on the third ball, the discard operation is invalidated. In other words, when "7, 7, 7" is completed, the symbol combination of the highest BB is completed, so it is not possible to discard any "7". When the symbol combination "7, 7, 7" of BB9, which is the most advantageous and highest BB in the operating symbol number 1, is completed on the third ball, it may be configured to automatically win. By invalidating the discard operation when the most advantageous BB is completed in this way, it is possible to provide a game that does not cause the player to lose.

The same control is also used to enable or disable the discard operation during BB play. For example, this is the case when the active symbol number 18 is determined.

Next, the continuation of the game in (f) will be explained using (g) in FIG. 61. (g) is a diagram showing the second round of the BB4 game, after the BET button 18 for starting the game is operated. In the 2R of BB4, the combination of the symbols "7-7-Y" (1 diamond-1 diamond-2 diamond), that is, the BB role including two 1 diamonds, was completed in the previous game, so 4 + 2 = 6 game balls can be launched in one game, and the second performance display device 10 displays an image saying "You can launch 6 balls." Also, BB4 is a special game, but since BB4 is a special game in which the score increase device is not activated (does not operate), and the medals that can be acquired are the same as in the normal game state, the performance controlled by the sub-substrate 3000 is not a special game performance, but a normal game state chance zone performance or a high probability state performance. In this example (g), the effect is executed as a chance zone, and the second effect display device 10 displays an image of "chance zone" indicating that it is a chance zone. When the effect is executed as a high probability state, an image such as "high probability" may be displayed. In this way, when a BB role including a diamond 1, which is a special pattern, is won, the number of possible shots can be added by the number of diamonds 1 in the next game, so that the loss of a draw when a bonus pattern including a diamond 1 with a low winning rate is won can be eliminated. In addition, the player can progress through the game with the aim of acquiring the diamond 1, which is meaningful to the game, so that the interest of the game can be improved. Furthermore, by making the effect of a certain special game (BB1 to BB8) different from the normal game state and the special game state such as the chance zone and the high probability state, a gaming machine with improved interest in the effect can be provided, and a deep game play based on the rules of the mahjong ball game machine can be provided.

(h) shows the case where the combination of "7, Y, Y" (1 diamond, 2 diamond, 2 diamond) is completed during normal gameplay, which is a continuation of (b). The second performance display device 10 displays a "win" image indicating that a win has been achieved with the BB role, and also displays a "+1" image in the normal mode. Therefore, in the next game, the number of balls that can be fired is increased by one to four, making five balls that can be fired. If a win is not achieved with the BB role, the number of balls that can be fired in the next game remains at four. The right hand tile area of the first performance display device 16 displays the hand tile patterns of "7, Y, Y". In (h), the combination of "7, Y, Y" (1 diamond, 2 diamond, 2 diamond) is completed, so BB3 is activated and the game becomes one round of BB3.

Next, the continuation of the game in (h) will be explained using (i). (i) is a diagram showing the second round of the BB3 game, after the BET button 18 for starting the game is operated. In the 2R of BB3, the combination of the symbols "7-Y-Y" (1 diamond-2 diamond-2 diamond), that is, the BB role including one diamond 1, was completed in the previous game, so 4 + 1 = 5 game balls can be launched in one game, and the second performance display device 10 displays an image saying "You can launch 5 balls." In addition, BB3 is a special game, but since BB3 is a special game in which the score increase device is not activated (does not operate), and the medals that can be acquired are the same as in the normal game state, the performance controlled by the sub-substrate 3000 is not a special game performance, but a performance in the chance zone of the normal game state or a performance in a high probability state. In this example (i), the effect is executed as a chance zone, and the second effect display device 10 displays an image of "chance zone" indicating that it is a chance zone. When the effect is executed as a high probability state, an image such as "high probability" may be displayed. In this way, when a BB role including a diamond 1, which is a special pattern, is won, the number of possible shots can be added by the number of diamonds 1 in the next game, so that the loss of a draw when a bonus pattern including a diamond 1 with a low winning rate is won can be eliminated. In addition, the player can progress through the game with the aim of acquiring a diamond 1, which is meaningful to the game, and the interest of the game can be improved. Furthermore, by making the effect of a certain special game (BB1 to BB8) different from the normal game state and the special game state such as the chance zone or the high probability state, a gaming machine with improved interest in the effect can be provided, and a deep game play based on the rules of the mahjong ball game machine can be provided.

In addition, although an example has been shown in which the number of BBs that can be fired that have been transferred is changed according to the number of 1 diamonds, this is not limited to this, and for example, the number of chance rounds for the transferred BBs may be changed, or the BB selection table (ease of pattern combinations) may be favored.

When changing the number of BB chance rounds, examples can be given such that in the case of the pattern combination of “7 Y Y” (1 diamond 2 diamond 2), the BB chance round is set to one (not limited to one), and in the case of the pattern combination of “7 7 Y” (1 diamond 1 diamond 2), the BB chance round is set to two (not limited to two).
Even in this configuration, the player can progress through the game with the aim of acquiring the diamond 1, which is meaningful to the game, and the interest of the game can be improved. Furthermore, by making the presentation of a certain special game (BB1 to BB8) different from the normal game state and the special game state, such as the chance zone or the high probability state, it is possible to provide a gaming machine with improved interest in presentation, and to provide a deep game play based on the rules of the mahjong ball game machine.

In addition, when the BB selection table (ease of symbol combination) is given priority, an example can be shown in which the BB selection table used for the symbol combination of "7-7-Y" (Diamond 1-Diamond 1-Diamond 2) is easier to use to obtain a symbol combination that results in BB (e.g., BB9) than the BB selection table used for the symbol combination of "7-Y-Y" (Diamond 1-Diamond 2-Diamond 2). Even in this configuration, the player can progress through the game with the aim of acquiring Diamond 1, which is meaningful to the game, and the interest of the game can be improved. Furthermore, by making the presentation of a certain special game (BB1 to BB8) different from the normal game state and the special game state, such as the chance zone or high probability state, a gaming machine with improved presentation interest can be provided, and a deep game play based on the rules of the mahjong ball game machine can be provided.

Next, (j) shows a case where the combination of "Y Y Y" (2 diamonds 2 diamonds 2) is completed during normal gameplay. The second performance display device 10 displays a "win" image indicating that a win with the BB role has been achieved. Note that in (j), since the diamond 1 symbol is not included, the number of balls that can be fired is not increased in the next game, and four game balls can be fired. Note that even if a win with the BB role is not achieved, the number of balls that can be fired in the next game is four. The right hand tile area of the first performance display device 16 displays the hand tile patterns of "Y Y Y". In (j), the combination of "Y Y Y" (2 diamonds 2 diamonds 2) is completed, so BB2 is activated and the game is treated as one round of BB2.

Using (k), the continuation of the game (j) will be explained. (k) is a diagram showing a two-round game of BB2, after the BET button 18 for starting the game is operated. In the second round of BB2, a BB role not including a diamond 1 is completed, so four game balls can be launched in one game. Although not shown, the second performance display device 10 may display an image saying "You can launch four balls." Also, BB2 is a special game, but since BB2 is a special game in which the score increase device is not activated (does not operate), and the medals that can be acquired are the same as in the normal game state, the performance controlled by the sub-substrate 3000 is not a special game performance, but a performance of the chance zone in the normal game state or a performance in a high probability state. In (j) of this example, the performance is executed as a chance zone, and the second performance display device 10 displays an image of "chance zone" indicating that it is a chance zone. Also, the second performance display device 10 displays an image of "chance zone entry" indicating that the chance zone has been entered. This image may be displayed in (g) or (i) in the figure. When the effect is executed as a high probability state, an image such as "High probability" or "Entering high probability state" may be displayed. In this way, even for special games that do not include the special diamond 1 symbol, the special game effect is different from the normal game state and special game state such as the chance zone and high probability state, making it possible to provide a gaming machine with improved entertainment value and a deep gameplay based on the rules of the mahjong ball gaming machine.

(l) shows the start of the next game when the symbol combination of "7-7-7" (1 diamond-1 diamond-1 diamond) is completed in a normal game state, although the final symbol combination is not shown. When the symbol combination of "7-7-7" (1 diamond-1 diamond-1 diamond) is completed, BB9 is activated, and the activated game is considered to be a 1-round game of BB9. (l) shows a 2-round game of BB9 after the BET button 18 to start the game is operated. BB9 is configured to execute a regular bonus (RB), which is a 4R BB, because the symbol combination of "7-7-7" (1 diamond-1 diamond-1 diamond) was completed in the previous game. The second performance display device 10 displays an image with "RB" indicating the type of the current BB. In addition, BB9 may be configured as a two-round special game, and in the second round of BB9, a combination of symbols of "7-7-7" (1 diamond-1 diamond-1 diamond), that is, a BB role including three 1 diamonds, was completed in the previous game, so a game may be executed in which 4 + 3 = 7 game balls can be launched in one game. The second performance display device 10 displays an image showing the number of medals paid out in RB and an image of a right-hit notification. In this way, a special game (BB9) that is more advantageous than a certain special game (BB1 to BB8) is displayed as a BB performance, and the performance of a certain special game is different from the normal game state and the special game state such as a chance zone or a high probability state, so that a gaming machine with improved performance interest can be provided, and a deep game play based on the rules of a mahjong ball gaming machine can be provided.

In this way, the Mahjong ball game machine of the second embodiment is configured to transition to a different chance zone for each symbol combination. During normal game mode, the game aims to achieve a three-symbol combination (score ball) of 7 (1 diamond) or Y (2 diamond), and in the case of a symbol combination that includes a 1 diamond, which is difficult to score, the number of balls that can be fired (held balls) in the transition destination chance zone (BB) is increased.

for example,
(1) In the case of "Y.Y.Y", the next game will be CZ (BB) with 4 balls.
(2) In the case of "7-Y-Y", the next game will be CZ (BB) with 5 balls.
(3) If the result is "7, 7, Y", the next game will be CZ (BB) with 6 balls.
It is configured so that:

Therefore, if a player wins with a BB role that includes the special diamond 1 symbol, the next game (the BB game as CZ) can be played with an additional number of shots for the diamond 1, eliminating the loss of a draw when a bonus pattern that includes a diamond 1, which has a low winning rate, is won. Also, the player can progress through the game with the aim of winning the diamond 1, which is meaningful to the game, which increases the interest of the game.

Next, using Figure 62, we will explain how to play with left-handed hitting in the normal game mode. In the normal game mode, the game is basically designed to aim for the center hitting area and shoot the game ball, but depending on the operating pattern number determined by lottery, there are also patterns in which you can win by aiming for the left hitting area. In Figure 62, we will explain the case where the game is played by aiming for the left hitting area, where operating pattern number 13 is won when BB is not activated.

If the activated symbol number 13 is selected when the BB is not activated, the following BNS activation roles (1) to (4) are determined as the bonus pattern. Therefore, the player shoots the game ball aiming at the left hitting area to aim at the symbol entrance 13-4, the symbol entrance 13-5, the symbol entrance 13-6, and the symbol entrance 13-26.
(1) BNS activation role 15. When the combination of the symbols "KKK" (Key 1, Key 1, Key 1) is completed, BB1 is activated.
(2) BNS activation role 16. When the combination of the symbols "K.K.Q" (Key 1, Key 1, Key 2) is completed, BB1 is activated.
(3) BNS Activation Role 17. When the combination of the symbols "K Q Q" (Key 1, Key 2, Key 2) is completed, BB1 is activated.
(4) BNS Activation Role 18. When the combination of the symbols “Q Q Q” (Key 2, Key 2, Key 2) is completed, BB1 is activated.

(a) is a diagram showing, for example, the waiting state of game play in step 3101. The second performance display device 10 displays a "waiting" image indicating that the game is waiting to be played. The first performance display device 16 displays an image of a star in the hand tile area 16.

(b) is a diagram showing that after the BET button 18 for starting a game is operated, the first ball is fired by operating the firing handle, and the first fired game ball lands. The fired game ball lands in the symbol ball entrance 13-26. The second performance display device 10 displays a "Aim here" image indicating that the left-hitting area is to be aimed at, as well as a left arrow image. In addition, the lamps of the symbol ball entrances 13-4, 13-5, 13-6, and 13-26 are lit. The display of these images and the lighting of the lamps are called a left-hit notification. Note that the speaker and the lamps of the frame are also configured to notify with sounds and lamp patterns for left-hitting, so these are also included in the left-hit notification. The left-hit notification is displayed after the BET button 18 is operated and continues to be displayed until the three fired balls enter the ball, and is a notification that is executed according to the type of bonus pattern corresponding to the operating symbol number. Additionally, the second performance display device 10 displays a "Stage A" image, indicating that the current performance stage is Stage A. The left-hand tile area 16-1 of the first performance display device 16 displays a hand tile pattern of "K" based on a game ball entering the pattern ball entry hole 13-26. As there are no second or third balls entering, the middle-hand tile area 16-2 and right-hand tile area 16-3 remain displaying star images.

(c) is a diagram showing that the second game ball has entered the game slot. The released game ball has entered the symbol entry slot 13-13. The second performance display device 10 and the symbol entry slot continue to execute the left hit notification. The second performance display device 10 also continues to display the "Stage A" image. The middle tile area 16-2 of the first performance display device 16 displays the hand tile pattern of "K" based on the game ball having entered the symbol entry slot 13-5. As there is no third ball entering the game slot, the right hand tile area 16-3 remains as an image of a star.

(d) is a diagram showing that the third game ball has entered. The released game ball has entered the symbol entrance 13-2. The right hand tile area 16-3 of the first performance display device 16 displays the hand tile pattern of "B1" based on the game ball entering the symbol entrance 13-2. As a result of determining whether or not a win with the BB role has been established (step 3506), since the win with the BB role is not established, one of the hand tile patterns must be discarded. Here, as a discard tile navigation effect on the first performance display device 16 side, the hand tile pattern of "B1" that is not necessary for a win with the BB role is surrounded by a dashed line, and a performance is executed to highlight the hand tile pattern to be discarded. The second performance display device 10 displays a discard tile navigation effect by the character X that recommends discarding "B1", but it may also be displayed as in the first performance display device 10. The discard navigation effect on the second effect display device 10 side is an effect in which character X appears and announces, "Discard 'B1'!!" The second effect display device 10 also continues to display the "Stage A" image. Note that in (d), if the game end button 26 is operated, the game is not forcibly ended. Also, in the state of (d) where there are three tiles in the hand, if it is determined that there is no possibility of winning with the BB role by firing one more ball (for example, in the case of "K, B1, B2", etc.), a process is configured to automatically end the game. In this case, the fourth ball cannot be fired, but since the win is with the winning role 28, the payout number calculation process is executed and then the game is ended.

(e) shows the state after the discard button 19 is operated according to the discard navigation effect to discard the "B1" hand tile pattern in the right hand tile area 16-3. The second effect display device 10 issues a left-hand hit notification that recommends aiming for the "Kagi" tile, which are K and Q. For example, an image "Aim for the Kagi!!" is displayed. Note that it is also possible to issue left-hand hit notifications like (b) or (c) in the same figure, or the left-hand hit notifications in (b) and (c) may be notifications similar to (e). By setting all notifications to (e), the left-hand hit notification can be executed as a mission effect (mission effect executed in one game). In addition, the second effect display device 10 continues to display the "Stage A" image. The right hand tile area 16-3 of the first effect display device 16 displays a star image.

(f) is a diagram showing that the fourth gaming ball has entered. The released gaming ball has entered the symbol entry port 13-26. The second performance display device 10 displays a "win" image indicating that a win with a BB role has been achieved. The right hand tile area 16-3 of the first performance display device 16 displays a hand tile pattern of "K" based on the gaming ball entering the symbol entry port 13-26. As a result of determining whether or not a win with a BB role has been achieved (step 3520), a win role determination process is performed in step 3700 as a win with a BB role, and a payout number calculation process is performed in step 3750, and then the game ends. Even if the ball does not enter the symbol entry hole 13-26 etc. and a win with the BB role is not achieved, there is a possibility that other winning roles have been achieved, so the game ends after executing the winning role determination process in step 3700 and the payout number calculation process in step 3750. In addition, in (f), if the symbol combination of "KKK" (Key 1 Key 1 Key 1) is completed, BB1 is activated and the game is considered to be one round of BB1.

Next, using Figure 63, we will explain how to play with right-hand hit in the normal game mode. In the normal game mode, the game is basically designed to aim for the center hit area and shoot the game ball, but depending on the operating pattern number determined by lottery, there are also patterns in which you can win by aiming for the right-hand hit area. In Figure 63, we will explain the case where the game is played by aiming for the right-hand hit area, and operating pattern number 24 is won when BB is not activated.

If the activated symbol number 24 is selected when the BB is not activated, the following BNS activated roles (1) to (7) are determined as the bonus pattern. Therefore, the player shoots the game ball by aiming at the right-hand hitting area in order to aim at the symbol entrance hole 13-18 to the symbol entrance hole 13-24.
(1) BNS activation role 8. When the combination of the symbols "GGG" (Bell Bell Bell) is completed, BB9 is activated.
(2) BNS activation role 9. When the combination of the symbols “G, F, E” (Bell, Cherry, Watermelon) is completed, BB9 is activated.
(3) BNS activation role 10. When the combination of the symbols "B.B.E" (bell, bell, watermelon) is completed, BB9 is activated. "B.E.E" (bell, watermelon, watermelon) is also acceptable.
(4) BNS activation role 11. When the combination of the symbols "B.B.F" (Bell, Bell, Cherry) is completed, BB9 is activated. "B.F.F" (Bell, Cherry, Cherry) is also acceptable.
(5) BNS activation role 12. When the combination of “EE” (watermelon, watermelon, watermelon) is completed, BB9 is activated.
(6) BNS activation role 13. When the combination of "F.F.E" (cherry, cherry, watermelon) is completed, BB9 is activated. "F.E.E" (cherry, watermelon, watermelon) is also acceptable.
(7) BNS activation role 14. When the combination of “F.F.F” (Cherry, Cherry, Cherry) is completed, BB9 is activated.

(a) is a diagram showing, for example, the waiting state of game play in step 3101. The second performance display device 10 displays a "waiting" image indicating that the game is waiting to be played. The first performance display device 16 displays an image of a star in the hand tile area 16.

(b) is a diagram showing that after the BET button 18 for starting a game is operated, the first ball is fired by operating the firing handle, and the first fired game ball enters the ball. The fired game ball enters the symbol entrance 13-22. The second performance display device 10 displays a "Aim here" image indicating that the right-hit area should be aimed at, as well as a right arrow image. In addition, the lamps of the symbol entrances 13-18 to 13-24 are lit. The display of these images and the lighting of the lamps are called a right-hit notification. Note that the speaker and the lamps of the frame are also configured to provide a notification with a sound and lamp pattern for right-hit, so these are also included in the right-hit notification. The right-hit notification is displayed after the BET button 18 is operated and continues to be displayed until the three fired balls enter the ball, and is a notification that is executed according to the type of bonus pattern corresponding to the operating symbol number. Additionally, the second performance display device 10 displays a "Stage A" image, indicating that the current performance stage is Stage A. The left-hand tile area 16-1 of the first performance display device 16 displays a hand tile pattern of "G" based on a game ball entering the pattern ball entry hole 13-22. As there are no second or third balls entering, the middle-hand tile area 16-2 and right-hand tile area 16-3 remain displaying star images.

(c) is a diagram showing that the second game ball has entered the game slot. The released game ball has entered the symbol entry slot 13-22. The second performance display device 10 and the symbol entry slot continue to execute the right hit notification. The second performance display device 10 also continues to display the "Stage A" image. The middle hand tile area 16-2 of the first performance display device 16 displays the hand tile pattern "G" based on the game ball having entered the symbol entry slot 13-22. As there is no third ball entering the game slot, the right hand tile area 16-3 remains as an image of a star.

(d) is a diagram showing that the third game ball has entered. The released game ball has entered the symbol entry hole 13-17. The right hand tile area 16-3 of the first performance display device 16 displays the hand tile pattern of "B1" based on the game ball entering the symbol entry hole 13-17. As a result of determining whether or not a win with the BB role has been established (step 3506), it is determined that the win with the BB role is not established, so one of the hand tile patterns must be discarded. Here, as a discard tile navigation effect on the first performance display device 16 side, the hand tile pattern of "B1" that is not necessary for a win with the BB role is surrounded by a dashed line, and a performance is executed to highlight the hand tile pattern to be discarded. The second performance display device 10 displays a discard tile navigation effect by the character X that recommends discarding "B1", but it may also be displayed as in the first performance display device 10. The discard navigation effect on the second effect display device 10 side is an effect in which character X appears and announces, "Discard 'B1'!!" Also, the second effect display device 10 continues to display the "Stage A" image. Note that in (d), if the game end button 26 is operated, the game is not forcibly ended. Also, in the state of (d) where there are three tiles in the hand, if it is determined that there is no possibility of winning with the BB role by firing one more ball (for example, in the case of "G, B1, B2", etc.), a process is configured to automatically end the game. In this case, the fourth ball cannot be fired, but since the win is with the winning role 28, the payout number calculation process is executed and then the game is ended.

(e) is a diagram showing the state after the discard button 19 is operated according to the discard navigation effect to discard the "B1" hand tile pattern in the right hand tile area 16-3. The second effect display device 10 executes a right hit notification that recommends aiming for the "bell" which is G. For example, an image "Aim for the bell!!" is displayed. Note that right hit notifications such as (b) and (c) in the same figure may be executed, or the right hit notifications of (b) and (c) may be notifications similar to (e). If all notifications are configured as (e), it is preferable to notify "Aim for the bell/watermelon/cherry!!". In this way, the right hit notification can be executed as a mission effect (mission effect executed in one game). In addition, the second effect display device 10 continues to display the "Stage A" image. The right hand tile area 16-3 of the first effect display device 16 displays a star image.

(f) is a diagram showing that the fourth gaming ball has entered. The released gaming ball has entered the symbol entry port 13-20. The second performance display device 10 displays a "win" image indicating that a win with a BB role has been achieved. The right hand tile area 16-3 of the first performance display device 16 displays a hand tile pattern of "G" based on the gaming ball entering the symbol entry port 13-20. As a result of determining whether or not a win with a BB role has been achieved (step 3520), a win role determination process is performed in step 3700 as a win with a BB role, and a payout number calculation process is performed in step 3750, and then the game ends. Even if the ball does not enter the symbol entry holes 13-20 and a BB win is not achieved, other winning combinations may be achieved, so the game ends after executing the winning combination determination process in step 3700 and the payout number calculation process in step 3750. In addition, in (f), if the symbol combination "GGG" (bell bell bell) is completed, BB9 is activated and the game is considered to be one round of BB9.

Next, game state transitions will be explained using Figures 64 to 71. Figure 64 shows an image of game state transitions (part 1), Figure 65 shows an image of game state transitions (part 2), Figure 66 shows an image of game state transitions (part 3), Figure 67 shows an image of game state transitions (part 4), Figure 68 shows an image of game state transitions (part 5), Figure 69 shows an image of game state transitions (part 6), Figure 70 shows an image of game state transitions (part 7), and Figure 71 shows an image of game state transitions (part 8). Note that, assuming that a game is started from a normal game state in which play is waiting, game state transitions in successive games such as the first game, second game, etc. will be explained.

(a) is a diagram showing a game in which the BET button 18 for starting a game is operated in a normal game state during game standby, resulting in the winning of the operating symbol number 13. For example, four balls are shot, the symbol combination of "K.K.K" (Key 1, Key 1, Key 1) is completed, and BB1 of the BNS operating role 15 is activated (see FIG. 62 for the flow until the symbol combination of "K.K.K" is completed). The game is also the first round of BB1. The second performance display device 10 displays an image of a win by character X, which indicates that a win has been achieved with the BB role, and an image of stage A, but the image of stage A may be erased at the timing when a win is achieved, in which case it is preferable to display an image of the chance zone, which is the background image of BB1. The hand tile area 16 of the first performance display device 16 displays the hand tile pattern of "K.K.K". Then, after judging whether or not a win with the BB role has been achieved (step 3520), it is determined that the win is achieved with the BB role, and the winning role determination process of step 3700 and the payout number calculation process of step 3750 are executed, after which the game ends.

(b) is a diagram showing a game in which the BET button 18 for starting the game is operated in the second game of BB1 in the second round, resulting in the winning of the operating symbol number 22. The second game is in the BB1 game state, but BB1 is a special game in which the score increase device is not activated (is not activated), and the medals that can be acquired are the same as in the normal game state, so the effect is not that of a BB, but that of a chance zone (called a CZ) in the normal game state. The second effect display device 10 displays an image of a "chance zone" indicating that it is a chance zone. Here, for example, four balls are shot, the symbol combination of "G.G.G" (bell, bell, bell) is completed, and the BB9 of the BNS activation role 08 is activated (see FIG. 63 for the flow until the symbol combination of "G.G.G" is completed). The game in question is also the first round of BB9. The second performance display device 10 displays an image of the winning hand by character X, indicating that a win with the BB role has been achieved, and an image of the chance zone, but the image of the chance zone may be erased when a win is achieved, in which case it is preferable to display an image of RB, which is the background image of BB9. The hand tile pattern of "G.G.G" is displayed in the hand tile area 16 of the first performance display device 16. Then, as a result of determining whether or not a win with the BB role has been achieved (step 3520), the game is ended after the winning role determination process of step 3700 and the payout number calculation process of step 3750 are performed as a win with the BB role.

(c) is a diagram showing a game in which the BET button 18 for starting the game is operated in the 2nd round game of BB9 of the third game, and the activated symbol number 34 is won as a result. BB9 is a special game in which the score increase device is activated, and is the first special game that starts counting consecutive games, so the special game is performed as a regular bonus. For example, three balls are fired here, and the combination of symbols "G, F, E" (bell, cherry, watermelon) is completed, and the winning combination 28 is completed. The second performance display device 10 displays an image of a right hit notification, an image of "4G remaining" which is the number of games (remaining rounds) of RB, an image of the number of medals paid out that can be displayed with RB, and an image of "RB" which indicates the type of the current special game group (in this example, the third group is RB). The hand tile area 16 of the first performance display device 16 displays the hand tile symbols "G, F, E". Then, the game ends after executing the winning combination determination process in step 3700 and the payout number calculation process in step 3750 (the winning combination 28 pays out one coin, but because the score increase device 2 is in an operable state, 15 times the payout, or 15 coins, are paid out). Note that the second performance display device 10 displays that 12 coins, which is the amount obtained by subtracting the three medals required for one game, will be added, but it may also be configured to add 15 coins. Also, it may be configured to display "1st time" or the like, indicating the first special game.

(d) is a diagram showing a game in which the BET button 18 for starting the game is operated in a 3-round game of BB9 in the fourth game, and the active symbol number 34 is won as a result. For example, three balls are shot here, completing the symbol combination of "G, F, E" (bell, cherry, watermelon), and the winning combination 28 is completed. The second performance display device 10 displays an image of a right hit notification, an image of "3G remaining" which is the number of games (remaining rounds) remaining in the RB, an image of the number of medals to be paid out that can be displayed by the RB, and an image of the RB. The hand tile area 16 of the first performance display device 16 displays the hand tile symbols of "G, F, E". Then, the winning combination determination process of step 3700 and the payout number calculation process of step 3750 are executed (the winning combination 28 is a payout of one medal, but since the score increase device 2 is in an operable state, 15 times the payout is performed, which is 15 medals), and then the game is ended.

Next, the fifth game will be explained, but the explanation of the fourth round of BB9 in the fifth game will be omitted since it is the same as (d).

(e) shows a game in which the BET button 18 to start play was operated in a 5-round game of BB9 in the sixth game, resulting in the winning of the active symbol number 34. Here, since no shot has been fired, the hand tile area 16 of the first performance display device 16 displays the hand tile symbols "star, star, star". The second performance display device 10 displays an image of a right hit notification, an image of "1G remaining" which is the number of games (remaining rounds) remaining in the RB, an image of the number of medals paid out in the RB, an image of the RB, and an image of "promotion chance" which indicates that the game is a promotion chance. A promotion chance is a chance game in which the BB described above can be overwritten. A chance game is a game played in a chance round.

In (f), for example, in the state of (e), three balls are fired, completing the combination of the symbols "H, G, F" (cylinder, bell, cherry), and BB10 of the BNS activation role 03 is activated. The game in question is also the first round of BB10. The second performance display device 10 displays an image of a right hit notification, an image of "1G remaining" which is the number of games (remaining rounds) remaining in RB, an image of the number of medals paid out that can be displayed by RB, an image of RB, and an image of "promotion chance" which indicates that the game is a promotion chance, but may also display an image of a win by character X which indicates that a win with a BB role has been established. The hand tile area 16 of the first performance display device 16 displays the hand tile symbols "H, G, F" and an image of "promotion confirmed!" which indicates that promotion has been confirmed in the promotion chance. If the player is promoted at the promotion chance (if the BB overwrite is confirmed), the game state is shifted to BB (for example, BB10), which is more advantageous than RB (BB9). Then, as a result of judging whether or not a win with the BB role has been achieved (step 3520), the game ends after executing the winning role judgment process in step 3700 and the payout number calculation process in step 3750 as a win with the BB role.

Next, the following will be explained using Figure 65. (g) is a diagram showing a game in which the BET button 18 to start the game is operated in a 2-round game of BB10 in the 7th game, and the activated symbol number 36 is won as a result. Here, since no firing has been performed, the hand tile pattern of "star, star, star" is displayed in the hand tile area 16 of the first performance display device 16. The second performance display device 10 displays an image of a right hit notification, an image showing the number of payouts, an image of "BB" showing the type of the current special game group (in this example, the fourth group is BB), and an image of a status notification, but it may also be configured to display the number of games remaining for BB. The status notification is a presentation that indicates that the current special game group (the fourth group in this example) is composed of multiple special games (in this example, it is composed of three BBs, BB10, BB11, and BB12) with a circle 1, a circle 2, and a circle 3, and also notifies which special game is currently being played (in this example, the circle is colored to indicate that it is the first BB), and also notifies the next special game group (the SBB group as the fifth group in this example) after the series of games in the current special game group (the fourth group) is completed. By executing such a presentation of the status notification, the game characteristics to be aimed for during the special game become clear, so that the player can properly grasp the timing of the special game currently being played and the special game to be aimed for. It is also possible to display 2nd (2 consecutive games) to indicate that the current special game is the second in a series. The following examples may also be similarly displayed to display the number of consecutive games.

In (h), in the state of (g), for example, three balls are shot, completing the combination of the symbols "G, F, E" (bell, cherry, watermelon), and completing the winning combination 28. The second performance display device 10 displays an image of a right hit notification, an image showing the number of payouts, an image of a BB, and an image of a status notification (indicating that it is the first BB). The hand tile area 16 of the first performance display device 16 displays the hand tile symbols "G, F, E". Then, the winning combination determination process of step 3700 and the payout number calculation process of step 3750 are executed (the winning combination 28 is a payout of one coin, but since the score increase device 1 is in an operable state, 30 times the payout is performed, i.e., 30 coins are paid out), and then the game ends. Note that the second performance display device 10 displays 27 coins, which is the amount obtained by subtracting the three medals required for one game, but 30 coins may be added.

Next, games 8 and 9 are similar to (h), so we will not explain them here.

(i) is a diagram showing a game in which the BET button 18 to start the game is operated in a 5-round game of BB10 of the 10th game, resulting in the winning of the active symbol number 36. Here, since no shot has been fired, the hand tile area 16 of the first performance display device 16 displays the hand tile symbols of "star, star, star". The second performance display device 10 displays an image of a right hit notification, an image showing the number of coins to be paid out, an image of a BB, an image of a status notification (indicating that it is the first BB), and an image of a "continuation chance" indicating that the game is a continuation chance. A continuation chance is a chance game and chance round in which the BB can be overwritten, and is a game in which the first special game (BB10 in this example) in the current special game group (the fourth group in this example) can be overwritten to the second special game (BB11 in this example).

In (j), for example, in the state of (i), three balls are fired, the combination of the patterns "H, H, H" (cylinder, cylinder, cylinder) is completed, and BB11 of the BNS activation role 01 is activated. The game is also the first round of BB11. The second performance display device 10 displays an image of a right hit notification, an image of the number of payouts, an image of a BB, an image of a status notification (indicating that it is the first BB), and an image of a "continuation chance" indicating that the game is a continuation chance, but it may also display an image of a win by character X indicating that a win with a BB role has been established. In the hand tile area 16 of the first performance display device 16, the hand tile patterns of "H, H, H" and an image of "Continuation confirmed!" indicating that continuation (promotion) has been confirmed in the continuation chance are displayed. If the game continues with the continuation chance (if the overwriting of BB is confirmed), the game state is shifted to BB11, which is more advantageous than BB10. Then, after judging whether or not a win with the BB role has been achieved (step 3520), it is determined that the win is achieved with the BB role, and the winning role determination process of step 3700 and the payout number calculation process of step 3750 are executed, after which the game ends.

(k) shows a game in which the BET button 18 to start the game is operated in the 2nd round of the 11th game, BB11, resulting in the winning of the active symbol number 41. Here, since no shot has been fired, the hand tile area 16 of the first performance display device 16 displays the hand tile symbols of "star, star, star". The second performance display device 10 displays an image of a right hit notification, an image showing the number of coins to be paid out, an image of a BB, and an image of a status notification (indicating that it is the second BB). Unlike (j), the image of the status notification indicates that the current special game is the second special game (in this example, BB11).

In (l), for example, in the state of (k), three balls are fired, completing the combination of symbols "H, G, F" (cylinder, bell, cherry), and completing the winning combination 28. The second performance display device 10 displays an image of a right hit notification, an image showing the number of tiles to be paid out, an image of a BB, and an image of a status notification (indicating that it is the second BB). The hand tile region 16 of the first performance display device 16 displays the hand tile symbols "H, G, F". Then, the winning combination determination process of step 3700 and the payout number calculation process of step 3750 are executed (the winning combination 28 is a payout of one tile, but because the score increase device 1 is in an operable state, a payout of 30 times the amount, 30 tiles, is performed), and then the game ends.

Next, we will continue the explanation using Figure 66. Note that the 12th and 13th games are the same as the 11th game in (k) and (l), so the explanation will be omitted.

(m) shows a game in which the BET button 18 to start the game is operated in a 5-round game of BB11 in the 14th game, resulting in the winning of the active symbol number 41. Here, since no shot has been fired, the hand tile area 16 of the first performance display device 16 displays the hand tile symbols of "star, star, star." The second performance display device 10 displays an image of a right hit notification, an image showing the number of coins to be paid out, an image of a BB, an image of a status notification (indicating that it is the second BB), and an image of a continuation chance.

(n) is, for example, when in the state of (m), three balls are fired, completing the combination of the patterns "H, H, H" (cylinder, cylinder, cylinder), and BB12 of the BNS activation role 01 is activated. The game is also the first round of BB12. The second performance display device 10 displays an image of a right hit notification, an image of the number of payouts, an image of a BB, an image of a status notification (indicating that it is the second BB, but since continuation has been confirmed, it may be displayed to indicate that it has moved to the third in the game. The same applies to the following examples), and an image of a "continuation chance" indicating that the game is a continuation chance, but it may also display an image of a win by character X indicating that a win with a BB role has been established. The hand tile area 16 of the first performance display device 16 displays the hand tile patterns of "H, H, H" and an image of "continuation confirmed!" indicating that continuation (promotion) has been confirmed in the continuation chance. If the game continues due to a continuation chance (if the BB overwrite is confirmed), the game state is shifted to BB12, which is more advantageous than BB11. Then, as a result of judging whether or not a win with the BB role has been achieved (step 3520), if it is determined that a win with the BB role has been achieved, the winning role judgment process of step 3700 and the payout number calculation process of step 3750 are executed, and then the game ends.

(o) shows a game in which the BET button 18 to start the game was operated in the 2nd round game of BB12 in the 15th game, resulting in the winning of the active symbol number 46. Here, since no shot has been fired, the hand tile area 16 of the first performance display device 16 displays the hand tile symbols of "star, star, star". The second performance display device 10 displays an image of a right hit notification, an image showing the number of coins to be paid out, an image of a BB, and an image of a status notification (indicating that it is the third BB). Unlike (n), the image of the status notification indicates that the current special game is the third special game (in this example, BB12).

In (p), for example, in the state of (o), three balls are fired, completing the combination of symbols "H, G, F" (cylinder, bell, cherry), and completing the winning combination 28. The second performance display device 10 displays an image of a right hit notification, an image showing the number of tiles to be paid out, an image of a BB, and an image of a status notification (indicating that it is the third BB). The hand tile region 16 of the first performance display device 16 displays the hand tile symbols "H, G, F". Then, the winning combination determination process of step 3700 and the payout number calculation process of step 3750 are executed (the winning combination 28 is a payout of one tile, but because the score increase device 1 is in an operable state, a payout of 30 times the amount, 30 tiles, is performed), and then the game ends.

(q) is a diagram showing a game in which the BET button 18 to start the game was operated in a 5-round game of BB12 in the 18th game, resulting in the winning of the active symbol number 46. Note that the 16th and 17th games are similar to the 15th game, so their explanations are omitted. Here, since no shots have been fired, the hand tile pattern of "star, star, star" is displayed in the hand tile area 16 of the first performance display device 16. The second performance display device 10 displays an image of a right hit notification, an image showing the number of coins to be paid out, an image of a BB, an image of a status notification (indicating that it is the third BB), and an image of a "promotion chance."

In (r), for example, in the state of (q), three balls are fired, completing the combination of the patterns "H, H, H" (cylinder, cylinder, cylinder), and BB13 of the BNS activation role 01 is activated. The game is also the first round of BB13. The second performance display device 10 displays an image of a right hit notification, an image of the number of payouts, an image of a BB, an image of a status notification (indicating that it is the third BB), and an image of a "promotion chance", but it may also display an image of a win by character X indicating that a win with a BB role has been established. The image of the status notification is different from (q), and indicates that the type of special game has been promoted from BB to SBB (in this example, the fifth group). The hand tile area 16 of the first performance display device 16 displays the hand tile patterns of "H, H, H" and an image of "Promotion confirmed!" indicating that promotion has been confirmed in the promotion chance. If the player is promoted at the promotion chance (if the BB overwrite is confirmed), the game state is shifted to BB13, which is more advantageous than BB12. Then, as a result of judging whether or not a win with the BB role has been achieved (step 3520), the game ends after executing the winning role judgment process of step 3700 and the payout number calculation process of step 3750 as a win with the BB role.

Next, the following will be explained using FIG. 67. (s1) is a diagram showing a game in which the BET button 18 to start the game is operated in a 2-round game of BB13 of the 19th game, and the activated symbol number 51 is won as a result. Here, since no firing has been performed, the hand tile area 16 of the first performance display device 16 displays the hand tile symbols of "star, star, star". The second performance display device 10 displays an image of a right hit notification, an image showing the number of payouts, an image of "SBB" showing the type of the current special game group (in this example, the 5th group is SBB), and an image of a status notification (indicating that it is the first BB of the SBB). The status notification in SBB has a different presentation from the status notification in BB. The status notification in SBB indicates that the current special game group (the fifth group in this example) is made up of multiple special games (five BBs in this example, BB13 to BB17) with a circle 1, a circle 2, a circle 3, a circle 4, and a circle 5, notifies which special game is currently in progress (in this example, the circle is colored to indicate that it is the first BB), and notifies the next special game group (the HBB group in this example) after the series of games in the current special game group is completed. By implementing such a status notification effect, the game characteristics to be aimed for during the special game become clear, so that the player can properly grasp the special game currently being played and the timing of the special game to be aimed for.

(s2) shows the 6 round game of BB14 after several games from (s1). Note that the 2nd to 7th rounds of BB13 in (s1) are played normally, and in the 7th round chance game, continuation is confirmed and the game moves to BB14. Here, since no shots are fired, the hand tile area 16 of the first performance display device 16 displays the hand tile patterns of "star, star, star". The second performance display device 10 displays an image of a right hit notification, an image of the number of payouts, an image of an SBB, an image of a status notification (indicating that it is the second BB), and an image of "continuation chance". Note that if continuation is confirmed in the 6th chance round, the game moves to BB15 without executing the 7th chance round. The 5th group has two chance rounds, and if a pattern combination that confirms continuation is completed in either chance round, the game moves to the next BB. In addition, since the chance round is in a state where the score increase device 3 can be operated, if a one-coin role such as the winning role 28 is achieved even if the continuation chance is unsuccessful, three times the payout is made, i.e., three coins. In this way, by setting the multiplier to maintain the current status in the chance round, it is possible to prevent the balls from being accidentally split in an unintended situation. In addition, since the payout in the chance round is kept low, the game is designed so that the player does not feel disappointed even if the previous chance round is successful. In addition, by keeping the payout balls low, the player can concentrate on the chance round. In particular, in the case of BB with 80% continuation or BB with 90% continuation, which has multiple chance rounds, if 30 medals are paid out even if the player misses the previous chance round, there is a concern that the player's concentration will be reduced by the processing of the medals and the payout sound.

(s3) shows the seven rounds of the game in BB15 after several games have been played since (s2). Rounds two to six of BB14 in (s2) are played normally, and in the chance game of round six, continuation is confirmed and the game moves to BB15. Since no shots have been fired here, the hand tile pattern of "star, star, star" is displayed in the hand tile area 16 of the first performance display device 16. The second performance display device 10 displays an image of a right hit notification, an image showing the number of payouts, an image of the SBB, an image of a status notification (indicating that it is the third BB), and an image of "continuation chance."

(s4) shows the 7 round game of BB16 after several games from (s3). The 7 rounds of BB15 in (s3) were played normally, and the continuation was confirmed in the 7 round chance game, leading to the transition to BB16. Since no shots have been fired here, the hand tile pattern of "star, star, star" is displayed in the hand tile area 16 of the first performance display device 16. The second performance display device 10 displays an image of a right hit notification, an image showing the number of payouts, an image of the SBB, an image of a status notification (indicating that it is the 4th BB), and an image of "continuation chance."

(s5) shows the 6 round game of BB17 after several games from (s4). The 7 rounds of BB16 in (s4) are played normally, and the 7 round chance game is confirmed to continue and transitions to BB17. Since no shots have been fired here, the hand tile pattern of "star, star, star" is displayed in the hand tile area 16 of the first performance display device 16. The second performance display device 10 displays an image of a right hit notification, an image showing the number of payouts, an image of the SBB, an image of a status notification (indicating that it is the 5th BB), and an image of a "promotion chance".

(s6) indicates that, for example, in the state of (s5), three balls are shot, the combination of the patterns "H・H・H" (cylinder・cylinder・cylinder) is completed, and BB23 is activated. The game is also the first round of BB23. The second performance display device 10 displays an image of a right hit notification, an image of the number of payouts, an image of SBB, an image of a status notification (indicating that it is the fifth BB), and an image of a "promotion chance", but it may also display an image of a win by character X indicating that a win with a BB role has been established. The image of the status notification is different from (s5), and indicates that the type of special game has been promoted from SBB to HBB (in this example, the seventh group). The hand tile area 16 of the first performance display device 16 displays the hand tile patterns of "H・H・H" and an image of "Promotion confirmed!" indicating that promotion has been confirmed in the promotion chance. If the player is promoted by the promotion chance (if the overwriting of BB is confirmed), the game state is shifted to BB23, which is more advantageous than BB17. Then, as a result of judging whether or not the winning combination with the BB role is established (step 3520), the winning combination judgment process of step 3700 and the payout number calculation process of step 3750 are executed as the winning combination with the BB role, and then the game is terminated. If the player is promoted in the chance round of the 6th round, the chance round of the 7th round is not executed, and the game is shifted to BB23. The 5th group has two chance rounds, but if a symbol combination that confirms the promotion is completed in either chance round, the game is shifted to BB of the next group. In addition, since the chance round is in a state where the score increase device 3 can be operated, if a one-coin role such as the winning role 28 is established even if the promotion chance is failed, three times the payout is performed, i.e., three coins. In this way, by setting the multiplier to maintain the current status in the chance round, it is possible to prevent the balls from being inadvertently split in an unintended situation. Also, by limiting the number of balls dispensed, players can concentrate on the chance rounds. In particular, in the case of BBs with 80% or 90% continuation that have multiple chance rounds, if 30 medals are paid out even if you miss the previous chance round, there is a concern that the sound of the medals being handled and paid out will reduce the player's concentration.

Next, the rest will be explained using Figure 68. (t1) shows two rounds of the game of BB23. Here, since no firing has been performed, the hand tile pattern of "star, star, star" is displayed in the hand tile area 16 of the first performance display device 16. The second performance display device 10 displays an image of a right hit notification, an image showing the number of payouts, an image of "HBB" showing the type of the current special game group (in this example, the seventh group is HBB), and an image of a status notification (indicating that it is the first BB of HBB). The status notification for HBB has a different presentation from the status notification for SBB. The status notification in HBB indicates that the current special game group (7th group in this example) is composed of multiple special games (6 BBs in this example, BB23 to BB28) with circles 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, and 6, and notifies which special game is currently in play (in this example, the circle is colored to indicate that it is the first BB), and notifies the next special game group (NEXT group in this example) after a series of games in the current special game group is completed. Note that NEXT indicates HBB, so it may be HBB, or it may be HBB2, which is the second HBB, as long as it notifies that it is different from the current HBB and is more advantageous than the current HBB. By implementing this type of situation notification, the gameplay that should be aimed for during the special game becomes clear, allowing the player to properly grasp the timing of the special game currently being played and the special game that should be aimed for.

(t2) shows the 6 round game of BB24 after several games from (t1). In addition, the 2nd to 8th rounds of BB23 in (t1) are played normally, and in the 8th round chance game, continuation is confirmed and transition is made to BB24. Here, since no shots are fired, the hand tile pattern of "star, star, star" is displayed in the hand tile area 16 of the first performance display device 16. In the second performance display device 10, an image of a right hit notification, an image showing the number of payouts, an image of HBB, an image of a status notification (indicating that it is the second BB), and an image of "continuation chance" are displayed. In addition, if continuation is confirmed in the 6th chance round, the 7th and 8th chance rounds are not executed and the transition is made to BB25. In the 7th group, there are three chance rounds, and if a pattern combination that confirms continuation is completed in any of the chance rounds, the transition is made to the next BB. In addition, since the chance round is in a state where the score increase device 3 can be operated, if a one-coin role such as the winning role 28 is achieved even if the continuation chance is unsuccessful, three times the amount will be paid out, i.e., three coins. In this way, by setting the multiplier to maintain the current situation in the chance round, it is possible to prevent balls from being carelessly split in unintended situations. In addition, by limiting the number of balls paid out, the player can concentrate on the chance round. This is because, particularly in the case of BB with 80% continuation or BB with 90% continuation, which has multiple chance rounds, if 30 medals are paid out even if a player misses in the previous chance round, there is a concern that the player's concentration will be reduced by the sound of the medals being handled and paid out.

(t3) shows the seventh round of the BB25 game after several games from (t2). The six rounds of BB24 in (t2) are played normally, and the continuation is confirmed in the six-round chance game, transitioning to BB25. Here, since no shots have been fired, the hand tile pattern of "star, star, star" is displayed in the hand tile area 16 of the first performance display device 16. The second performance display device 10 displays an image of a right hit notification, an image of the number of payouts, an image of an HBB, an image of a status notification (indicating that it is the third BB), and an image of "continuation chance". If continuation is confirmed in the seventh chance round, the eighth chance round is not executed and the game transitions to BB26. The seventh group has three chance rounds, but even if the first chance round is unsuccessful, the game transitions to the next BB if a pattern combination that confirms continuation is completed in the subsequent chance rounds. In addition, since the chance round is in a state where the score increase device 3 can be operated, if a one-coin role such as the winning role 28 is achieved even if the continuation chance is unsuccessful, three times the amount will be paid out, i.e., three coins. In this way, by setting the multiplier to maintain the current situation in the chance round, it is possible to prevent balls from being carelessly split in unintended situations. In addition, by limiting the number of balls paid out, the player can concentrate on the chance round. This is because, particularly in the case of BB with 80% continuation or BB with 90% continuation, which has multiple chance rounds, if 30 medals are paid out even if there is a mistake in the previous chance round, there is a concern that the player's concentration will be reduced by the sound of the medals being handled and paid out.

(t4) shows the 8 round game of BB26 after several games from (t3). The 7 rounds of BB25 in (t3) were played normally, and the continuation was confirmed in the 7 round chance game, leading to the transition to BB26. Since no shots have been fired here, the hand tile pattern of "star, star, star" is displayed in the hand tile area 16 of the first performance display device 16. The second performance display device 10 displays an image of a right hit notification, an image showing the number of payouts, an image of the HBB, an image of a status notification (indicating that it is the 4th BB), and an image of "continuation chance."

(t5) shows the 8 round game of BB27 after several games from (t4). The 8 rounds of BB26 in (t4) were played normally, and the continuation was confirmed in the 8 round chance game, leading to BB27. Here, since no shots have been fired, the hand tile pattern of "star, star, star" is displayed in the hand tile area 16 of the first performance display device 16. The second performance display device 10 displays an image of a right hit notification, an image showing the number of payouts, an image of the HBB, an image of a status notification (indicating that it is the 5th BB), and an image of "continuation chance".

(t6) shows the 6 round game of BB28 after several games from (t5). Incidentally, the 8 rounds of BB27 in (t5) are played normally, and the 8 round chance game is confirmed to continue and transitions to BB28. In the state of (t6), for example, three balls are shot, the combination of the "H H H" (cylinder, cylinder, cylinder) patterns is completed, and BB29 is activated. Incidentally, this game is also the first round of BB29. The second performance display device 10 displays an image of a right hit notification, an image showing the number of payouts, an image of HBB, an image of a status notification (indicating that it is the 6th BB), and an image of a "promotion chance", but it may also display an image of a win by character X indicating that a win with a BB role has been established. The image of the status notification is different from (t5), and indicates that the type of the special game has been promoted from HBB to NEXT (HBB of the 8th group in this example). The hand tile area 16 of the first performance display device 16 displays the hand tile pattern of "H, H, H" and an image of "Promotion confirmed!" indicating that promotion has been confirmed in the promotion chance. If promotion has been confirmed in the promotion chance (if the overwriting of BB has been confirmed), the game state is shifted to BB29, which is more advantageous than BB28. Then, as a result of determining whether or not a win with the BB role has been established (step 3520), the game is ended after executing the winning role determination process of step 3700 and the payout number calculation process of step 3750 as a win with the BB role. If promotion has been confirmed in the chance round of the 6th round, the chance rounds of the 7th and 8th rounds are not executed, and the game is shifted to BB29. The seventh group has three chance rounds, and when a symbol combination that determines promotion is completed in any of the chance rounds, the game moves to the BB of the next group. In addition, since the score increase device 3 is in an operable state during the chance round, even if the promotion chance is missed, if a one-coin role such as the winning role 28 is achieved, three times the amount of money is paid out, i.e., three coins. In this way, by setting the multiplier to maintain the current status during the chance round, it is possible to prevent the balls from being accidentally split in unintended situations. In addition, by limiting the number of balls paid out, the player can concentrate on the chance round. In particular, in the case of a BB with 80% continuation or a BB with 90% continuation that has multiple chance rounds, if 30 medals are paid out even if a mistake is made in the previous chance round, there is a concern that the player's concentration will be reduced by the processing of the medals and the sound of the medals being paid out.

Next, the following will be explained using FIG. 69. (u1) shows the game of round 2 of BB29. Here, since no shots have been fired, the hand tile pattern of "star, star, star" is displayed in the hand tile area 16 of the first performance display device 16. The second performance display device 10 displays an image of a right hit notification, an image of the number of payouts, an image of "HBB" indicating the type of the current special game group (in this example, the 8th group is HBB), and an image of a status notification (indicating that it is the first BB). Note that the image of "HBB" is shown as an example of the display indicating the type of the current special game group, but since it is the second HBB, an image such as "HBB2" may be displayed. Also, the status notification for the second HBB is the same as the status notification for the first HBB, but it may be a different presentation. For example, instead of "NEXT", an image such as "HBB3" for the third HBB may be displayed.

(u2) shows the seventh round of the game in BB30 after several games from (u1). The second to ninth rounds of BB29 in (u1) are played normally, and the continuation is confirmed in the ninth round of the chance game, leading to the transition to BB30. Here, since no shots have been fired, the hand tile pattern of "star, star, star" is displayed in the hand tile area 16 of the first performance display device 16. The second performance display device 10 displays an image of a right hit notification, an image of the number of payouts, an image of an HBB, an image of a status notification (indicating that it is the second BB), and an image of "continuation chance". If continuation is confirmed in the seventh chance round, the eighth and ninth chance rounds are not executed, and the transition to BB31 takes place. The eighth group has three chance rounds, just like the seventh group, but if a pattern combination that confirms continuation is completed in any of the chance rounds, the transition to the next BB takes place. In addition, since the chance round is in a state where the score increase device 3 can be operated, if a one-coin role such as the winning role 28 is achieved even if the continuation chance is unsuccessful, three times the amount will be paid out, i.e., three coins. In this way, by setting the multiplier to maintain the current situation in the chance round, it is possible to prevent balls from being carelessly split in unintended situations. In addition, by limiting the number of balls paid out, the player can concentrate on the chance round. This is because, particularly in the case of BB with 80% continuation or BB with 90% continuation, which has multiple chance rounds, if 30 medals are paid out even if there is a mistake in the previous chance round, there is a concern that the player's concentration will be reduced by the sound of the medals being handled and paid out.

(u3) shows the seventh round of the game of BB34 after several games from (u2). The seventh round of BB30 in (u2) is played normally, and in the seventh round chance game, continuation is confirmed and it moves to BB31, and BB31 to BB33 are also played normally and move to BB34. In the state of (u3), for example, three balls are shot, the combination of the patterns "H H H" (cylinder cylinder cylinder cylinder) is completed, and BB35 is activated. The game is also the first round of BB35. The second performance display device 10 displays an image of a right hit notification, an image of the number of payouts, an image of HBB, an image of a status notification (indicating that it is the sixth BB), and an image of a "promotion chance", but it may also display an image of a win by character X indicating that a win with a BB role has been established. The status notification image indicates that the type of special game has been promoted to NEXT (HBB of the 9th group in this example). The hand tile area 16 of the first performance display device 16 displays the hand tile pattern of "H, H, H" and an image of "Promotion confirmed!" indicating that promotion has been confirmed in the promotion chance. If promotion has been confirmed in the promotion chance (if the overwriting of BB has been confirmed), the game state is shifted to BB35, which is more advantageous than BB34. Then, as a result of determining whether or not a win with the BB role has been established (step 3520), the game is ended after executing the winning role determination process of step 3700 and the payout number calculation process of step 3750 as a win with the BB role. If promotion has been confirmed in the chance round of the 7th round, the chance rounds of the 8th and 9th rounds are not executed and the game is shifted to BB35. The eighth group has three chance rounds, just like the seventh group, but if a symbol combination that confirms promotion is completed in any of the chance rounds, the game moves to the BB of the next group. In addition, since the score increase device 3 is in an operable state during the chance round, even if the promotion chance is missed, if a one-coin role such as the winning role 28 is achieved, three times the payout, or three coins, will be paid out. In this way, by setting the multiplier to maintain the current status during the chance round, it is possible to prevent the balls from being carelessly split in unintended situations. In addition, by limiting the number of balls paid out, the player can concentrate on the chance round. In particular, in the case of a BB with 80% continuation or a BB with 90% continuation that has multiple chance rounds, if 30 medals are paid out even if a mistake is made in the previous chance round, there is a concern that the player's concentration will be reduced by the processing of the medals and the sound of the medals being paid out.

(v1) shows a game of 2 rounds of BB35. Here, since no shots have been fired, the hand tile pattern of "star, star, star" is displayed in the hand tile area 16 of the first effect display device 16. The second effect display device 10 displays an image of a right hit notification, an image of the number of payouts, an image of "HBB" indicating the type of the current special game group (in this example, the 9th group is HBB), and an image of a status notification (indicating that it is the first BB). Note that the image of "HBB" is shown as an example of an indication of the type of the current special game group, but since this is the third HBB, an image such as "HBB3" may be displayed. In addition, the status notification for the third HBB is the same as the status notification for the first and second HBBs, but may be a different presentation. For example, instead of "NEXT", an image such as "HBB4" for the fourth HBB may be displayed.

(v2) shows two rounds of games in BB41 after several games from (v1). BB35 to BB40 are played normally, and the game moves to BB41. The gameplay in each BB is the same as in the above example, so the explanation is omitted. Here, since no shots have been fired, the hand tile pattern of "star, star, star" is displayed in the hand tile area 16 of the first performance display device 16. The second performance display device 10 displays an image of a right hit notification, an image showing the number of payouts, an image of "HBB" showing the type of the current special game group (in this example, the 10th group is HBB), and an image of a status notification (indicating that it is the first BB). Note that the image of "HBB" is shown as an example of the display showing the type of the current special game group, but since this is the fourth HBB, an image such as "HBB4" may be displayed. Additionally, the status notification for the fourth HBB is the same as the status notification for the first to third HBBs, but may be presented in a different way. For example, instead of "NEXT," an image such as "HBB5," which is the fifth HBB, may be displayed.

(v3) shows two rounds of BB47 after several games from (v2). BB41 to BB46 are played normally, and the game moves to BB47. The gameplay of each BB is the same as the above example, so the explanation is omitted. Here, since no shots have been fired, the hand tile pattern of "star, star, star" is displayed in the hand tile area 16 of the first performance display device 16. The second performance display device 10 displays an image of a right hit notification, an image showing the number of payouts, an image of "HBB" showing the type of the current special game group (in this example, the 11th group is HBB), and an image of a status notification (indicating that it is the first BB). Note that the image of "HBB" is shown as an example of the display showing the type of the current special game group, but since this is the fifth HBB, an image such as "HBB5" may be displayed. Also, the status notification for the fifth HBB is the same as the status notification for the first through fourth HBBs, but may be presented in a different way. For example, instead of "NEXT," an image such as "HBB6," which is the sixth HBB, may be displayed.

Next, the continuation will be explained using FIG. 70. (v4) shows two rounds of games in BB53 after several games from (v3). BB47 to BB52 are played normally, and the game has moved to BB53. The gameplay in each BB is the same as in the above example, so the explanation will be omitted. Here, since no shots have been fired, the hand tile pattern of "star, star, star" is displayed in the hand tile area 16 of the first performance display device 16. The second performance display device 10 displays an image of a right hit notification, an image of the number of payouts, an image of "HBB" indicating the type of the current special game group (in this example, the 12th group is HBB), and an image of a status notification (indicating that it is the first BB). Note that the image of "HBB" is shown as an example of the display indicating the type of the current special game group, but since this is the sixth HBB, an image such as "HBB6" may be displayed. Additionally, the status notification for the sixth HBB is the same as the status notification for the first through fifth HBBs, but may be presented in a different way. For example, instead of "NEXT," an image such as "HBB7," which is the seventh HBB, may be displayed.

(v5) shows two rounds of games in BB59 after several games have been played since (v4). BB53 to BB58 have been played normally, and the game has moved to BB59. The gameplay in each BB is the same as in the above example, so a description will be omitted. Here, since no shots have been fired, the hand tile pattern of "star, star, star" is displayed in the hand tile area 16 of the first performance display device 16. The second performance display device 10 displays an image of a right hit notification, an image showing the number of payouts, an image of "HBB" showing the type of the current special game group (in this example, the 13th group is HBB), and an image of a status notification (indicating that this is the first BB). The status notification here is a different presentation from the status notification in the previous HBB. The status notification here indicates that the current special game group (in this example, the 13th group) is made up of multiple special games (in this example, six BBs, BB59 to BB64) with a circle 1, a circle 2, a circle 3, a circle 4, a circle 5, and a circle 6, notifies which special game is currently in progress (in this example, the circle is colored to indicate that it is the first BB), and notifies the next special game group (in this example, the PBB group) after the series of games in the current special game group is completed. By executing such a status notification effect, the game characteristics to be aimed for during the special game become clear, so that the player can properly grasp the special game currently being played and the timing of the special game to be aimed for.

(v6) shows the 12 rounds of BB64 after several games from (v5). BB59 to BB63 are played normally, and the game moves to BB64. The gameplay of each BB is the same as the above example, so the explanation is omitted. In the state of (v6), for example, three balls are shot, the combination of the patterns "H H H" (cylinder cylinder cylinder) is completed, and BB65 is activated. This game is also the first round of BB65. The second performance display device 10 displays an image of a right hit notification, an image of the number of payouts, an image of HBB, an image of a status notification (indicating that it is the sixth BB), and an image of a "promotion chance", but it may also display an image of a win by character X indicating that a win with a BB role has been established. The image of the status notification indicates that the type of special game has been promoted to PBB (in this example, PBB of the 14th group). In the hand tile area 16 of the first performance display device 16, the hand tile pattern of "H.H.H" and an image of "Promotion confirmed!" indicating that promotion has been confirmed in the promotion chance are displayed. If promotion has been confirmed in the promotion chance (if the overwriting of BB has been confirmed), the game state is shifted to BB65, which is more advantageous than BB64. Then, as a result of judging whether or not a win with the BB role has been established (step 3520), the game is ended after the winning role judgment process of step 3700 and the payout number calculation process of step 3750 are executed as a win with the BB role. Note that if promotion is confirmed in the chance round of the 12th round, the chance rounds of the 13th round and the 14th round are not executed and the game is shifted to BB65. The 13th group has three chance rounds like the other groups of HBB, but if a pattern combination that confirms promotion is completed in any chance round, the game is shifted to BB of the next group. In addition, since the chance round is in a state where the score increase device 3 can be operated, if a one-coin role such as the winning role 28 is achieved even if the promotion chance is not achieved, three times the amount, or three coins, are paid out. In this way, by setting the multiplier to maintain the current status in the chance round, it is possible to prevent balls from being carelessly split in unintended situations. In addition, by limiting the number of balls paid out, the player can concentrate on the chance round. This is because, particularly in the case of BB with 80% continuation or BB with 90% continuation, which has multiple chance rounds, if 30 medals are paid out even if there is a mistake in the previous chance round, there is a concern that the player's concentration will be reduced by the sound of the medals being handled and paid out.

(w1) shows the second round of the BB65 game following (v6). Here, since no shot has been fired, the hand tile pattern of "star, star, star" is displayed in the hand tile area 16 of the first performance display device 16. The second performance display device 10 displays an image of a right hit notification, an image showing the number of payouts, an image of "PBB" showing the type of the current special game group (in this example, the 14th group is PBB), and an image of a status notification (indicating that it is the first BB). The status notification here is a different presentation than the status notification in the previous HBB. The status notification here indicates that the current special game group (in this example, the 14th group; the example shows a case where BB71 is included in the 14th group) is made up of multiple special games (7 BBs in this example, BB65 to BB71) with a circle 1, a circle 2, a circle 3, a circle 4, a circle 5, a circle 6, and a circle 7, notifies which special game is currently being played (in this example, the circle is colored to indicate that it is the first BB), and notifies the game state after a series of games in the current special game group is completed (in this example, FIN, which means the end). By executing such a status notification effect, the game characteristics to be aimed for during the special game become clear, so that the player can properly grasp the currently being played special game and the game state afterwards.

(w2) shows two rounds of the game BB66 after several games from (w1). BB65 in (w1) has been played normally and has moved to BB66. Here, since no shots have been fired, the hand tile pattern of "star, star, star" is displayed in the hand tile area 16 of the first performance display device 16. The second performance display device 10 displays an image of a right hit notification, an image showing the number of payouts, an image of the PBB, and an image of a status notification (indicating that it is the second BB).

(w3) shows two rounds of BB67 after several games from (w2). BB66 in (w2) has been played normally and has moved to BB67. Here, since no shots have been fired, the hand tile pattern of "star, star, star" is displayed in the hand tile area 16 of the first performance display device 16. The second performance display device 10 displays an image of a right hit notification, an image showing the number of payouts, an image of the PBB, and an image of a status notification (indicating that it is the third BB).

Next, the rest will be explained using Figure 71. (w4) shows two rounds of the game of BB68 after several games have been played since (w3). Note that BB67 in (w3) has been played normally, and has moved to BB68. Here, since no shots have been fired, the hand tile pattern of "star, star, star" is displayed in the hand tile area 16 of the first performance display device 16. The second performance display device 10 displays an image of a right hit notification, an image showing the number of payouts, an image of the PBB, and an image of a status notification (indicating that it is the fourth BB).

(w5) shows two rounds of BB69 games after several games from (w4). BB68 in (w4) has been played normally and has transitioned to BB69. Here, since no shots have been fired, the hand tile pattern of "star, star, star" is displayed in the hand tile area 16 of the first performance display device 16. The second performance display device 10 displays an image of a right hit notification, an image showing the number of payouts, an image of the PBB, and an image of a status notification (indicating that it is the fifth BB).

(w6) shows two rounds of BB70 games after several games from (w5). BB69 in (w5) has been played normally and has moved to BB70. Here, since no shots have been fired, the hand tile pattern of "star, star, star" is displayed in the hand tile area 16 of the first performance display device 16. The second performance display device 10 displays an image of a right hit notification, an image showing the number of payouts, an image of the PBB, and an image of a status notification (indicating that it is the sixth BB).

(w7) shows two rounds of BB71 after several games from (w6). BB70 in (w6) has been played normally, and has transitioned to BB71. Since no shots have been fired here, the hand tile area 16 of the first performance display device 16 displays the "star, star, star" hand tile pattern. The second performance display device 10 displays an image of a right hit notification, an image showing the number of coins to be paid out, an image of a PBB, and an image of a status notification (indicating that this is the seventh BB). Since BB71 is the last BB and will not continue any further, the color of the "FIN" image in the status notification, which indicates the end of the consecutive streak, is inverted, indicating that the consecutive streak will end with this BB.

(w8) shows the 14th round game of BB71. Here, since no shots have been fired, the hand tile pattern of "star, star, star" is displayed in the hand tile area 16 of the first performance display device 16. The second performance display device 10 displays an image of a right hit notification, an image showing the number of coins to be paid out, an image of a PBB, and an image of a status notification (indicating that this is the 7th BB). Note that BB71 is the last BB and will not continue any further, so no promotion chance or continuation chance is executed, but a chance round is provided at round 14. Since the consecutive win ends in this chance round, it is preferable to execute an ending performance.

(w9) shows the game end screen for the special game. This game end screen is a presentation executed using the end demo of BB71, but may be displayed during the execution of 14 rounds. The game end screen displays images of the number of consecutive wins (e.g., 60 consecutive wins), the number of medals won (e.g., 12,345 medals won), etc. as a result display, and displays the results of the series of BBs.

In this way, the mahjong ball game machine of the second embodiment is configured to be able to execute a series of special games as shown in Figures 64 to 71, and the series of special games continues up to BB71, and when the 14 round game of BB71 is completed, the machine is configured to forcibly switch to the normal game state in the next game.

If the BB71 symbol combination is completed in the BB71 chance round, BB71 may be continued. In that case, it is preferable to increase the number of possible shots by +1, etc., to make the BB71 more advantageous than the previous BB71. By configuring it in this way, it is possible to provide a mahjong ball game machine that allows for more consecutive wins.

Next, we will briefly explain the above content using Figure 72.

As shown in FIG.
(1) The game is started from the normal gaming state. In the normal gaming state, the first group of special games (BB1 to BB4) is activated. In this state, one chance zone game is executed.
(2) The special games of the first group can be overwritten onto the special games of the third group.
(3) The special games of the third group can be overwritten onto the special games of the fourth group.
(4) The special games of the fourth group can be overwritten onto the special games of the fifth group.
(5) The special games of the fifth group can be overwritten by the special games of the seventh group.
(6) The special games of the seventh group can be overwritten onto the special games of the eighth group.
(7) The special games of the eighth group can be overwritten by the special games of the ninth group.
(8) The special games of the 9th group can be overwritten onto the special games of the 10th group.
(9) The special games of the 10th group can be overwritten onto the special games of the 11th group.
(10) The special games of the 11th group can be overwritten onto the special games of the 12th group.
(11) The special games of the 12th group can be overwritten onto the special games of the 13th group.
(12) The special games of the 13th group can be overwritten onto the special games of the 14th group.
(13) A special game in the 14th group can be overwritten onto a special game in the 15th group (assuming that BB71 is in the 15th group).

In addition, a game state transition such as that shown in (b) of Figure 72 is also possible.
(1) The game is started from the normal game state. In the normal game state, the second group of special games (BB5 to BB8) are activated. In this state, up to three chance zone games can be executed, and any game can be overwritten by the third group of special games.
(2) The special games of the second group can be overwritten onto the special games of the third group.
(3) The special games of the third group can be overwritten onto the special games of the fourth group.
(4) The special games of the fourth group can be overwritten by the special games of the fifth group.
(5) The special games of the fifth group can be overwritten by the special games of the seventh group.
(6) The special games of the seventh group can be overwritten onto the special games of the eighth group.
(7) The special games of the eighth group can be overwritten by the special games of the ninth group.
(8) The special games of the 9th group can be overwritten onto the special games of the 10th group.
(9) The special games of the 10th group can be overwritten onto the special games of the 11th group.
(10) The special games of the 11th group can be overwritten onto the special games of the 12th group.
(11) The special games of the 12th group can be overwritten onto the special games of the 13th group.
(12) The special games of the 13th group can be overwritten onto the special games of the 14th group.
(13) A special game in the 14th group can be overwritten onto a special game in the 15th group (assuming that BB71 is in the 15th group).

In conventional mahjong ball gaming machines, during normal game play, there was a problem that the probability of winning BB could not be changed. Therefore, in the mahjong ball gaming machine of the second embodiment, in order to create game states with different winning probabilities such as so-called chance zones and high probability states, a chance zone is created using special games that do not increase, such as the first group of special games and the second group of special games, thereby realizing gameplay with different winning probabilities for BB. The gameplay aims to overwrite advantageous special games via these special games that do not increase.

For example, as shown in FIG.
(a) Normal game state → CZ (high probability state as a special game where the number of games does not increase by 1) → RB → BB → SBB → HBB → PBB
(b) Normal game state → CZ (high probability state as a special game where the number of games does not increase by 3) → RB → BB → SBB → HBB → PBB
The number of CZ games is not limited to one or three as shown in the examples, and may be other numbers of games.

By configuring it in this way, it is possible to provide a mahjong ball gaming machine with improved entertainment value by making the presentation of a certain special game (the first group of special games and the second group of special games BB1 to BB8) similar to that performed in a normal game state such as a chance zone or high probability state, and by providing a presentation that is different from the special game state. It is also possible to provide a mahjong ball gaming machine with deep gameplay based on the rules.

During the CZ (BB), the difficulty of the mission (ease of symbol combination) during the CZ is configured to differ depending on the BB in operation. For example, in the case of a 1-game CZ (BB1), the execution rate of the mission effect displaying the "Aim for 7!!" image is set lower (or higher) than in the case of a 3-game CZ (BB5), so the probability of the symbol combinations "7-7-7", "7-7-Y", "7-Y-Y", and "Y-Y-Y" being achieved is different. The mission effect displaying the "Aim for 7!!" image is executable when the BNS activation roles 19 to 22 are determined as a bonus pattern, and when these bonus patterns are determined, a drawing on the sub-board 3000 is used to determine whether or not to execute the effect. Similarly, it is preferable that the mission effects for left-hit notifications that display the "Aim for the key!!" image, and the mission effects for right-hit notifications that display images such as the "Aim for the bell!!" image are configured so that their execution rates differ between the 1-game CZ and the 3-game CZ. The mission effect that displays the "Aim for the key!!" image is executable when BNS activation roles 15-18 are determined to be the bonus pattern, and the mission effect that displays images such as the "Aim for the bell!!" image is executable when BNS activation roles 01-14 are determined to be the bonus pattern.

<<Overwrite BB>>
Next, the overwriting of BB will be described with reference to Fig. 73. Fig. 73 is a diagram showing an excerpt of a part of the table in Fig. 47, showing the number of balls held and the number of rounds.

During the game state of the BB, it is only possible to overwrite it with a more advantageous BB, and in the second embodiment, the BB is overwritten by overwriting 1 with a BB with an advantageous "number of balls" and overwriting 2 with a BB with an advantageous "number of rounds." Note that a round with more than three balls will be described as a chance round.

The conditions for overwriting a BB are not limited to "overwriting a BB with an advantageous number of balls 1" or "overwriting a BB with an advantageous number of rounds 2", but may be any advantageous condition. For example, if one advantageous condition is satisfied, a BB with a large number of balls can be overwritten even if the total number of rounds that can be executed is small, and so on, it is also possible to overwrite a BB with other unfavorable conditions.

Also, for example, at least one of the following conditions may be advantageous.
(1) Total number of balls in the BB (2) Total number of balls in the Chance Round (3) Number of BBs that can be overwritten (4) Total number of winning balls in the BB

By configuring it in this way, it is possible to provide a mahjong ball game machine that can overwrite various BBs.

<BB overwrite 1>
In the second embodiment, the BB is overwritten in such a way that the "number of balls held" is advantageous as follows.
(1) Overwriting within the fourth group: BB10 (7 balls) → BB11 (8 balls) → BB12 (9 balls)
(2) Overwriting within the 5th group: BB13 (7 balls) → BB14 (8 balls) → BB15 (9 balls) → BB16 (10 balls) → BB17 (11 balls)
(3) Overwriting within the 7th group: BB23 (7 balls) → BB24 (8 balls) → BB25 (9 balls) → BB26 (10 balls) → BB27 (11 balls) → BB28 (12 balls)

<BB Overwrite 2>
In the second embodiment, the BB is overwritten in such a way that the "number of rounds" is advantageous as follows.
(1) BB12 (5 rounds) → BB13 (7 rounds)
(2) BB17 (7th round) → BB23 (8th round)

For example, round 5 of BB10, round 7 of BB13, and round 8 of BB23 all have the same number of balls (number of remaining balls, number of balls that can be fired), so the probability of overwriting the BB in this one round (chance round) (hereinafter also referred to as the continuation rate) is the same for all of them.

Here, "continuation rate" is not simply a numerical probability, but a combination of the number of balls held, the selection rate of the BB symbol, the ease of scoring due to the symbol arrangement, the number of chance rounds, the balls held, the drawing probability of the operating symbol number, and the type of BNS activation role according to the operating symbol number. Regarding the ease of scoring due to the symbol arrangement, the scoring rate when, for example, 100,000 game balls are fired in the same nail situation is used as a sample, but the firing of 60,000 game balls may be used as a sample of the scoring rate in light of the number of balls that can be fired during business hours in one day and the number of balls fired in a type test. "Continuation rate" is also called "transition probability," "expected degree of transition," "expected value of transition," "possibility of scoring," "success rate," "overwrite probability," etc.

In the second embodiment, the number of chance rounds is increased to increase the overall continuation rate. For example,
(1) In the 4th group, there will be one chance round (5R only).
(2) The 5th group will have two chance rounds (R6 and R7).
(3) In the 7th group, there will be three chance rounds (R6, R7, R8).
The data is structured so that the continuation rates differ between groups.

For example, the retention rate for each group is
(1) The continuation rate of the fourth group is 70% (or approximately 70%).
(2) The continuation rate of the fifth group is 80% (or approximately 80%).
(3) The continuation rate of the seventh group is 90% (or approximately 90%).
It is as follows.

The fourth group's continuation rate is the average continuation rate of BB10-12, the fifth group's continuation rate is the average continuation rate of BB13-17, and the seventh group's continuation rate is the average continuation rate of BB23-28. As described below, the continuation rates of BB10-12 are each configured to be 70%, BB13-17 are each configured to be 80%, and BB23-28 are each configured to be 90%, but the continuation rates of BB10-12, BB13-17, and BB23-28 may be configured to be different, as long as the average continuation rate is the above-mentioned continuation rate. Note that 70%, 80%, and 90% are examples and are not limited to these values.

In this way, in the second embodiment, there are cases where the player moves to a BB with a larger maximum number of balls in the chance round (BB overwrite 1) and a BB with a smaller maximum number of balls in the chance round (BB overwrite 2). There are also cases where the player moves to a BB with the same number of rounds and a larger number of balls in a given round (e.g., 5R) (e.g., BB10 → BB11, etc.), and cases where the player moves to a BB with fewer balls in a given round (e.g., 5R) and a larger number of rounds (e.g., BB12 → BB13, etc.). By configuring in this way, it is possible to achieve a number of BB overwrites that exceeds 14, which is the maximum number of rounds that can be installed in a mahjong ball game machine, under the premise of overwriting to an advantageous BB (e.g., if the maximum number of rounds is 14, 12 overwrites are possible).

The continuation rate of each of BB10, BB11, and BB12 constituting the fourth group is also set to 70% (or approximately 70%). Here, the number of chance rounds in the fourth group and the number of balls in the chance round are set as follows.
(1) BB10 has 1 chance round and 7 balls. (2) BB11 has 1 chance round and 8 balls. (3) BB12 has 1 chance round and 9 balls.

As described above, for BBs with many balls in a chance round, the continuation rate is inevitably high, so there is a tendency for the continuation rate to increase each time the BB is overwritten; however, by adjusting the success rate of overwriting the BB (ease of pattern combination) to be different, the continuation rates (70%, or approximately 70%) for multiple BBs (BB10, BB11, BB12) are configured to be the same. Note that the continuation rates for multiple BBs do not need to be completely consistent, as long as they are approximately the same (almost identical).

In this case, "approximately the same" includes approximate values within a ±1% range of 69% to 71%, for example. Note that the value is not limited to the ±1% range, and is not limited to this value as long as it is a value that is difficult for humans (especially players) to sense.

The success rate of overwriting the BB (ease of pattern combination) is determined by the number of chance rounds, the number of balls held, the probability of drawing the activated pattern number, and the type of BNS activation role corresponding to the activated pattern number.

In detail, when BB10 is activated, there is one chance round, the number of balls is seven, and the following operating symbol numbers are determined by drawing lots (see FIG. 49). The continuation rate, which is the success rate of overwriting the BB when one chance round is performed, is 70% (or may be approximately 70%). Note that the operating symbol numbers 31 to 33 are also selected by drawing lots, but because the probability of being determined by drawing lots is low, they are not taken into consideration in this explanation. However, it should be noted that the results of drawing the operating symbol numbers are actually taken into consideration.
(1) Activation symbol number 36: The drawing probability is 1745/10000, and the BNS activation symbols determined are 01, 06, and 12.
(2) Activation symbol number 37: The drawing probability is 4,500/10,000, and 08, 10, and 12 are determined as the BNS activation symbols.
(3) Activation symbol number 38: The drawing probability is 2,300/10,000, and the BNS activation symbols determined are 01, 05, 06, 07, 12, 13, and 14.
(4) Activation symbol number 39: The drawing probability is 1,400/10,000, and the BNS activation symbols determined are 08, 09, 10, 11, 12, 13, and 14.
(5) Activation symbol number 40: The drawing probability is 50/10,000, and the BNS activation symbols are determined to be 15, 16, 17, and 18.

Here, we show the success rate of the BNS activation role when using four balls. Note that when using four or more balls, the success rate will be different from this value, but the tendency will be the same.
(1) Success rate of BNS operator 01 = 4.6%
(2) Success rate of BNS operator 06 = 8.8%
(3) Success rate of BNS operator 08 = 25.5%
(4) Success rate of BNS operator 09 = 75.2%
(5) Success rate of BNS actuator 10 = 34.9%
(6) Success rate of BNS actuator 12 = 8.2%
(7) Success rate of BNS operators 15-15 = 90%

Next, BB11 will be explained. When BB11 is activated, there is one chance round, the number of balls is eight, and the following operating pattern number is determined by drawing lots. The continuation rate, which is the success rate of overwriting the BB when one chance round is performed, is 70% (or approximately 70%). Note that the operating pattern numbers 31 to 33 are also selected by drawing lots, but because the probability of being determined by drawing lots is low, they are not considered in this explanation. However, it should be noted that the drawing results of these operating pattern numbers are actually taken into consideration.
(1) Activation symbol number 41: The drawing probability is 3,345/10,000, and 01, 06, and 12 are determined as the BNS activation symbols.
(2) Activation symbol number 42: The drawing probability is 4,000/10,000, and 08, 10, and 12 are determined as the BNS activation symbols.
(3) Activation symbol number 43: The drawing probability is 1900/10000, and the BNS activation symbols determined are 01, 05, 06, 07, 12, 13, and 14.
(4) Activation symbol number 44: The drawing probability is 700/10,000, and the BNS activation symbols determined are 08, 09, 10, 11, 12, 13, and 14.
(5) Activation symbol number 45: The drawing probability is 50/10,000, and the BNS activation symbols are determined to be 15, 16, 17, and 18.

When BB12 is activated, there is one chance round, the number of balls is nine, and the following activation symbol number is determined by drawing lots. The continuation rate, which is the success rate of overwriting the BB when one chance round is performed, is 70% (or may be approximately 70%).
(1) Activation symbol number 46: The drawing probability is 4898/10000, and the BNS activation symbols determined are 01, 06, and 12.
(2) Activation symbol number 47: The drawing probability is 3,500/10,000, and 08, 10, and 12 are determined as the BNS activation symbols.
(3) Activation symbol number 48: The drawing probability is 1200/10000, and the BNS activation symbols determined are 01, 05, 06, 07, 12, 13, and 14.
(4) Activation symbol number 49: The drawing probability is 400/10,000, and the BNS activation symbols determined are 08, 09, 10, 11, 12, 13, and 14.
(5) Activation symbol number 50: The probability of drawing is 2/10,000, and the BNS activation symbols are 15, 16, 17, and 18.

For example, BB10 and BB11 have different numbers of balls in the fifth round of the continuation chance game, 7 and 8, which would normally result in different continuation rates, but BB11 is designed to have a lower success rate for overwriting the BB (ease of pattern combinations), which allows for roughly the same continuation rates between BB10 and BB11. Similarly, BB11 and BB12 have different numbers of balls in the fifth round of the continuation chance game, 8 and 9, which would normally result in different continuation rates, but BB12 is designed to have a lower success rate for overwriting the BB (ease of pattern combinations), which allows for roughly the same continuation rates between BB11 and BB12.

Next, the fifth group will be described with reference to Figure 74. The continuation rate of each of BB13, BB14, BB15, BB16, and BB17 constituting the fifth group is also set to 80% (or approximately 80%). Here, the number of chance rounds in the fifth group and the balls held in the chance round are set as follows.
(1) BB13's chance round is 2, balls in hand are 6 and 7 (2) BB14's chance round is 2, balls in hand are 6 and 8 (3) BB15's chance round is 2, balls in hand are 6 and 9 (4) BB16's chance round is 2, balls in hand are 6 and 10 (5) BB17's chance round is 2, balls in hand are 6 and 11

As described above, for BBs with many balls in a chance round, the continuation rate is inevitably high, so there is a tendency for the continuation rate to increase each time the BB is overwritten; however, by adjusting the success rate of the BB overwriting (ease of pattern combination) to be different, the continuation rates (80%, or approximately 80%) for multiple BBs (BB13, BB14, BB15, BB16, BB17) are configured to be the same. Note that the continuation rates for overwriting BBs do not need to be completely consistent, as long as they are approximately the same.

The success rate (ease of pattern combination) is determined by the number of chance rounds, the number of balls held, the probability of drawing the activated pattern number, and the type of BNS activation role corresponding to the activated pattern number.

In detail, when BB13 is activated, there are two chance rounds, the number of balls in the chance round is 6 or 7, and the following activated symbol number is determined by drawing lots. The continuation rate of overwriting the BB when two chance rounds are performed is 80% (or may be approximately 80%). Note that the continuation rate here is the average continuation rate when two chance rounds are performed, and does not mean that the continuation rate of each chance round is 80% (or may be approximately 80%).
(1) Activation symbol number 51: The drawing probability is 650/10,000, and 01, 06, and 12 are determined as the BNS activation symbols.
(2) Activation symbol number 52: The drawing probability is 3,500/10,000, and 08, 10, and 12 are determined as the BNS activation symbols.
(3) Activation symbol number 53: The drawing probability is 3,800/10,000, and the BNS activation symbols determined are 01, 05, 06, 07, 12, 13, and 14.
(4) Activation symbol number 54: The drawing probability is 2000/10000, and the BNS activation symbols determined are 08, 09, 10, 11, 12, 13, and 14.
(5) Activation symbol number 55: The drawing probability is 50/10,000, and the BNS activation symbols are determined to be 15, 16, 17, and 18.

When BB14 is activated, there are two chance rounds, the number of balls in the chance round is 6 or 8, and the following activated symbol number is determined by drawing lots. The continuation rate of BB overwriting when two chance rounds are performed is 80% (may be approximately 80%). Note that the continuation rate here is the average continuation rate when two chance rounds are performed, and does not mean that the continuation rate of each chance round is 80% (may be approximately 80%).
(1) Activation symbol number 56: The drawing probability is 1650/10000, and the BNS activation symbols determined are 01, 06, and 12.
(2) Activation symbol number 57: The drawing probability is 3,000/10,000, and 08, 10, and 12 are determined as the BNS activation symbols.
(3) Activation symbol number 58: The drawing probability is 3,800/10,000, and the BNS activation symbols determined are 01, 05, 06, 07, 12, 13, and 14.
(4) Activation symbol number 59: The drawing probability is 1,500/10,000, and the BNS activation symbols determined are 08, 09, 10, 11, 12, 13, and 14.
(5) Activation pattern number 60: The drawing probability is 50/10,000, and the BNS activation roles are determined to be 15, 16, 17, and 18.

When BB15 is activated, there are two chance rounds, the number of balls in the chance round is 6 or 9, and the following activated symbol number is determined by drawing lots. The continuation rate of overwriting the BB when two chance rounds are performed is 80% (or may be approximately 80%). Note that the continuation rate here is the average continuation rate when two chance rounds are performed, and does not mean that the continuation rate of each chance round is 80% (or may be approximately 80%).
(1) Activation symbol number 61: The drawing probability is 1,550/10,000, and 01, 06, and 12 are determined as the BNS activation symbols.
(2) Activation symbol number 62: The drawing probability is 3,400/10,000, and 08, 10, and 12 are determined as the BNS activation symbols.
(3) Activation symbol number 63: The drawing probability is 4,500/10,000, and the BNS activation symbols determined are 01, 05, 06, 07, 12, 13, and 14.
(4) Activation symbol number 64: The drawing probability is 500/10,000, and the BNS activation symbols determined are 08, 09, 10, 11, 12, 13, and 14.
(5) Activation symbol number 65: The drawing probability is 50/10,000, and the BNS activation symbols are 15, 16, 17, and 18.

When BB16 is activated, there are two chance rounds, the number of balls in the chance round is 6 or 10, and the following activated symbol number is determined by drawing lots. The continuation rate of overwriting the BB when two chance rounds are performed is 80% (or may be approximately 80%). Note that the continuation rate here is the average continuation rate when two chance rounds are performed, and does not mean that the continuation rate of each chance round is 80% (or may be approximately 80%).
(1) Activation symbol number 66: The drawing probability is 2850/10000, and 01, 06, and 12 are determined as the BNS activation symbols.
(2) Activation symbol number 67: The drawing probability is 2,300/10,000, and the BNS activation symbols are 08, 10, and 12.
(3) Activation symbol number 68: The drawing probability is 4,500/10,000, and the BNS activation symbols determined are 01, 05, 06, 07, 12, 13, and 14.
(4) Activation symbol number 69: The drawing probability is 300/10,000, and the BNS activation symbols determined are 08, 09, 10, 11, 12, 13, and 14.
(5) Activation symbol number 70: The drawing probability is 50/10,000, and the BNS activation symbols are 15, 16, 17, and 18.

When BB17 is activated, there are two chance rounds, the number of balls in the chance round is 6 or 11, and the following activated symbol number is determined by drawing lots. The continuation rate of overwriting the BB when two chance rounds are performed is 80% (or may be approximately 80%). Note that the continuation rate here is the average continuation rate when two chance rounds are performed, and does not mean that the continuation rate of each chance round is 80% (or may be approximately 80%).
(1) Activation symbol number 76: The drawing probability is 4,350/10,000, and the BNS activation symbols are determined to be 01, 06, and 12.
(2) Activation symbol number 77: The drawing probability is 1000/10000, and the BNS activation symbols are 08, 10, and 12.
(3) Activation symbol number 78: The drawing probability is 4,500/10,000, and the BNS activation symbols determined are 01, 05, 06, 07, 12, 13, and 14.
(4) Activation symbol number 79: The drawing probability is 100/10,000, and the BNS activation symbols determined are 08, 09, 10, 11, 12, 13, and 14.
(5) Activation symbol number 80: The drawing probability is 50/10,000, and the BNS activation symbols are 15, 16, 17, and 18.

Next, the seventh group will be described with reference to Figure 74. The continuation rate of each of BB23, BB24, BB25, BB26, BB27, and BB28 constituting the seventh group is also set to 90% (or approximately 90%). Here, the number of chance rounds in the seventh group and the balls held in the chance round are set as follows.
(1) BB23's chance round is 3, and he has 5, 6, and 7 balls. (2) BB24's chance round is 3, and he has 5, 6, and 8 balls. (3) BB25's chance round is 3, and he has 5, 6, and 9 balls. (4) BB26's chance round is 3, and he has 5, 6, and 10 balls. (5) BB27's chance round is 3, and he has 5, 6, and 11 balls. (6) BB28's chance round is 3, and he has 5, 6, and 12 balls.

As described above, for BBs with many balls in the chance round, the continuation rate is inevitably high, so there is a tendency for the continuation rate to increase each time the BB is overwritten; however, by adjusting the success rate (ease of pattern combination) to be different, the continuation rates (90%, or even approximately 90%) for multiple BBs (BB23, BB24, BB25, BB26, BB27, BB28) are configured to be the same. Note that the continuation rates for overwriting BBs do not need to be completely consistent, as long as they are approximately the same.

The success rate (ease of pattern combination) is determined by the number of chance rounds, the number of balls held, the probability of drawing the activated pattern number, and the type of BNS activation role corresponding to the activated pattern number.

In detail, when BB23 is activated, there are three chance rounds, the number of balls in the chance rounds is 5, 6, and 7, and the following activated symbol numbers are determined by drawing lots. The continuation rate of BB overwriting when three chance rounds are performed is 90% (or may be approximately 90%). Note that the continuation rate here is the average continuation rate when three chance rounds are performed, and does not mean that the continuation rate of each chance round is 90% (or may be approximately 90%).
(1) Activation symbol number 81: The drawing probability is 100/10,000, and 01, 06, and 12 are determined as the BNS activation symbols.
(2) Activation symbol number 82: The drawing probability is 4,200/10,000, and 08, 10, and 12 are determined as the BNS activation symbols.
(3) Activation symbol number 83: The drawing probability is 3,500/10,000, and the BNS activation symbols determined are 01, 05, 06, 07, 12, 13, and 14.
(4) Activation symbol number 84: The drawing probability is 2200/10000, and the BNS activation symbols determined are 08, 09, 10, 11, 12, 13, and 14.

When BB24 is activated, there are three chance rounds, the number of balls in the chance rounds is 5, 6, and 8, and the following activation symbol numbers are determined by drawing lots. The continuation rate of BB overwriting when three chance rounds are performed is 90% (or may be approximately 90%). Note that the continuation rate here is the average continuation rate when three chance rounds are performed, and does not mean that the continuation rate of each chance round is 90% (or may be approximately 90%).
(1) Activation symbol number 85: The drawing probability is 600/10,000, and the BNS activation symbols determined are 01, 06, and 12.
(2) Activation symbol number 86: The drawing probability is 4100/10000, and 08, 10, and 12 are determined as the BNS activation symbols.
(3) Activation symbol number 87: The drawing probability is 3,500/10,000, and the BNS activation symbols determined are 01, 05, 06, 07, 12, 13, and 14.
(4) Activation symbol number 88: The drawing probability is 1,800/10,000, and the BNS activation symbols determined are 08, 09, 10, 11, 12, 13, and 14.

When BB25 is activated, there are three chance rounds, the number of balls in the chance rounds is 5, 6, and 9, and the following activation symbol numbers are determined by drawing lots. The continuation rate of BB overwriting when three chance rounds are performed is 90% (or may be approximately 90%). Note that the continuation rate here is the average continuation rate when three chance rounds are performed, and does not mean that the continuation rate of each chance round is 90% (or may be approximately 90%).
(1) Activation symbol number 89: The drawing probability is 1,300/10,000, and the BNS activation symbols are determined to be 01, 06, and 12.
(2) Activation symbol number 90: The drawing probability is 3,900/10,000, and 08, 10, and 12 are determined as the BNS activation symbols.
(3) Activation symbol number 91: The drawing probability is 3,500/10,000, and the BNS activation symbols determined are 01, 05, 06, 07, 12, 13, and 14.
(4) Activation symbol number 92: The drawing probability is 1,300/10,000, and the BNS activation symbols determined are 08, 09, 10, 11, 12, 13, and 14.

When BB26 is activated, there are three chance rounds, the number of balls in the chance rounds is 5, 6, and 10, and the following activated symbol numbers are determined by drawing lots. The continuation rate of overwriting the BB when three chance rounds are performed is 90% (or may be approximately 90%). Note that the continuation rate here is the average continuation rate when three chance rounds are performed, and does not mean that the continuation rate of each chance round is 90% (or may be approximately 90%).
(1) Activation symbol number 93: The drawing probability is 2000/10000, and 01, 06, and 12 are determined as the BNS activation symbols.
(2) Activation symbol number 94: The drawing probability is 3,700/10,000, and the BNS activation symbols are 08, 10, and 12.
(3) Activation symbol number 95: The drawing probability is 3,500/10,000, and the BNS activation symbols determined are 01, 05, 06, 07, 12, 13, and 14.
(4) Activation symbol number 96: The drawing probability is 800/10,000, and the BNS activation symbols determined are 08, 09, 10, 11, 12, 13, and 14.

When BB27 is activated, there are three chance rounds, the number of balls in the chance rounds is 5, 6, and 11, and the following activation symbol numbers are determined by drawing lots. The continuation rate of BB overwriting when three chance rounds are performed is 90% (or may be approximately 90%). Note that the continuation rate here is the average continuation rate when three chance rounds are performed, and does not mean that the continuation rate of each chance round is 90% (or may be approximately 90%).
(1) Activation symbol number 97: The drawing probability is 2800/10000, and the BNS activation symbols determined are 01, 06, and 12.
(2) Activation symbol number 98: The drawing probability is 3,200/10,000, and 08, 10, and 12 are determined as the BNS activation symbols.
(3) Activation symbol number 99: The drawing probability is 3,500/10,000, and the BNS activation symbols determined are 01, 05, 06, 07, 12, 13, and 14.
(4) Activation symbol number 100: The drawing probability is 500/10,000, and the BNS activation symbols determined are 08, 09, 10, 11, 12, 13, and 14.

When BB28 is activated, there are three chance rounds, the number of balls in the chance round is 5, 6, or 12, and the following activated symbol numbers are determined by drawing lots. The continuation rate of overwriting the BB when three chance rounds are performed is 90% (or may be approximately 90%). Note that the continuation rate here is the average continuation rate when three chance rounds are performed, and does not mean that the continuation rate of each chance round is 90% (or may be approximately 90%).
(1) Activation symbol number 101: The drawing probability is 4000/10000, and 01, 06, and 12 are determined as the BNS activation symbols.
(2) Activation symbol number 102: The drawing probability is 2100/10000, and 08, 10, and 12 are determined as the BNS activation symbols.
(3) Activation symbol number 103: The drawing probability is 3,500/10,000, and the BNS activation symbols determined are 01, 05, 06, 07, 12, 13, and 14.
(4) Activation symbol number 104: The drawing probability is 400/10,000, and the BNS activation symbols determined are 08, 09, 10, 11, 12, 13, and 14.

The 8th to 13th groups also have a 90% (or approximately 90%) BB overwrite continuation rate, and the chance rounds are the same as the 7th group, so a description of them will be omitted.

Under the constraint that only advantageous BBs can be overwritten, in the second embodiment, the continuation rates of multiple BBs are designed to be approximately the same. Specifically,
(1) A plurality of special games (BB10 to BB12) have a first continuation rate (70%), and these continuation rates are approximately the same.
(2) A plurality of special games (BB13 to BB17) have a second continuation rate (80%), and these continuation rates are approximately the same.
(3) A number of special games (BB23 to BB64) have a third continuation rate (90%), and these continuation rates are approximately the same.

By configuring it in this way, it is possible to achieve roughly the same continuation rate between multiple BBs, on the premise that the BBs are overwritten with advantageous ones. This also makes it possible to prevent the degree of advantage in multiple BBs from increasing excessively.

In addition, the continuation rate can be changed by changing the number of chance rounds depending on the type of BB.
(1) There is one chance round in a special game with the first continuation rate (70%). (2) There are two chance rounds in a special game with the second continuation rate (80%). (3) There are three chance rounds in a special game with the third continuation rate (90%).

Furthermore, the continuation rate can be changed by changing the ball held. For example,
(1) BB10 with the first continuation rate (70%) is 7 balls (the chance round for the special game is 1 time)
(2) BB13 with the second continuation rate (80%) is 6 balls and 7 balls (there are 2 chance rounds for the special game)
(3) BB23 with the third continuation rate (90%) is 5, 6, and 7 balls (3 chance rounds for special play)

By setting the number of chance rounds in this way so that the winning rate of the BB differs, the continuation rate can be changed between different BBs.

In addition, the mahjong ball game machine of the second embodiment is provided with BB18 as a special special game, as shown in FIG. 59. BB18 as the sixth group is configured to be transitionable from the normal game state, as shown by the right arrow in (e). BB18 is also configured to be transitionable (overwriteable) from the first group, as shown by the right arrow in (g). BB18 is also configured to be transitionable (overwriteable) from the second group, as shown by the right arrow in (i). BB18 is also configured to be transitionable (overwriteable) from the third group, as shown by the right arrow in (k). BB18 is also configured to be transitionable (overwriteable) from some BBs in the fourth group, as shown by the arrows in (m) and (0). And, from the sixth group to the seventh group, the transition is confirmed (overwrite is confirmed) unless an incorrect shot is made. In other words, the sixth group including BB18 is a premier flag that confirms the overwriting of BB.

Here, we will explain the incorrect way of hitting. For example, if you win the activation symbol number 71 in the 7th round, which is the chance round when BB18 is activated (BB18 can only win the activation symbol number 71), BNS activation symbols 01 to 14 are determined as the bonus pattern. If you hit the right hand side with 12 balls in the 7th round of BB18, any of the symbol combinations of BNS activation symbols 01 to 14 will be completed with approximately 100% probability. On the other hand, if you hit the middle or left hand side, any of the symbol combinations of BNS activation symbols 01 to 14 will not be completed. Therefore, an incorrect way of hitting is a way of hitting the right hand side in the 7th round of BB18, but a middle or left hand side hit is performed.

As shown in (a) and (b) of FIG. 72, in a normal game state transition (normal route), it is possible to move to the 7th group (HBB with the highest continuation rate of 90%) via the 5th group without passing through the 6th group, but in a special game state transition (special route), it is possible to move to the 7th group via a route via the 6th group. Note that it is possible to move to the 6th group from any group lower than the 6th group, other than the 5th group. In other words, it is possible to move to the 6th group (overwrite) from any of the 1st to 4th groups without passing through the 5th group.

For example, the special route is
(1) Normal game state → Group 6 → Group 7 (highest continuation rate)
(2) Group 1 → Group 6 → Group 7 (highest retention rate)
(3) Group 2 → Group 6 → Group 7 (highest retention rate)
(4) Group 3 → Group 6 → Group 7 (highest retention rate)
(5) Group 4 → Group 6 → Group 7 (highest retention rate)
It is as follows.

In summary, instead of the fifth group (BB13-BB17) which is the group with the second continuation rate (80%), there is a sixth group (BB18-BB22) which is guaranteed to continue. There is a possibility of moving to the sixth group from the third group (BB9 as RB) or the fourth group (BB10-BB12 as BB), and if the PBB is won, it will first move to BB18, and then it is almost certain to continue to BB22 via BB19, BB20, and BB21. In other words, it is configured so that it is almost certain to move to HBB with the third continuation rate (90%). In this way, by providing a special route as a premium route separate from the normal route, it is possible to add variety to the gameplay and give the player an even greater sense of anticipation.

If it is possible to move to the 6th group from a group lower than the 6th group, other than the 5th group, it is also possible to provide a 6th group (BB18-BB22) with a continuation confirmed, instead of the 4th group (BB9-BB12) which is the group with the first continuation rate (70%). In this case, there is a possibility of moving to the 6th group from the 3rd group (BB9 as RB), and if the PBB is won, it will first move to BB18, and then it will almost certainly continue to BB22 via BB19, BB20, and BB21. In other words, it is configured so that the move to HBB with the third continuation rate (90%) is almost certainly made. In this way, by providing a special route as a premium route separate from the normal route, it is possible to change the gameplay and give the player a greater sense of expectation.

As shown in Figs. 64 to 71, the effects during a series of special games are configured to display (notify, suggest) the type of group of special games in which the player is staying, the type of group of special games to aim for as a target display, and which of the groups of special games in which the player is currently staying as a stage display. The Mahjong ball game machine of the second embodiment is designed so that one group is a set of multiple BBs, such as the first continuation rate (70%) x 3 times, the second continuation rate (80%) x 5 times, and the third continuation rate (90%) x 6 times, so that it is possible to display in advance the type of group of special games to which there is a possibility of transition in the future. For example, the BB with a continuation rate of 70% shown in Fig. 65 is a set of 3 times, so a display like a scenario map of breaking through the barrier of 3 times is performed, and when the barrier is broken through, the possibility of transitioning to the next group of special games, SBB, is indicated. This type of gameplay is realized because the second embodiment is designed so that the BB lottery table differs for each BB in which the player remains (for example, the table when BB10 in FIG. 49 is activated is different from the table when BB11 is activated), and the BB to which the player will move in the future is essentially determined. Therefore, in a gameplay in which the BB is overwritten multiple times, the player can properly grasp which special game is currently being played. In addition, because the gameplay to be aimed for during a special game becomes clear, the player can properly grasp the type of group of special games currently being played and the timing of the transition to the type of group of special games to be aimed for.

The mahjong ball game machine of the second embodiment is configured to change the number of medals that a player can win by setting the operable state of the score increase device according to predetermined conditions (BB type, round, etc.). As explained in the winning medal number table by winning role in FIG. 57, in the second embodiment, the number of medals that can be won is set to 1 for all winning roles. The operable state of the score increase device is set to 30 times when score increase device 1 is operable, 15 times when score increase device 2 is operable, and 3 times when score increase device 3 is operable, so the number of medals that a player can win varies depending on the game status including the BB type.

For example, simply put,
(1) During BB, SBB, and HBB, the payout is 30 times, meaning that the payout for one coin is 3 times the normal amount = 30 coins. (2) During RB, the payout is 15 times the normal amount = 15 coins. (3) During the Chance Round, the payout is 3 times the normal amount = 3 coins.

The detailed conditions for the score increasing device 1 operable state, the score increasing device 2 operable state, and the score increasing device 3 operable state are as follows. The number of score increasing devices operable (the number of score increasing devices) is set to three, but it may be one or two, or it may be three or more.

(1) Conditions for the score increasing device 1 to be in an operable state: (c) It must be from the second round onwards, excluding games in which the number of balls fired is greater than three when a BB that is greater than or equal to BB10 and is not the highest BB (BB71) is in operation, or it must be from the second round onwards when the highest BB is in operation.
(d) The game ball passes through the gate 14 or the gate 22. The display of the operable state of the score increasing device 1 ends at the same time as the end of the game.

(2) Conditions for putting the score increasing device 2 into an operable state: (a) It must be the second round or later, excluding games in which the number of balls fired when BB9 is in operation is greater than three.
(b) The game ball passes through the gate 14 or the gate 22. The display of the operable state of the score increasing device 2 is terminated at the same time as the game ends.

(3) Conditions for putting the score increasing device 3 into an operable state: (1) The game must be in a state in which the number of balls shot when BB 9 or higher and a BB that is not the highest BB is in operation is greater than 3.
(2) The game ball passes through the gate 14 or the gate 22. The display of the operable state of the score increasing device 3 ends at the same time as the game ends.

Next, an example of a case in which such a score increasing device is used will be described. For example, in the case of BB9, score increasing device 2 is enabled in games that are not chance rounds from 2R to 4R, and score increasing device 3 is enabled in the chance round of 5R. On the other hand, in the case of BB10, score increasing device 1 is enabled in games that are not chance rounds from 2R to 4R, and score increasing device 3 is enabled in the chance round of 5R. In this way, different score increasing devices can be enabled depending on the type of BB or the type of round within the same BB.

This configuration makes it possible to create a game with a sharp contrast according to the game state. Also, by setting the multiplier to maintain the current status during continuation chances and promotion chances (i.e., situations where balls are not actually won, but rather challenging situations where the player aims for the next BB), it is possible to prevent balls from being inadvertently split in unintended situations. Also, by limiting the number of balls released, players can concentrate on chance rounds.

Although the chance round is set to 3x, it may be set to 15x or 30x. However, setting it to 15x or 30x would result in balls being unintentionally consumed in the games where the chance for continuation or promotion branch off, which is undesirable from the standpoint of gaming machine design. Therefore, by setting the payout to 3 coins, which is 3x the payout of 1 coin, the necessary medals are awarded for one game, and by maintaining the status quo, the chance round can be played without causing any disadvantage to the user, and a ball payout design is achieved that does not award excessive balls. Also, by not awarding excessive balls in this way, it has the effect of allowing the player to concentrate on challenging the chance round.

Next, the firing process will be explained using Figure 75. Figure 75 is a flowchart of the firing process related to the subroutine of step 3654 in Figure 54.

First, in step 3654-2, the self-drawn tile control means 1902 determines whether condition 1 is met. Condition 1 is when BB1 to BB8 are activated and the activated symbol number is 7 to 32.

If the answer is Yes at step 3654-2, then at step 3654-4, the self-drawn tile control means 1902 sets the firing interval to 1.5 seconds and performs firing control.

On the other hand, if the answer is No at step 3654-2, then at step 3654-6, the self-drawn tile control means 1902 determines whether condition 2 is met. Condition 2 is the case of a chance round when BB9 is activated (a game with more than three game balls) or a chance round when BB10 or more is activated (a game with more than three game balls).

If the answer is Yes in step 3654-6, in step 3654-8, the self-drawn tile control means 1902 sets the firing interval to 2.0 seconds and performs firing control.

On the other hand, if the answer is No at step 3654-6, then at step 3654-10, the self-drawn tile control means 1902 determines whether condition 3 is met. Condition 3 is when BB1 to BB8 are activated and the activated symbol number is not 7 to 32, when BB9 is activated it is not a chance round (a game with more than three game balls), and when BB10 or above is activated it is not a chance round (a game with more than three game balls). In other words, it is when neither condition 1 nor condition 2 is met.

If the answer is Yes at step 3654-10, then at step 3654-12, the self-drawn tile control means 1902 sets the firing interval to 0.6 seconds and performs firing control.

On the other hand, if the answer is No at step 3654-10, the process ends, but it is preferable to treat this as an error related to the launch.

By controlling the firing interval according to the game state in this way, it is possible to match the presentation speed of that game state (especially BB), allowing the player to enjoy a comfortable gameplay.

In the second embodiment, a wait process may be provided at the start of a game in a normal game state. The wait process at the start of a game in a normal game state is as follows (1).
(1) When a specific symbol activation number is selected, a fixed wait time is given. The specific symbol activation number is 13 to 32 (not limited thereto), and the fixed wait time is 5 seconds (not limited thereto).

In the second embodiment, a wait process may also be provided at the start of a game when the presentation is not BB (normal game state and game states BB1 to BB8). The wait process at the start of a game in this game state is executed by setting a value obtained by adding up the time values of (1) and (2) below.
(1) When a specific symbol activation number is selected, a fixed wait time is given. The specific symbol activation number is 13 to 32 (not limited thereto), and the fixed wait time is 5 seconds (not limited thereto).
(2) A time value is determined by drawing lots depending on the winning activation pattern number, the type of BB in operation, and the current round number.

By configuring it in this way, it is possible to execute a waiting effect at the start of play that corresponds to the game status.

In the second embodiment, the wait process at the start of a game for BB9 or more may be as follows.
(1) When BB9 starts (when the first BB of the third group starts): 5 seconds (2) When BB10 starts (when the first BB of the fourth group starts): 7 seconds (3) When BB13 starts (when the first BB of the fifth group starts): 10 seconds (4) When BB18 starts (when the first BB of the sixth group starts): 25 seconds (5) When BB23 starts (when the first BB of the seventh group starts): 14 seconds (6) When any BB other than the above starts: 3 seconds

By configuring it in this way, it is possible to execute a waiting effect at the start of play that corresponds to the type of BB group.

Next, we will explain consecutive steps using Figure 76. For example, in the chance round, which is the 6th round of BB13, 6 balls can be fired at the start of the game, the activation symbol number 52 is determined, and when the symbol combination of "G.G.G (Bell Bell Bell)", which is BNS activation symbol 08, is completed, it becomes BB14, and the BB is overwritten.

(a) is a diagram showing that after the BET button 18 for starting a game is operated, the launch handle is operated to launch three balls, and the three launched game balls enter the jackpot. The launched game balls enter the symbol entrances 13-22, 13-16, and 13-17. The second performance display device 10 displays an image "Aim for the bell!!" indicating that the right-hand hit area should be aimed. In addition, the lamps of the symbol entrances 13-18 to 13-24 are lit. The speaker and frame lamps also notify with a sound and lamp pattern for right-hand hit. In addition, the second performance display device 10 displays an image "Continuation chance". The hand tile area 16 of the first performance display device 16 displays the hand tile patterns "G, B1, C1".

(b) is a diagram notifying the user that two tiles in the hand will be discarded. Here, the first display device 16 is configured to execute a discard navigation effect in which the hand tiles "B1" and "C1", which are not required for a BB win, are surrounded by a dashed line to highlight the tiles to be discarded.

(c) shows the state after the "B1" and "C1" hand tile patterns have been automatically discarded in succession. This automatic discarding of multiple hand tile patterns in succession is called "continuous discard."

(d) is a diagram (part 1) showing the continuation of (c), in which the first of the three remaining balls (the fourth ball if calculated from the beginning) and the second ball (the fifth ball if calculated from the beginning) have entered the bell symbol entry hole 13-22. In this case, the BNS activation role 08 is won, the BB is overwritten, and the game moves to BB14. Although this shows an example of two balls being fired consecutively, it is also possible to fire one ball at a time.

(e) is a diagram (part 2) showing the continuation of (c), in which one of the first and second balls of the remaining three balls enters the "G (bell)" symbol entry hole 13-22, and the other enters the "C1" symbol entry hole 13-16, which is a symbol other than a bell. In this case, the "C1" hand symbol is automatically discarded to allow the remaining one ball to be fired. If the remaining one ball enters the "G (bell)" symbol entry hole 13-22, the BNS activation role 08 wins, the BB overwrite is confirmed, and the game moves to BB14. On the other hand, if the remaining one ball enters a symbol entry hole other than "G (bell)", the BNS activation role 08 does not win, the BB overwrite fails, and the game moves to the next seventh chance round. Although an example of firing two balls consecutively is shown, it is also possible to fire one ball at a time.

(f) is a diagram (part 3) showing the continuation of (c), in which the first of the three remaining balls (fourth ball if calculated from the beginning) and the second ball (fifth ball if calculated from the beginning) enter a symbol entry hole other than "G (bell)", here both balls entering the "C1" symbol entry hole 13-16. In this case, since there is only one ball remaining and the BNS activation role 08 does not win, the game is automatically ended (forced to end) and the game moves to the next chance round of 7 rounds. Note that although an example of firing two balls consecutively is shown, it is also possible to fire one ball at a time.

By executing consecutive steps in this way, it is possible to provide a game that does not force the player to perform unnecessary operations (does not allow the player to hit a wasted ball).

Next, using Figure 77, we will explain a game that does not execute consecutive steps. For example, in the chance round, which is the 6th round of BB13, 6 balls can be fired at the start of the game, the activation symbol number 52 is determined, and when the symbol combination of "G.G.G (Bell Bell Bell)", which is BNS activation role 08, is completed, it becomes BB14, and the BB is overwritten.

(a) is a diagram showing that after the BET button 18 for starting a game is operated, the launch handle is operated to launch three balls, and the three launched game balls enter the ball slot. The launched game balls enter the symbol entrances 13-16, 13-16, and 13-17. The second performance display device 10 displays an image "Aim for the bell!!" indicating that the right-hand hit area is to be aimed. In addition, the lamps of the symbol entrances 13-18 to 13-24 are lit. The speaker and the lamps of the frame also notify with a sound and lamp pattern for right-hand hit. In addition, the second performance display device 10 displays an image "Continuation chance". The hand tile area 16 of the first performance display device 16 displays the hand tile patterns "B1, B1, C1". In other words, there is not a single "G (bell)" pattern in the hand tile area 16.

(b) is a diagram notifying the user that one of the tile patterns in the hand will be discarded. Here, the first display device 16 is configured to execute a discard navigation effect in which the hand pattern of "C1", which is not required for a BB win, is surrounded by a dashed line to highlight the hand pattern to be discarded.

(c) is a diagram showing the state after the "C1" hand tile pattern has been automatically discarded. This automatic discarding of consecutive hand tile patterns is called "automatic discard." In this example, consecutive discards are not performed because there are three balls remaining, but consecutive discards can be performed if there are more than three balls remaining (more than the number of hand tile patterns other than the patterns that should be winning). Note that hand tile patterns may also be discarded manually instead of automatically discarding. Also, instead of the right hand tile pattern "C1," the left hand tile pattern "B1" or the middle hand tile pattern "B1" may be discarded.

(d) is a continuation of (c) (part 1), showing that the first of the remaining three balls has entered the bell symbol entry hole 13-22. In this case, the discard tile navigation effect on the first effect display device 16 is configured to execute an effect that highlights the hand tile symbol to be discarded by surrounding the hand tile symbol "B1" of the middle hand tile symbol that is not required for a BB win with a dashed line. After that, the hand tile symbol "B1" is automatically discarded. Note that it is also possible to discard the left hand tile symbol "B1" instead of the middle hand tile symbol "B1".

(e) is a continuation of (d), showing that the first of the two remaining balls has entered the bell pattern entry hole 13-22. In this case, the first effect display device 16 is configured to execute a discard tile navigation effect in which the hand tile pattern "B1", which is a middle hand tile pattern not required for winning with the BB role, is surrounded by a dashed line to highlight the hand tile pattern to be discarded. After that, the hand tile pattern "B1" is automatically discarded. Then, although not shown, if the remaining ball enters the "G (bell)" pattern entry hole 13-22, the BNS activation role 08 wins, the BB overwrite is confirmed, and the game moves to BB14. On the other hand, if the remaining ball enters a pattern entry hole other than "G (bell)", the BNS activation role 08 does not win, the BB overwrite fails, and the game moves to the next 7th chance round.

(f) is a diagram (part 2) showing the continuation of (c), in which the first of the remaining three balls lands in a symbol entry hole other than "G (bell)", in this case, "C1" symbol entry hole 13-16. In this case, the remaining two balls do not result in a winning BNS activation role 08, so the game ends automatically (forced termination) without a step, and the game moves to the next chance round of seven rounds.

In this way, if the relationship between the number of hand tile patterns other than winning patterns and the remaining balls satisfies the relationship (number of hand tile patterns other than winning patterns) - remaining balls > 1, the consecutive steps are executed (as in Figure 76), and if this relationship is not satisfied (as in Figure 77), the consecutive steps are not executed, thereby providing a mahjong ball gaming machine that can execute step operations according to the situation.

(summary)
Based on the configurations shown in the above embodiments, the following concepts can be extracted (listed): However, the concepts listed below are merely examples, and these listed concepts may of course be combined or separated (superordinated), and concepts based on further configurations shown in the above embodiments may be added to these concepts.

The mahjong ball game machine according to this embodiment (C1) is as follows:
A plurality of entrances arranged in the game area;
a plurality of discard means for erasing hand information by being operated;
and a lighting means capable of lighting the lamp.
When a game ball enters any one of a plurality of ball entry openings, hand information corresponding to the ball entry opening is stored;
In a first situation, the lighting means is lit in a predetermined manner, and when the discard means corresponding to the stored predetermined hand information is operated, the predetermined hand information can be erased;
In the second situation, when the lighting means is not lit in the specified manner and the discard means corresponding to the stored specified hand information is operated, the specified hand information is not erased.

The mahjong ball game machine of this embodiment (C1) is equipped with a plurality of symbol ball entry ports 13 arranged in the game area, a plurality of discard tile buttons 19 that can be operated to erase hand tile information, and a lamp of the discard tile button 19 that can be lit, and is configured so that when a game ball enters one of the plurality of symbol ball entry ports 13, the hand tile information corresponding to the symbol ball entry port 13 into which the ball entered can be stored in the hand tile information temporary storage means 2103a, and in the first situation (for example, a situation in which it is a round other than the final round of BB2 and the player has a seven symbol obtained other than through a role as a tehai symbol), the lamp of the discard tile button 19 is lit. is lit in a predetermined manner, and when the discard button 19 corresponding to the seven symbol acquired other than the memorized role is operated, the seven symbol acquired other than the role can be erased, and in the second situation (for example, the final round of BB2 and the seven symbol acquired other than the role is held as the tehai symbol), the lamp of the discard button 19 is not lit in a predetermined manner, and when the discard button 19 corresponding to the seven symbol acquired other than the memorized role is operated, the seven symbol acquired other than the role is not erased.

The mahjong ball game machine according to this embodiment (C2) is as follows:
A plurality of entrances arranged in the game area;
A first operating means that can end a game when operated;
a second operating means that can end the game by being operated;
In a first situation, the game ends when the first operating means is operated, and the game ends when the second operating means is operated,
In the second situation, the game is ended when the first operating means is operated, and the game is not ended when the second operating means is operated.

The mahjong ball game machine of this aspect (C2) is equipped with a plurality of symbol entrances 13 arranged in the game area, a first operation means (e.g., the game end button 26) that can end the game when operated, and a second operation means (e.g., the win button) that can end the game when operated. In a first situation (e.g., a situation where a promotion BB role is established), the game ends when the game end button 26 is operated, and the game also ends when the win button is operated. In a second situation (e.g., a situation where a promotion BB role may be established with the remaining balls), the game ends when the game end button 26 is operated, and the game does not end when the win button is operated. The level meter image may be the "information regarding the firing intensity", or the numerical image of the firing intensity displayed in the firing intensity display area 16-7 may be the "information regarding the firing intensity". Also, a combination of a windmill image, a level meter image, and a numerical image of the emission intensity (for example, a windmill image + a level meter image) may be referred to as "information about emission intensity." Furthermore, the displayed image itself may be referred to as "information about emission intensity."

The mahjong ball game machine according to this embodiment (C3) is as follows:
A launching means capable of launching a set number of balls per game;
An output means;
A special game control means is provided for executing a special game when a special game role is established,
When a special game role is established during the execution of a predetermined game in a special game, a new special game can be executed.
In a situation where there is a possibility that a special game role will be established with the remaining balls during the execution of a predetermined game in the special game, the first information is configured to be output by the output means;
In a situation where there is no possibility of a special game role being established with the remaining balls during execution of a predetermined game in the special game, the second information is configured to be output by the output means.

A mahjong ball game machine of this aspect (C3) is equipped with a launching means capable of launching a ball set for one game, an output means (e.g., a display device, lamp, or speaker), and a special game control means capable of executing a special game when a special game role is established, and is configured to output first information (e.g., a center hit notification or a left hit notification) related to the optimal game method in the first situation (e.g., a situation where there is a possibility that a promotion BB will be established with two balls remaining) from the output means, and to output second information (e.g., a right hit notification) related to the optimal game method in the second situation (e.g., a situation where a promotion BB will not be established with two balls remaining) from the output means.

The mahjong ball game machine of this embodiment (C3) 2 is equipped with an output means (e.g., a display device, lamp, or speaker), and is configured to output first information (e.g., display of a "READY" image) related to the optimal game method in the first situation (e.g., a situation in which the game state is a specific round of a special game, no balls have been fired in the specific round, an operation with a firing strength of 401 or more has been performed, and the firing button 44 is OFF) by the output means, and is configured to output second information (e.g., display of a "GO" image) related to the optimal game method in the second situation (e.g., a situation in which the game state is a specific round of a special game, no balls have been fired in the specific round, an operation with a firing strength of 401 or more has been performed, and the firing button 44 is ON) by the output means.

The mahjong ball gaming machine of this embodiment (C3) 3 is equipped with an output means (e.g., a display device, lamp, or speaker) and is configured to output first information (e.g., a left hit notification) related to the optimal playing method in the first situation (e.g., a situation in which an SC performance is in progress 6 seconds after the game start preparation state and the firing strength is in the strong range) from the output means, and is configured to output second information (e.g., a center hit notification) related to the optimal playing method in the second situation (e.g., a situation in which an SC performance is in progress 6 seconds after the game start preparation state and the firing strength is in the appropriate range) from the output means.

The mahjong ball gaming machine of this embodiment (C3) 4 is equipped with an output means (e.g., a display device, lamp, or speaker) and is configured to output first information (e.g., a left hit notification) related to the optimal playing method in the first situation (e.g., a situation in which the firing strength in the round end processing state is equal to or greater than a predetermined strength) from the output means, and is configured to output second information (e.g., a center hit notification) related to the optimal playing method in the second situation (e.g., a situation in which the firing strength in the round end processing state is less than a predetermined strength) from the output means.

The mahjong ball game machine according to this embodiment (C4) is as follows:
A plurality of entrances arranged in the game area;
A launching means capable of launching a game ball toward a game area;
An information display means capable of displaying information;
A predetermined operation means is provided,
The launch strength of the game balls can be adjusted by the operation mode of the launching means,
The information display means is configured to display information regarding the emission intensity of the emission means,
The display of the information regarding the emission intensity can be changed by operating the predetermined operating means.

The mahjong ball game machine of this embodiment (C4) comprises a plurality of symbol entrances 13 arranged in the game area, a launching means (e.g., a launching device, a launching handle 4) capable of launching game balls towards the game area, a first performance display device 16 capable of displaying information, and a cross button SB-2, and is configured so that the launch strength of the game balls can be adjusted depending on the operating mode of the launching means, and is configured so that information relating to the launch strength of the launching means (e.g., a windmill image FG) can be displayed on the first performance display device 16, and is configured so that the display (e.g., the display position) of the information relating to the launch strength (e.g., the windmill image FG) can be changed by operating the cross button SB-2.

The mahjong ball game machine according to this embodiment (C5) is as follows:
A plurality of entrances arranged in the game area;
A launching means capable of launching a game ball toward a game area;
output means;
The device is configured to store game information including at least the ball entry status of game balls into a plurality of ball entry ports during a predetermined period of time,
The device is configured so that information corresponding to the stored game information can be output by the output means.

The mahjong ball game machine of this embodiment (C5) comprises a plurality of symbol entrance ports 13 arranged in the game area, a launching means (e.g., a launching device, a launching handle 4) capable of launching game balls toward the game area, and an output means (e.g., a display device), and is configured to store game information including at least the operation mode of the launching means during a predetermined period and the entry status of game balls into the plurality of symbol entrance ports 13, and is configured to be able to give notifications corresponding to the stored game information via the display device.

The mahjong ball game machine according to this embodiment (C6) is as follows:
A timing means capable of measuring time;
A storage means capable of storing game media;
A betting means capable of placing a bet on a gaming medium,
When the time measured by the timing means satisfies a predetermined condition, the saving means and the betting means are activated.
When the time measured by the timing means does not satisfy the predetermined condition, the accumulation means is made valid, while the betting means is made invalid.

The mahjong ball game machine of this aspect (C6) is equipped with a timing means (e.g., a timer) capable of measuring time, a storage means (e.g., a means for incrementing the CRE counter value of the medal information temporary storage means 1201) capable of storing game media, and a betting means (e.g., a means for incrementing the betting counter value of the medal information temporary storage means 1201) capable of betting game media, and when the time measured by the timer satisfies a predetermined condition (e.g., weight condition 1 or weight condition 2), the storage means and the betting means are enabled, and when the time measured by the timer does not satisfy the predetermined condition (e.g., weight condition 1 or weight condition 2), the storage means is enabled and the betting means is disabled.

The mahjong ball game machine according to this embodiment (C7) is as follows:
A plurality of entrances arranged in the game area;
A launching means capable of launching a game ball toward a game area;
An information display means capable of displaying information;
A predetermined operation means is provided,
The device is configured to be in a predetermined state when the power supply is newly turned on while the predetermined operation means is being operated and a predetermined condition is satisfied,
In the predetermined state, the launching means can launch game balls, but the game does not progress according to the entry of game balls into the multiple ball entry holes.

The mahjong ball game machine of this embodiment (C7) is equipped with multiple symbol entrance ports 13 arranged in the game area, a launching device capable of launching game balls into the game area, a display device capable of displaying information, and a RAM clear button, and is configured so that when the RAM clear button is operated, the power is turned on again and the machine goes into operation check mode when a predetermined condition is met. In operation check mode, the launching device can launch game balls, but the game does not progress in response to game balls entering the multiple symbol entrance ports 13.

The mahjong ball game machine according to this embodiment (C8) is as follows:
A plurality of entrances arranged in the game area;
A main gaming section that controls the progress of a game;
a sub-game unit that controls the performance display on the performance display unit,
The main gaming department is
when a game ball enters any one of the plurality of ball entrances, the game device is configured to transmit first information and second information to the sub-game unit,
The sub-game section is
In a first situation, a predetermined effect is executed based on receipt of first information from the main gaming unit,
In the second situation, the predetermined presentation is executed based on the reception of second information from the main gaming section.

The mahjong ball game machine of this aspect (C8) comprises a plurality of symbol ball entrances 13 arranged in the game area, a main game section that controls the progress of the game, and a sub-game section that controls the display of effects on the effect display section, and the main game section is configured to transmit first information (e.g., a hand tile information command) and second information (e.g., a wait command) to the sub-game section when a game ball enters one of the plurality of symbol ball entrances 13, and the sub-game section is configured to execute a predetermined effect based on receiving a hand tile information command from the main game section in a first situation (e.g., a situation in which the hand tile area 16 is not filled with hand tile patterns), and is configured to execute a predetermined effect based on receiving a wait command from the main game section in a second situation (e.g., a situation in which the hand tile area 16 is filled with hand tile patterns).

The mahjong ball game machine according to this embodiment (F1) is as follows:
A plurality of entrances arranged in the game area;
a special game control means for executing a special game consisting of a plurality of unit games when it is determined that a win has been made because the hand information matches predetermined winning information;
The special games include at least a first special game and a second special game,
A transition to the first special game can be made from a predetermined game state other than the special game state,
The first special game is configured to be shiftable to the second special game,
An expected value of acquisition, which is a value obtained by subtracting a game value used in the game from a game value granted in the first special game, is configured to be smaller than an expected value of acquisition in the second special game,
The expected value to be acquired in the first special game is configured to be closer to the expected value to be acquired in a predetermined game state than to the expected value to be acquired in the second special game.

The mahjong ball game machine of this aspect (F1) is equipped with a plurality of symbol entrances 13 arranged in the game area, and a special game control means capable of executing a special game consisting of a plurality of unit games when it is determined that a win has been made because the hand information matches the predetermined winning information. As special games, there are at least a first special game (e.g., BB1) and a second special game (e.g., BB9), and it is configured so that BB1 can be overwritten to BB9, and the expected value of winning (e.g., -2 coins), which is the value obtained by subtracting the game value used in the game (e.g., 3 coins) from the game value granted in BB1 (e.g., 1 coin), is configured so that it is smaller than the expected value of winning in BB9 (e.g., 15 coins - 3 coins = 12 coins), and the expected value of winning in BB1 is configured so that the expected value of winning in the normal game state (e.g., -2 coins or -3 coins) is closer to the expected value of winning in BB9 than the expected value of winning in BB9.

The mahjong ball game machine according to this embodiment (F2) is as follows:
A plurality of entrances arranged in the game area;
a special game control means for executing a special game consisting of a plurality of unit games when it is determined that a win has been made because the hand information matches predetermined winning information;
When the hand information matching the predetermined winning information does not include specific hand tile information, the number of game balls available for the special game is set to a predetermined number, whereas when the hand information matching the predetermined winning information includes specific hand tile information, the number of game balls available for the special game is set to a specific number different from the predetermined number.

The mahjong ball game machine of this aspect (F2) is equipped with a plurality of symbol ball entrances 13 arranged in the game area, and a special game control means capable of executing a special game consisting of a plurality of unit games when a win is determined by the hand tile information matching the predetermined winning information. The number of game balls available for the special game is set to a predetermined number when the hand tile information matching the predetermined winning information does not include specific hand tile information (e.g., diamond 1), while the number of game balls available for the special game is set to a specific number different from the predetermined number when the hand tile information matching the predetermined winning information includes specific hand tile information.

The mahjong ball game machine according to this embodiment (F3) is as follows:
A plurality of entrances arranged in the game area;
a special game control means for executing a special game consisting of a plurality of unit games when it is determined that a win has been made because the hand information matches predetermined winning information;
It has multiple special games,
A special game is configured to be shiftable from the certain special game to a special game in which the number of unit games is the same as that of the certain special game and the maximum number of usable game balls in the unit game is greater than that of the certain special game,
The device is configured to be able to shift from a certain special game to a special game having a larger number of unit games than the certain special game and a smaller maximum number of usable game balls in the unit games than the certain special game.
In addition, the mahjong ball game machine according to this embodiment (F3) is as follows:
A plurality of entrances arranged in the game area;
a special game control means for executing a special game consisting of a plurality of unit games when it is determined that a win has been made because the hand information matches predetermined winning information;
The special games include at least a first special game (e.g., BB11), a second special game (e.g., BB12), and a third special game (e.g., BB13),
The first special game has a number of unit games of A times (e.g., 5 times), and a maximum number of usable game balls in the unit game is X (e.g., 8 balls),
The second special game has a number of unit games of A times (e.g., 5 times), and a maximum number of usable game balls in the unit game is Y (e.g., 9 balls) that is greater than X,
The third special game is a game in which the number of unit games is B times (e.g., 7 times) which is greater than the number of unit games A times, and the maximum number of usable game balls in the unit game is Z (e.g., 7 balls) which is less than the maximum number of usable game balls Y times,
The first special game is configured to be shiftable to the second special game,
The second special game is configured to be shiftable to a third special game.

The mahjong ball game machine of this aspect (F3) is equipped with a plurality of symbol entrances 13 arranged in the game area, and a special game control means capable of executing a special game consisting of a plurality of unit games when it is determined that a win has been made because the hand information matches the predetermined winning information. The special games include at least a first special game and a second special game, and are configured to be able to overwrite the first special game with the second special game. It is configured to be able to transition from a certain special game (e.g., BB11) to a special game (e.g., BB12) that has the same number of unit games as the certain special game and has a larger maximum number of usable game balls in the unit game than the certain special game, and is configured to be able to transition from a certain special game (e.g., BB12) to a special game (e.g., BB13) that has a larger number of unit games than the certain special game and has a smaller maximum number of usable game balls in the unit game than the certain special game.

The mahjong ball game machine according to this embodiment (F4) is as follows:
A plurality of entrances arranged in the game area;
a special game control means for executing a special game consisting of a plurality of unit games when it is determined that a win has been made because the hand information matches predetermined winning information;
The special games include at least a first special game, a second special game, and a third special game,
The first special game is configured to be shiftable to the second special game,
The second special game is configured to be shiftable to a third special game,
The maximum number of game balls available in a unit game of the second special game is configured to be greater than the maximum number of game balls available in a unit game of the first special game,
The maximum number of game balls available in a unit game of the third special game is configured to be greater than the maximum number of game balls available in a unit game of the second special game,
When a predetermined number of game balls are used in one unit game, the expected value of satisfying the condition for shifting from the second special game to the third special game is configured to be lower than the expected value of satisfying the condition for shifting from the first special game to the second special game.

The mahjong ball game machine of this aspect (F4) is equipped with a plurality of symbol ball entrances 13 arranged in the game area, and a special game control means capable of executing a special game consisting of a plurality of unit games when it is determined that a win has been made because the hand information matches the predetermined winning information. The special games include at least a first special game (e.g., BB10), a second special game (e.g., BB11), and a third special game (e.g., BB12), and is configured to be overwritten from BB10 to BB11, and is configured to be overwritten from BB11 to BB12, and the maximum number of game balls available in the unit game of BB11 (e.g., 8 balls) is greater than the maximum number of game balls available in the unit game of BB10 (e.g., 7 balls). It is configured so that the maximum number of game balls available in a unit game of B12 (e.g., 9 balls) is greater than the maximum number of game balls available in a unit game of BB11 (e.g., 8 balls), and when a predetermined number of game balls (e.g., 3 balls) are used in one unit game, the expected value of satisfying the condition to move from BB11 to BB12 is lower than the expected value of satisfying the condition to move from BB10 to BB11.

The mahjong ball game machine according to this embodiment (F5) is as follows:
A plurality of entrances arranged in the game area;
a special game control means for executing a special game consisting of a plurality of unit games when it is determined that a win has been made because the hand information matches predetermined winning information;
The special games include at least a first special game, a second special game, and a third special game,
In a predetermined unit game of the first special game, a transition from the first special game to the second special game is possible;
In a predetermined unit game of the second special game, a transition from the second special game to a third special game is possible;
The number of predetermined unit games of the second special game is configured to be greater than the number of predetermined unit games of the first special game.

The mahjong ball game machine of this aspect (F5) is equipped with a plurality of symbol entrances 13 arranged in the game area, and a special game control means capable of executing a special game consisting of a plurality of unit games when a win is determined by the fact that the hand information matches the predetermined winning information. The special games include at least BB12, BB13, and BB14, and are configured so that BB12 can be overwritten with BB13 in the chance round of BB12, and so that BB13 can be overwritten with BB14 in the chance round of BB13, and so that the number of chance rounds of BB13 is greater than the number of chance rounds of BB12.

The mahjong ball game machine according to this embodiment (F6) is as follows:
A plurality of entrances arranged in the game area;
a special game control means for executing a special game consisting of a plurality of unit games when it is determined that a win has been made because the hand information matches predetermined winning information;
The special games include at least a first special game, a second special game, a third special game, and a fourth special game,
The game is configured to be able to transition from the first special game to the third special game via the second special game,
The game is configured to be able to transition from the first special game to the third special game via the fourth special game,
The expectation of transition from the first special game to the third special game via the fourth special game is configured to be higher than the expectation of transition from the first special game to the third special game via the second special game.

The mahjong ball game machine of this embodiment (F6) is equipped with a plurality of symbol entrance ports 13 arranged in the game area, and a special game control means capable of executing a special game consisting of a plurality of unit games when it is determined that a win has been made because the hand information matches predetermined winning information. The special games include at least a first special game (e.g., 70% BB), a second special game (e.g., 80% BB), a third special game (e.g., 90% BB), and a fourth special game (e.g., PBB), and are configured to be able to transition from the first special game (e.g., 70% BB) via the second special game (e.g., 80% BB) to the third special game (e.g., 90% BB), and are configured to be able to transition from the first special game (e.g., 70% BB) via the fourth special game (e.g., PBB) to the third special game (e.g., 90% BB), and are configured so that the expectation of transition from the first special game to the third special game via the fourth special game is higher than the expectation of transition from the first special game to the third special game via the second special game.

The mahjong ball game machine according to this embodiment (F7) is as follows:
A plurality of entrances arranged in the game area;
A display means capable of displaying a performance;
a special game control means for executing a special game consisting of a plurality of unit games when it is determined that a win has been made because the hand information matches predetermined winning information;
The special games include at least a first special game and a second special game,
The first special game is configured to be shiftable to the second special game,
During the first special game, a performance suggesting that the first special game is being executed and a performance suggesting that the second special game is not being executed can be executed;
During the second special game, a presentation suggesting that the second special game is being played and a presentation suggesting that the first special game has been played can be executed.

The mahjong ball game machine of this aspect (F7) includes a plurality of symbol entrances 13 arranged in the game area, a display means capable of displaying effects, and a special game control means capable of executing a special game consisting of a plurality of unit games when a win is determined by the fact that the hand information matches the predetermined winning information. The special games include at least BB9 and BB10, and are configured to be overwritten from BB9 to BB10, and are configured to be able to execute effects suggesting that BB9 is being executed and effects suggesting that BB10 is not being executed during BB9, and are configured to be able to execute effects suggesting that BB10 is being executed and effects suggesting that BB9 has been executed during BB10.

The mahjong ball game machine according to this embodiment (F8) is as follows:
A plurality of entrances arranged in the game area;
A specific ball entry port is arranged in the game area and is capable of increasing a game value provided by entering the ball;
a special game control means for executing a special game consisting of a plurality of unit games when it is determined that a win has been made because the hand information matches predetermined winning information;
When the ball enters a specific ball entry hole in the first gaming state and a specific winning occurs, a first gaming value is awarded;
When the ball enters a specific ball entry port in the second game state and a specific winning occurs, a second game value different from the first game value is awarded.

The mahjong ball game machine of this aspect (F8) is equipped with a plurality of symbol ball entrances 13 arranged in the game area, a gate arranged in the game area that can increase the game value awarded by entering a ball, and a special game control means that can execute a special game consisting of a plurality of unit games when it is determined that a win has been made because the hand information matches the predetermined winning information. When a ball enters the gate in BB9 and a specific winning (e.g., 1-piece role) is obtained, 15 medals are awarded, and when a ball enters the gate in BB10 and a specific winning (e.g., 1-piece role) is obtained, 30 medals other than 15 are awarded. It is also configured so that when a ball enters the gate in 2R of BB9 and a specific winning (e.g., 1-piece role) is obtained, 15 medals are awarded, and when a ball enters the gate in 5R of BB9 and a specific winning (e.g., 1-piece role) is obtained, 3 medals other than 15 are awarded.

1000 Main control board, 1100 Communication control means 1101 Input signal receiving means, 1102 Information transmitting means 1200 Medal management means, 1201 Medal information temporary storage means 1300 Game start determination means, 1600 BB pattern determination means 1601 BB pattern determination/content determination table 1900 Game control means, 1901 Discarded tile control means 1902 Self-drawn tile control means, 1902a Self-drawn game ball supply control means 1902b Remaining ball number counter, 1903 Role determination means 1904 Payout number calculation means, 1904a Winning medal number table by winning role 1905 Game end control means, 1906 Special game control means 1906a Special game game number counter 2100 Game status temporary storage means, 2101 Flag temporary storage means 2102 Temporary storage means for number of game balls, 2103 Temporary storage means for tile information, 2103a Temporary storage means for hand information, 2103b Temporary storage means for discarded tile information, 2106 Temporary storage means for BB pattern, 2110 Temporary storage means for winning information, 2110a Temporary storage means for winning hand, 2110b Temporary storage means for number of acquired medals, 2111 Temporary storage means for special game related information, 2200 Payout control means, 2300 Game related information storage means, 2500 Information transmission/reception control means, 3000 Sub-control board, 3100 Display control means, 3120 Self-drawn tile display control means, 3130 Discarded tile display control means, 3140 Notice effect display control means, 3150 Navigation effect display control means, 3160 Temporary storage means for display related information, 3200 Information transmission/reception control means, 10 Second effect display device, 11 Special ball entrance, 12 Special entrance gate operation gates 13-1, 13-2... Symbol entrance gate 16 First performance display device 18 BET button 19a Left button 19b Center button 19c Right button 25 Medal payout button 4000 Medal payout device 36 Main display device

Claims (1)

A plurality of entrances arranged in the game area;
a special game control means for executing a special game consisting of a plurality of unit games when it is determined that a win has been made because the hand information matches predetermined winning information;
The special games include at least a first special game, a second special game, and a third special game,
In a predetermined unit game of the first special game, a transition from the first special game to the second special game is possible,
In a predetermined unit game of the second special game, a transition from the second special game to a third special game is possible;
This mahjong ball game machine is characterized in that the number of predetermined unit games of the second special game is greater than the number of predetermined unit games of the first special game.

Images